BMC BladeLogic Server Automation

Administration Guide

Supporting
BMC BladeLogic Server Automation version 8.1
February 2011

www.bmc.com

Contacting BMC Software
You can access the BMC Software website at http://www.bmc.com. From this website, you can obtain information about the company, its products, corporate offices, special events, and career opportunities.

United States and Canada
Address BMC SOFTWARE INC 2101 CITYWEST BLVD HOUSTON TX 77042-2827 USA Telephone 713 918 8800 or 800 841 2031 Fax 713 918 8000

Outside United States and Canada
Telephone (01) 713 918 8800 Fax (01) 713 918 8000

© Copyright 2002-2011 BladeLogic, Inc. BMC, BMC Software, and the BMC Software logo are the exclusive properties of BMC Software, Inc., are registered with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office, and may be registered or pending registration in other countries. All other BMC trademarks, service marks, and logos may be registered or pending registration in the U.S. or in other countries. All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. BladeLogic and the BladeLogic logo are the exclusive properties of BladeLogic, Inc. The BladeLogic trademark is registered with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office, and may be registered or pending registration in other countries. All other BladeLogic trademarks, service marks, and logos may be registered or pending registration in the U.S. or in other countries. All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. AIX and IBM, are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. UNIX is the registered trademark of The Open Group in the US and other countries. The information included in this documentation is the proprietary and confidential information of BMC Software, Inc., its affiliates, or licensors. Your use of this information is subject to the terms and conditions of the applicable End User License agreement for the product and to the proprietary and restricted rights notices included in the product documentation.

Restricted rights legend
U.S. Government Restricted Rights to Computer Software. UNPUBLISHED -- RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER THE COPYRIGHT LAWS OF THE UNITED STATES. Use, duplication, or disclosure of any data and computer software by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions, as applicable, set forth in FAR Section 52.227-14, DFARS 252.227-7013, DFARS 252.227-7014, DFARS 252.227-7015, and DFARS 252.227-7025, as amended from time to time. Contractor/Manufacturer is BMC SOFTWARE INC, 2101 CITYWEST BLVD, HOUSTON TX 77042-2827, USA. Any contract notices should be sent to this address.

Customer support
You can obtain technical support by using the BMC Software Customer Support website or by contacting Customer Support by telephone or e-mail. To expedite your inquiry, see “Before contacting BMC.”

Support website
You can obtain technical support from BMC 24 hours a day, 7 days a week at http://www.bmc.com/support. From this website, you can
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

read overviews about support services and programs that BMC offers find the most current information about BMC products search a database for issues similar to yours and possible solutions order or download product documentation download products and maintenance report an issue or ask a question subscribe to receive proactive e-mail alerts when new product notices are released find worldwide BMC support center locations and contact information, including e-mail addresses, fax numbers, and telephone numbers

Support by telephone or e-mail
In the United States and Canada, if you need technical support and do not have access to the web, call 800 537 1813 or send an e-mail message to customer_support@bmc.com. (In the subject line, enter SupID:<yourSupportContractID>, such as SupID:12345). Outside the United States and Canada, contact your local support center for assistance.

Before contacting BMC
Have the following information available so that Customer Support can begin working on your issue immediately:

product information — — — product name product version (release number) license number and password (trial or permanent)

operating system and environment information — — — — — machine type operating system type, version, and service pack or other maintenance level such as PUT or PTF system hardware configuration serial numbers related software (database, application, and communication) including type, version, and service pack or maintenance level

■ ■ ■

sequence of events leading to the issue commands and options that you used messages received (and the time and date that you received them) — — — product error messages messages from the operating system, such as file system full messages from related software

3

License key and password information
If you have questions about your license key or password, use one of the following methods to get assistance:
■ ■

Send an e-mail message to customer_support@bmc.com. Use the Customer Support website at http://www.bmc.com/support.

4

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction 11 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 15 15 16 17 18 19 19 21 29 30 30 31 32 33 33 34 34 39 39 41 41 42 42 42 43 Intended Audience. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Documentation Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Shell Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 2 Overview of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation

System architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Client tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Middle tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default permissions and security configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Perl support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools for managing BMC BladeLogic data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating data for support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring and diagnosing issues in the BMC BladeLogic environment . . . . . . Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server

Understanding the application server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application server processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work item threads and the job execution thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Job distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pooled database connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Authentication framework. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Application Server Launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Post-Install Configuration wizard to configure the default application server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the configuration of an application server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the application server configuration wizard to change configuration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting Application Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting all Application Servers on the host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restarting Application Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restarting all Application Servers on the host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping Application Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping all Application Servers on the host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

5

Using the Application Server Administration console (blasadmin) to configure Application Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Starting the Application Server Administration console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 The set Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 The show Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 The help Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Specifying multiple values for a parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Changing the default separator for multiple values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Deleting a configuration setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Managing Application Server behavior with the Application Server Administration console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Configuring the Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Changing the heap size for BMC BladeLogic components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Enabling/disabling SOCKS proxy rule evaluation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Configuring the file server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Configuring a mail server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Configuring Perl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Configuring an SNMP server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Configuring a database server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Configuring the process spawner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Configuring expiration time for credentials of NSH Script Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Processing across mount points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Restricting the size of configuration and extended objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Configuring user interface settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Setting SRP login requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Configuring the PXE Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Configuring the Licensing Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Enabling asynchronous execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Enabling web services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Configuring multiple Application Servers on the same host. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 About Application Server deployments and profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Creating additional Application Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Viewing and editing an Application Server’s profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Listing conflicting attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Getting information about Application Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 The Application Server Launchers node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Reporting Application Server information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Managing multiple Application Servers on the same host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Starting a specific Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Stopping a specific Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Redeploying a stopped Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Terminating a specific Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Restarting a specific Application Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Removing an Application Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Adding unmanaged deployments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Editing the list of roles with Application Server Launcher access . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Resetting database passwords for the Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

6

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

Chapter 4

Administering security

115 117 117 118 119 120 121 122 122 123 123 123 124 124 126 128 128 129 130 130 130 131 132 133 133 134 135 137 140 142 150 153 158 158 159 159 160 160 161 163 163 163 166 166 167 169 170 171 171
7

Fundamentals of BMC BladeLogic security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Session layer security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Impersonation and privilege mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single sign-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LDAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSA SecurID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PKI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active Directory/Kerberos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Domain Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Authentication profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single sign-on session credentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keytab files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RBAC role selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Security for different communication legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMC BladeLogic Console to Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLCLI to Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Shell to Network Shell Proxy Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reports client to reports server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Server to agent or repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Shell to agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repeater to agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Implementing single sign-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Authentication Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Application Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting override locations for client SSO files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up certificate verification using OCSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Implementing LDAP authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of LDAP configuration tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High availability configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Certificate trust store. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distinguished names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring LDAP authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Implementing RSA SecurID authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring RSA Authentication Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring SecurID authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Implementing PKI authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring PKI authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Implementing Domain Authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample domain structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring BMC BladeLogic for Domain Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents

. . . .local files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Using the blcred utility . . . . . . . .local files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Users and users. . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Configuring the secure file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Secure file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Using certificates to secure communication between clients and Application Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Clients. . . . . . . 247 Configuring the users or users. . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 233 Introduction to the configuration files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Registering an Authentication Service in an Active Directory Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Provisioning agents with an SHA1 fingerprint of the repeater’s self-signed certificate. . 212 Implementing Security – Repeater to agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Generating a self-signed certificate for an Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Securecert file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Configuring a BMC BladeLogic Client for AD/Kerberos authentication . . 233 Configuration file functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Overview of AD/Kerberos configuration tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Options for exports file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Securing communication with CA certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Windows Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Typical scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Restricting commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Configuring the exports file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Implementing Active Directory/Kerberos authentication. . . . . . . . . . 194 Implementing security – Application Server to agents or repeaters. . . . . 262 8 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Configuring agents to authenticate incoming requests with client-side certificates 221 Discontinuing use of client-side certificates. . . . . . 236 How BMC BladeLogic grants access to RSCD agents. . . . . . . . 210 Implementing security – Network Shell to agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Communication protocol . . . . . . . and the secure file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 TLS with client-side certs – Discontinuing use of client-side certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Exports file . . . . 202 TLS with client-side certs – Securing a UNIX-based Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Options . . 249 Options for users and users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Generating a user information file . . . . . . . . . .local files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Creating a self-signed client-side certificate on the repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 No authentication – Using a default installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Subnet designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Options for secure file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Network Shell client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling the file server cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Log4crc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 6 Managing BMC BladeLogic data 263 264 264 264 267 271 271 271 271 272 287 288 288 289 292 293 293 294 295 296 297 297 298 299 299 300 300 303 Cleaning up the BMC BladeLogic database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the database clean-up utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Securing communication between Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers (optional). 303 Key terms . . . . . . . Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning up repeater servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agent logging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Changing the administrator user and password for Advanced Repeater Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning up target servers (Agents) . . . . . . . . . . 309 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PXE Server logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the Application Server cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About logging configuration for BMC BladeLogic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling the target server (Agent) cleanup. . . . . . . . . . . 307 Installing using the installation program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling the Application Server cache cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Set up the Advanced File Server for secure communication . . . . . . 320 Enable SSL on Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Configuring the securecert file . Collecting log data. . . . . . . . . Scheduling the cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Performing an unattended (silent) installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional log files of interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling the repeater server cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Configuring Advanced File Servers . . . . . . . Cleaning up the file server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Configuring Advanced Repeater servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of BMC BladeLogic log files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Installing the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Generate the SSL certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .txt file . . . About the clean-up utility . . . . . . . Scheduling the retention policy utility to mark data for deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMC BladeLogic log file reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 What is the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling the database cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marking data for deletion. . . . . . . Application Server logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning up historical data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Contents 9 . . . . . . . . . . 305 Best practice information . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Configure the Advanced File Server to use secure communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Chapter 8 Integrating BMC BladeLogic and Change Management 329 Levels of integration. . . . . . . . . 324 Location of log files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Location of configuration files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Starting and stopping the Advanced Repeater . . . 323 Disabling SSL communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 The BMC Continuous Compliance for Servers solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Security Glossary Index 339 345 10 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . . . 333 Assigning job approval permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Requirements for integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Configuring bandwidth throttling between Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers. . . . . . . . . . . . .Configure the Advanced Repeater server for secure communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Configuring job approval for job types. . . . . . . 332 Enabling BMC Remedy ITSM integration for job approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Setting up the connection to BMC Atrium Orchestrator . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Troubleshooting advanced file servers and advanced repeaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Enabling HTTPS support for the BMC Atrium Orchestrator connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

In the BMC BladeLogic context. and how to define user permissions using the BMC BladeLogic configuration files. Terminology Throughout this document you will see discussions related to client and server machines. Clients are machines running the BMC BladeLogic Console or Network Shell. how to implement security restrictions. a server is a machine where an RSCD agent is installed. If a connection is established. Clients establish contact with servers by means of the RSCD agents installed on server machines. The configuration of the RSCD agent on those servers determines whether the client can establish a connection with the server and what permissions the client will have. Intended Audience This document is intended for system administrators who manage data centers and networks of remote servers.Chapter 1 1 Introduction The BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide describes all of the configuration and administration tasks you can perform to ensure the smooth functioning of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation (referred to in this guide as “BMC BladeLogic”). the configuration you define for both the client and the server determines how the client and server communicate with each other. This document describes how to set up and maintain an Application Server. Chapter 1 Introduction 11 .

a machine may be a BMC BladeLogic server.” When describing paths. Despite that possibility for confusion. the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Network Shell Command Reference provides a full description of all Network Shell commands and utilities.local. and secure configuration files. This document always calls the machine being contacted a server. enter man <command>. Documentation Conventions In this document. serif fonts depict text that a user might enter at the command line or text that a system generates in response to user input. users. users.Documentation Conventions In some contexts. as well as the exports. Network Shell Documentation BMC BladeLogic provides descriptions of all Network Shell commands and utilities as man pages available on both Windows and UNIX-style systems. select Add. and in other contexts the same machine can be a client. To display a man page while using Network Shell. such as man nsh. In addition. Bold fonts identify Network Shell commands and utilities. “From the File menu. monospace. a procedural step might read. The following is an example of system text: ERROR: You must be "root" for pkgadd to execute properly. this guide uses UNIX-style path separators (forward slashes) except in situations where a Windows-style path separators (backslashes) are specifically required. Within a procedure. 12 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Monospace fonts also depict file system paths. this document always uses the term client to refer to a machine where someone is using the BMC BladeLogic Console or Network Shell to contact another machine. bold text highlights actions that you should take. For example. This can happen because you can install client applications on the same hosts where you have installed an RSCD agent.

System architecture A BMC BladeLogic system has a three-tier architecture that consists of client. and middle tiers.Chapter 2 Overview of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation 2 This chapter provides an overview the system architecture for BMC BladeLogic Server Automation (BMC BladeLogic). server. The following graphic illustrates the relationship between the major components of the three-tiered BMC BladeLogic system. as well as a discussion of other topics that apply to the BMC BladeLogic system as a whole. Chapter 2 Overview of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation 13 .

It also includes a web interface to the BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation server. a command line interface (BLCLI) that provides API-level access to the functionality available through the console. and Network Shell for ad hoc administration of one or more servers.Client tier BMC BladeLogic Console BLCLI reports client (web browser) Network Shell Client Tier PXE / TFTP Server Application Server(s) reports server Network Shell Proxy Server (optional) BMC BladeLogic core database Middle Tier reporting data warehouse Agent File Server Server Tier Remote Server Remote Server Agent Server Agent Server Agent Server Agent Server Agent Server Client tier The BMC BladeLogic client tier includes the BMC BladeLogic console. 14 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .

Network Shell is a network scripting language that enables cross-platform access through a command line interface. Network Shell can optionally incorporate a middle tier component—an Application Server that is configured to run a Network Shell Proxy Server. The Application Server provides servers being provisioned with the instructions necessary to provision the machine. Linux® (Red Hat and SUSE). Operating as an intermediary between Network Shell clients and the managed servers those clients target. which controls how the BMC BladeLogic console communicates with remote servers. and Microsoft Windows 2000/2003/2008 servers. Server tier The BMC BladeLogic server tier consists of RSCD agents on remote servers. The Application Server is completely scalable. Not only does the Application Server manage communication between consoles and remote servers. RSCD agents never initiate communication with an Application Server or any other BMC BladeLogic component. The reporting data warehouse is populated using information from the core BMC BladeLogic database.Middle tier The BMC BladeLogic console is a graphical user interface that gives system administrators a host of sophisticated tools for managing and automating data center procedures. HP-UX. the Network Shell Proxy Server authenticates Network Shell client users and ensures traffic is encrypted between clients and managed servers. It also lets system administrators provision operating systems onto servers. Middle tier The primary component of the middle tier is the Application Server. All BMC BladeLogic client-tier applications let you manage Solaris®. AIX®. the middle tier includes an Apache Tomcat server. If a site is running BMC Service Automation Reporting and Analytics. If necessary. allowing administrators to adjust its performance to accommodate added users and increased database activity. with the principal components being the PXE Server and the Application Server. BMC Service Automation Reporting and Analytics uses the Application Server to authenticate users. The Application Server communicates with RSCD agents and initiates all communication to perform ad hoc and scheduled tasks. The PXE Server delivers instructions to servers being provisioned so they can download a bootstrap program. and it reads data from the core BMC BladeLogic database as well as a reporting data warehouse. Chapter 2 Overview of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation 15 . it also controls interaction with the database and file servers. The middle tier also includes several components used for provisioning servers. a BMC BladeLogic system can incorporate multiple Application Servers that cooperate by balancing job processing workloads.

he or she is granted the authorizations defined for that role. With protocol 5. the following permissions and security configurations are set by default for each RSCD agent: ■ All clients are granted read/write access to all servers. Configuration files on the RSCD agent let you define who can access servers and how users communicate with those servers. Using the BMC BladeLogic Console. a BMC BladeLogic protocol for secure communication based on Transport Layer Security (TLS). see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. such as QA engineers or web administrators.Default permissions and security configuration Default permissions and security configuration In BMC BladeLogic. For many BMC BladeLogic installations. If your installation requires additional refinement. When you install BMC BladeLogic on clients and servers. you do not have to modify the agent configuration files. TLS automatically negotiates the strongest form of encryption that clients and servers can support. A role is a set of authorizations and other information that reflects the capabilities of an organizational entity. access control can be managed at multiple levels. The definition of a system object includes a set of authorizations specifying roles who can access the object and the actions those roles can perform. you should understand the default configuration of BMC BladeLogic. When a user is assigned to a role. The system’s default configuration provides sufficient functionality and appropriate user permissions. A system object is an object you can interact with in the BMC BladeLogic Console. All clients and servers are set to communicate using protocol 5. BMC BladeLogic also lets you control access to servers at the agent level. the successor to Secure Socket Layer (SSL). you can control user access through a combination of role-based and system object-based authorizations. ■ 16 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . For more information on managing access at the console level.

If a user does not have an equivalent local identity on the server. they are set up for SRP authentication when using BMC BladeLogic clients to communicate with Application Servers. For more information on Windows user mapping.” Perl support BMC BladeLogic provides built-in support for Perl. users are mapped to user “Anonymous.” By default when you add users to the BMC BladeLogic system. — In all other situations. This process allows a role to be mapped to a local or domain user who has permissions for a Windows server. If so. ■ For a complete discussion of how users are granted permissions on servers. On UNIX. users are mapped to user “nobody. the core library for BMC BladeLogic. Chapter 2 Overview of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation 17 . “Administering security. you can use Perl scripts to perform functions on remote hosts (such as open.” On Windows. but they require additional configuration. For either of these approaches. the connecting user is granted the permissions of that equivalent user. the script programming language. users can be granted permissions through a process called Windows user mapping. see Chapter 4. the agent maps the user to an identity using the following steps: ■ First the agent determines whether the user has an equivalent identity on the server machine.” Incoming users can be granted the permissions of a specified user. but that requires modification of the configuration files.Perl support ■ Users are granted permissions on managed servers through two different processes: — For Windows servers. the agent maps the incoming user to a default user with downgraded permissions. and members of the Administrator group in Windows are not automatically mapped to Administrator. Because of this integration. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. users can be granted permissions through a process of user impersonation (for all UNIX servers) or user privilege mapping (for Windows). root users on UNIX are not automatically mapped to root. see Chapter 5. The BMC BladeLogic Perl module integrates with libnc. Other forms of authentication are possible. read. when a user attempts to connect to an agent. For more information on securing communication between all components of a BMC BladeLogic system. “Setting up configuration files. which functions like a network-enabled version of libc. and write files) as long as those hosts are running RSCD agents. However.

If you are using Perl in conjunction with the BMC BladeLogic Console. Tools for managing BMC BladeLogic data BMC BladeLogic provides a suite of tools for managing data in the BMC BladeLogic system and controlling its growth where necessary. These tools include: ■ A database clean-up utility (cleanupDatabase) to minimize the amount of space taken up by unused data in the BMC BladeLogic database. You can use this utility to delete old temporary files in the Application Server cache (directory).” 18 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . The BMC BladeLogic file server clean-up utility. An Application Server cache clean-up utility. You can use this utility to delete unused files from the file server. You can delete these files by using the repeater server clean-up utility. A target server clean-up utility. You can use this utility to delete old files that accumulate on target servers (agents) from Deploy Jobs. the Perl module is automatically installed. as described in “Configuring Perl” on page 77. audit results.Tools for managing BMC BladeLogic data When you install Network Shell on a platform that can support a BMC BladeLogic Application Server. “Managing BMC BladeLogic data. and historical data such as old audit trail entries. This utility deletes from the database objects users have deleted in the BMC BladeLogic Console. A repeater server clean-up utility. you must configure the Application Server so it knows the location of Perl. These tools let you delete unused data or data no longer needed for BMC BladeLogic operations. snapshot results and compliance results. see Chapter 6. See the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Installation Guide for a list of the platforms for which BMC BladeLogic provides Perl support. ■ ■ ■ ■ For more information on these tools. objects marked for deletion with the retention policy utility. Data from Deploy Jobs can also accumulate in the staging directory on repeater servers.

3 Select the data you want to include in the zip file. use Shift + Click or Ctrl + Click. Accept the default selection (the Application Server to which you are connected) or click the Browse button (three dots) and select one or more Application Servers from the Select Application Servers dialog. DEBUG_MODE_ENABLED job property . select Configuration => Generate Support Data. select the Application Servers from which you want to collect data. 2 In the Generate Support Data dialog. ■ ■ ■ Generating data for support The Generate Support Data tool generates data about the Application Servers and other components in the BMC BladeLogic environment and packages that data into a zip file. Application Server Diagnostics — Runs predefined tests that evaluate the status of the BMC BladeLogic environment while it is running and identifies problems. This data can be useful for diagnostic purposes when you contact Customer Support.Read authorization. NOTE To use the Support Data Generation tool.provides additional diagnostic information to the job log. Database Diagnostics — Run predefined tests from the command line that evaluate the status of the BMC BladeLogic database and identifies potential issues. your role must be granted the BL_Administration.Troubleshooting tools Troubleshooting tools BMC BladeLogic provides several tools that you can use to collect data for diagnosing issues and working with Customer Support: ■ Generate Support Data — Generates data about Application Servers and other components of the BMC BladeLogic environment and packages that data into a zip file. 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console.) To select multiple Application Servers. (The Select Application Servers dialog lists only Application Servers configured to use the same database and file server and that are currently accessible. Chapter 2 Overview of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation 19 . Click Select All or click the data types you want.

the Secure file is included. Click Agent Log and use the Browse button (three dots) to select a server. At a minimum. (This information is the same as that generated by the Export Detail Report operation in the Infrastructure Management window. a new log file is automatically created (appserver. The file’s name is System Properties. The log from one or more Agents.txt. or a Smart Group of servers. Click Deploy Job Logs and use the Browse button (three dots) to select one or more jobs. Agent Security Files The current security files from one or more Agents.Generating data for support This selection: Includes: Application Server log The currently active Application Server log. 20 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Click Agent Security Files and use the Browse button (three dots) to select a server. You can also include Application Server logs that have been rolled over. Console log The current console log. A file containing all status information for the Application Server. When the log file reaches that size. suppose you set the size to 20 MB for the appserver. group of servers.log.txt. You can also include console logs that have been rolled over. or a Smart Group of servers. A “rolled-over” log file is one that is generated after a preset size has been reached for the currently active log file. All transaction logs for target servers that failed to execute the specified Deploy Job run. A file containing the current contents of the SYSTEM_PROPERTY table in the database to which the Application Server is connected. If an Agent resides on the Application Server.) The file’s name is StatusReport.local home Application Server Security Files Deploy Job Target Logs (Failed Targets Only) Security files from the Application Server. group of servers. if any. For example. Security files included are: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ System Properties table Agent log Secure Exports Users User. all security files are included.log file.1). Application Server Deployment files Application Server status The entire deployment directory for the specified Application Servers. You can also include Agent logs that have been rolled over.

7 Click Save.zip as the file name. BMC BladeLogic generates the data and creates a zip file. suppose you selected configserver1 and appserver1 and specified data_10_08. and analyze it to determine test success or failure. (This information is the same as that reported in the Infrastructure Management window. The zip files created would have the names: data_10_08configserver1. For each Application Server you selected.Monitoring and diagnosing issues in the BMC BladeLogic environment This selection: PXE Server Files Includes: Information about the PXE server and the services it runs.) A file of information about network configuration and status for each Application Server.zip. Monitoring and diagnosing issues in the BMC BladeLogic environment Application Server Diagnostics The Application Server Diagnostics tool provides tests that can be helpful for monitoring the status of your BMC BladeLogic environment and for working with Customer Support to identify and resolve issues. These predefined tests collect data on the status of the BMC BladeLogic environment while it is running. If you selected multiple Application Servers. Network Information 4 Click Generate Data. The file’s name is NetworkInformationReport. For example. 5 Specify a path to the location where you want to store the zip file. 6 In the Object Name field. the zip file for each has a name based on the file name you specified plus the Application Server name. Chapter 2 Overview of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation 21 .Read authorization. type a name for the zip file. NOTE To use the Support Data Generation tool.zip and data_10_08-appserver1. compare the data to expected behavior.txt. your role must be granted the BL_Administration.

keystore files are properly synchronized between the various deployments (each deployment has its own keystore file).Tests are grouped by the type of evaluation they do. including parallel execution. Tests the Application Server’s connectivity with the database and executes test queries. Test AppServer Test BlExec Job Diagnostic Test Description Tests the Application Server’s configuration connectivity with other Application Servers.Monitoring and diagnosing issues in the BMC BladeLogic environment 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. using a job created for test purposes. Checks whether the bladelogic. selecting the Configuration test group runs both the AppServer Test and the Service Deployment Test. using a job created for test purposes. Accept the default selection (the Application Server to which you are connected) or click Browse and select one or more Application Servers. (Use Shift + click or Ctrl + click to select multiple tests. The Select Application Servers dialog lists Application Servers configured to use the same database and file server. Tests the Application Server’s deployment to determine if the Application Server has been properly configured Database Diagnostic Test Environment KeyStore Test File Manager Diagnostic Test Pseudo Job Diagnostic Test Service Deployment Diagnostic Test Accept the tests listed in the Application Server Diagnostics area or refine the list in one of the following ways: ■ Select one or more tests from the Application Server Diagnostics area. select Configuration => Application Server Diagnostics View. 3 The Application Server Diagnostics area lists the tests to be run. both of which test the Application Server configuration. 2 In the Application Server Diagnostics view. Tests the job execution framework. Tests the job framework. they do not need to be running on the same host. Selecting a test group lists those tests in the Application Server Diagnostics area. however. For example. ■ 22 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . You can select one or more tests from the list. Tests the Application Server’s connectivity with the File Server.) Select a group of tests from the Diagnostic Group drop-down menu. select the Application Servers from which you want to collect data.

run dbdiagnostics list to determine the ID for each specific diagnostic test.Monitoring and diagnosing issues in the BMC BladeLogic environment 4 Click Run All Tests to run all tests listed in the Application Server Diagnostics area. click Close. 2 From the .. Consult with your DBA to see whether these recommendations can be applied. open a shell (in Linux) or a command prompt (in Microsoft Windows). Log. which are listed in the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Installation Guide. Chapter 2 Overview of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation 23 .NSH/bin folder. name. These predefined tests collect data on the configuration of the BMC BladeLogic database and provide feedback.sh with any of the parameters shown in Table 1. the parameters and their children). Then click the Test Output. Table 1 Parameter help list listFull Parameters for the DBdiagnostic command (part 1 of 2) Description Displays the help for the command. select the Application Server for which you want to display test results. 6 On the Diagnostic Results dialog. the Status column shows an icon that indicates the success or failure of each test. Database Diagnostics The Database Diagnostics tool provides tests that can be helpful for monitoring the status of the database and for working with Customer Support to identify and resolve issues. Lists all diagnostics with full details (for example. or Failure Advice tab.exe or dbdiagnostic. To run the Database Diagnostics tool 1 On the BMC BladeLogic Application Server. For the diagId argument used by some of the parameters. 7 When you are finished viewing test results. Select a test and click the View Results icon to show detailed test results. and description for all diagnostics. 5 In the Application Server Diagnostics area. execute either dbdiagnostic. Or click Run Selected Tests to run only the tests you selected in that area.. NOTE The warning messages displayed for any of the DB diagnostics are in most cases an indication that the system needs to be tuned with the recommended values suggested for optimum performance of the product. Lists only the ID.

getDiagParams diagId=diagId Displays the parameters for a diagnostic. getResAfterDate diagId=diagId afterDate=MM-dd-yy[yy] (you can enter a two or four digit year) Displays all of the results for diagnostics recorded on or after the specified date starting at 00:00:00 AM. Note that these IDs are not fixed and can be different in different environments. To run a diagnostic test. such as statistics on the last execution of the diagnostic. The remaining tests apply to Oracle databases only. You can find the list of parameters for a diagnostic by running the diagnostic with the getDiagParams parameter followed by the diagId. delAllRes runDiag Deletes all results for all diagnostics. IDs for the diagnostics Each diagnostic test has an associated ID. getResLastExec diagId=diagId Displays the results for the last execution for a specific diagnostic. diagId=<diagId> optName1=val1 optName2=val2 Runs a specific diagnostic using optional parameters.Monitoring and diagnosing issues in the BMC BladeLogic environment Table 1 Parameter getDiag Parameters for the DBdiagnostic command (part 2 of 2) Description diagId=diagId Displays information for a specific diagnostic. 24 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . delRes diagId=diagId Delete the results for a specific diagnostic. first obtain the list of IDs by running dbdiagnostics list and then use the ID of the particular diagnostic that you want to run as input to the utility. NOTE The Top_N_tables_chk and JRE_Row_Count_Chk diagnostic tests apply to both Oracle and SQL Server databases. and the parameters used for that run. the status of the run. Table 2 on page 25 shows example IDs for each of the diagnostic tests available with the dbdiagnostics tool.

1000005 JRE_ROW_COUNT_CHK Checks the job_run table and returns the record with the largest number of events. 1000006 DBMS_STATS_CHK Checks to see if the Schema statistics are current (based on a user-supplied expiration). 1000004 TOP_N_TABLES_CHK Checks the data volumes/sizes of the top N tables. Chapter 2 Overview of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation 25 . while Figure 1 shows the output returned from the command. For a description of how to use this diagnostic to verify that Schema statistics are current. dbdiagnostics runDiag diagId=1000000 Figure 1 output from the command You can then view the results of the diagnostic by running the command with the getResLastExec parameter. 1000003 ORACLE OPTIMIZER SETTINGS CHK Checks the Oracle optimizer settings. which displays the results of the last execution for this diagnostic (shown in Figure 2). 1000001 ORACLE CHECK NUMBER PROCESSES ALLOWED Checks the number of Oracle processes and provides advice. and recommends remediation if the statistics are not current.Monitoring and diagnosing issues in the BMC BladeLogic environment Table 2 ID 1000000 Diagnostic names and description Diagnostic name and description ORACLE CHECK BLOCK SIZE Checks the Oracle block size and provides advice. see the “Before you install” chapter of the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Installation Guide Example syntax and output The following example shows the command format you would use to run the ORACLE CHECK BLOCK SIZE diagnostic.

2 Do one of the following: — Right-click the job and select Set Property. 4 Click OK. messageTime=2010-03-22 12:47:03. To set the DEBUG_MODE_ENABLED job property 1 In the Jobs folder. NOTE Be sure to set the DEBUG_MODE_ENABLED property back to FALSE when not diagnosing an issue. you can use the DEBUG_MODE_ENABLED job property to provide additional diagnostic information to the job log. The Set Job Properties window is displayed. 3 Set the property value to TRUE. as running the job in debug mode does have a negative impact on performance. The additional level of logging provides you or BMC Software Customer Support representatives with more detailed information when diagnosing issues with job execution.0 Running a job in debug mode If you are experiencing issues with job execution. select DEBUG_MODE_ENABLED from the Extended properties list. 26 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .0 messageLevel=INFO message=ORACLE CHECK BLOCK SIZE: Block size on the Database is 8192. — In the Properties tab.Monitoring and diagnosing issues in the BMC BladeLogic environment dbdiagnostics getResLastExec diagId=1000000 Figure 2 Sample output for ORACLE CHECK BLOCK SIZE diagnostic diagId=1000000 execDiagId=2000002 execStartTime=2010-03-22 12:47:02. select a job. Select DEBUG_MODE_ENABLED from the Name drop-down list. which is large enough. The default value for the DEBUG_MODE_ENABLED property is FALSE.

The Log Item Details dialog opens.Monitoring and diagnosing issues in the BMC BladeLogic environment To view the job log 1 Open the Jobs folder. Click Close to close the dialog.00\NSH\br/appserver. the Application Server log file is located in: UNIX /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8.log Windows installationDirectory\BladeLogic\8. and select Show Log. Click the Up arrow or the Down arrow to scroll through messages one by one.0. 5 Click Close to close the log messages window. 4 To display messages in a dialog that allows you to scroll through messages one by one. 3 To filter messages so the job log only shows servers with specific job results. Chapter 2 Overview of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation 27 . Warnings. see “Considerations for troubleshooting jobs in a MAS environment” on page 57. A window displays log messages generated by the job.0. or All. You can also review the log file on the Application Server for the additional diagnostic information. 2 Select a run of a job. Success. use the Run Details drop-down to select Errors.00/NSH/br/appserver.log If you are running a multiple Application Server environment. right-click. double-click on a message. By default. right-click the job or Execution Task and select Show Results to display its job runs. navigate to a job or Execution Task.

Monitoring and diagnosing issues in the BMC BladeLogic environment 28 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .

file. With this basic configuration. Remote users can use the console through either RDP or Citrix from a remote machine to the machine where the console resides. you use the PostInstall Configuration wizard to perform the initial configuration of the Application Server. During installation. you can start the Application Server and then fine-tune it as needed.Chapter 3 3 Configuring the Application Server The core of the three-tier architecture in BMC BladeLogic is the Application Server. you can run the Application Server Configuration wizard. See “Configuring multiple Application Servers on the same host” on page 93. There are two general configurations for Application Servers in the BMC BladeLogic environment: ■ Single (Default) Application Server on the Host This configuration is the most common one and can be performed as a last step in the installation of an Application Server. ■ Multiple Application Servers on the Same Host This configuration lets you add multiple Application Servers to the host and configure them to perform one or more functions. NOTE The Application Server and the RCP client (BMC BladeLogic console) must be located on the same Local Area Network (LAN). see “Using the application server configuration wizard to change configuration settings” on page 39. See “Using the Post-Install Configuration wizard to configure the default application server” on page 34. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 29 . For information. Use the following tools to make configuration changes: ■ To make changes to basic configuration settings at a later time. Controlling communication between clients and servers as well as access to database. and mail servers. the Application Server can be adjusted to scale a system and to fine tune its performance.

For information.Understanding the application server ■ BMC BladeLogic provides a utility called the Application Server Administration console. the BMC BladeLogic Application Server runs as two distinct processes. So is the number of open client connections.) Typically. BMC BladeLogic calls these worker threads. See “Scaling the Application Server” on page 52 for more on configuration. To manage multiple Application Servers on the host or change their configurations. Rather than dedicating a thread to each client connection. When the request is complete. The Application Server Administration console lets you set the same parameters as those available in the Post-Install Configuration wizard. ■ Understanding the application server Application server processes The BMC BladeLogic Application Server is designed to process connections from many clients simultaneously. you can configure the Application Server so the process spawner does not run as an external process. the Application Server can handle many more client connections than it has worker threads. which launches new processes external to the Application Server process. The other process is a process spawner. and you can also use it to set other more complex configuration options. When a client requests any type of activity. see “Using the Application Server Administration console (blasadmin) to configure Application Servers” on page 44. Spawning processes externally to the Application Server can be beneficial for memory management. use the Infrastructure Management window. which is a command line utility that allows you to set all parameters used by the Application Server. the Application Server maintains a pool of threads that can be used for processing client activity. the worker thread is returned to the pool. See “Configuring the process spawner” on page 79 for more on configuration. Using this approach. 30 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . (The number of worker threads in the pool is configurable. see “Managing multiple Application Servers on the same host” on page 109. Process spawning is primarily used for Network Shell Script Jobs and some types of extended objects. For information. If you prefer. One process runs the core functionality of the Application Server. the Application Server picks a worker thread from the pool to execute that task.

Then the cycle of allocating work item threads begins again. However. (For a description of how multiple Application Servers can process jobs cooperatively. when a work item thread becomes available. but there are exceptions to this rule. it is assigned to the second job in the queue. The next work item thread goes to the third job in the queue. When allocating work item threads. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. the job execution thread loads the job and allocates work item threads. All jobs require one work item thread for pre-execution and another for post-execution. With this system. After initiating a job in this way. the number of job parts equals the number of target servers. the Application Server assigns equal preference to all pending jobs. For more information on specifying the number of available work item threads. a sufficient number of work item threads may not be available for simultaneously processing all jobs. For most job types. The job execution thread constantly watches for scheduled jobs. When the next work item thread becomes available. it is assigned to the first job in the queue of pending jobs. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 31 . see “Job distribution” on page 32.Work item threads and the job execution thread Work item threads and the job execution thread A single Application Server processes BMC BladeLogic jobs using one job execution thread and a configurable number of work item threads. until a work item thread has been assigned to all jobs in the queue. jobs with fewer job parts may complete sooner than jobs with many job parts. starting with the first job in the queue. In this case. Deploy Jobs can optionally utilize a special pool of lightweight work item threads used only for processing Deploy Job phases that access target servers. the job execution thread continues to watch for other scheduled jobs.) When a job comes due. which perform all work required for that job. and so forth.) The number of work item threads needed for any job varies by job type. When an Application Server is running multiple jobs. see “Scaling the Application Server” on page 52. For a description of how jobs are divided into job parts. all jobs can begin processing as soon as a work item thread becomes available. (Note that a job set to run immediately is considered a scheduled job. one work item thread is required to execute each part of the job. In addition.

see “Setting up job distribution between multiple Application Servers” on page 55. provided that the Application Server making the request is not already executing the maximum number of jobs that it can run simultaneously. Application Servers make an effort to distribute work items to each other to increase the number of concurrently executing work items and shorten overall execution time. the Application Server will distribute work items to other Application Servers that have idle work item threads. scheduled jobs are delegated to the first Application Server that requests a job. 32 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .Job distribution Job distribution If you have multiple Application Servers installed and they all access the same database. Although work for an individual job can be spread among multiple Application Servers. work items are not shared to or from that Application Server. (That maximum number can be configured. Best Practice: Do not mix-and-match the value of the MultiAppServerEnabled attribute between Application Servers. the number of work items processed during a job run directly corresponds to the number of target servers for the job. However. This work item sharing capability is controlled by the MultiAppServerEnabled attribute (which is set to true. local work item threads on an Application Server will process all work items for a job before those work items can be distributed to other Application Servers. When multiple Application Servers are configured to execute jobs. if all local work item threads are already processing work items. or all Application Servers should have the attribute set to False. Using additional Application Servers increases the job execution capacity of the system and in most cases speeds overall job processing. Typically. Application Servers are configured to cooperate when executing jobs. those Application Servers can cooperate by distributing jobs to balance their processing workloads. By default. all Application Servers should have this attribute set to True. If this attribute is set to False. During job execution. Generally. each Application Server will be given the same number of jobs to run (assuming there are an even number of jobs to execute). NOTE You cannot enable or disable work item sharing at the job type level.) For example. only one Application Server manages each individual job. by default) in the Application Server’s profile. For more information on configuring cooperation between Application Servers. if a BMC BladeLogic installation consists of two Application Servers that are both configured to run the same maximum number of jobs.

the client contacts the Authentication Service using any supported authentication protocol. the Authentication Service uses the appropriate mechanism to authenticate that user. Authentication framework A BMC BladeLogic Application Server employs a unified framework for processing all user authentication requests. see “Setting the number of database connections” on page 64. That framework is based on three services: ■ Authentication Service—An entity dedicated to authenticating users by means of all supported authentication protocols. A thread watches the pool of database connections. ■ ■ The Authentication Service and the Application Service are always located on the same host. For more information. Based on the authentication protocol. it acquires one from the appropriate pool of database connections. the Authentication Service issues a session credential to the client application. the thread attempts to trim the number of database connections back to the low boundary. Application Service—An entity that encapsulates the functionality of a BMC BladeLogic Application Server. ensuring that the number of connections stays within high and low boundaries. If authentication succeeds. If the number of database connections reaches the high boundary. When users on a BMC BladeLogic client application (except BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation) want to authenticate. or it can be set up on a stand-alone machine even though it is still associated with an Application Server. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 33 . When the database activity is complete. The client application can then initiate a session by presenting the session credential to an Application Service or Network Shell Proxy Service. When a worker thread or a work item thread needs a database connection. such as client connections. A Network Shell Proxy Service can be located on the same host. the database connection is returned to its pool. Network Shell Proxy Service—An entity that encapsulates the functionality of a Network Shell Proxy Server.Pooled database connections Pooled database connections The BMC BladeLogic Application Server maintains two different pools of database connections—one is used for processing jobs running the BMC BladeLogic Console and the other is used for processing all other activity. You can configure the high and low boundaries to accommodate user needs.

” The Application Server Launcher An Application Server Launcher is a mechanism for configuring and controlling multiple Application Servers on the same host.The Application Server Launcher For more information on authentication and other security features. It is so called because it launches (starts) and controls these additional Application Servers. The BMC BladeLogic environment supports one Application Server Launcher per host. and restarting the Application Server on the host also starts. stop. only a few must be set to make a BMC BladeLogic system functional. Starting. See “Configuring multiple Application Servers on the same host” on page 93. Although the BMC BladeLogic Application Server Administration console provides commandline mechanisms for configuring all possible Application Server options. restart. The Post-Install Configuration wizard presents those essential tasks in a graphical user interface and provides explanatory information for each step in the process. Available for both Windows and UNIX-style installations. stops. The Application Server Launcher must be running on the host in order for you to perform these operations. and restarts the Application Server Launcher. “Administering security. Using the Post-Install Configuration wizard to configure the default application server The BMC BladeLogic Post-Install Configuration wizard consolidates the minimum configuration steps that must be performed to set up an Application Server. stopping. see Chapter 4. Installing the Application Server on a host also installs the Application Server Launcher. the configuration wizard allows you to set the following configuration options: ■ Database connection parameters—The BMC BladeLogic Console works in conjunction with an Oracle or SQL Server database server in its middle tier. 34 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . The Application Server Launcher lets you configure and manage (start. remove and redeploy) each additional Application Server on the host. terminate. Use the configuration wizard to configure your database connection. including a description of how BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation authenticates users.

The installation program gives you the option of launching the wizard at the end of the installation procedure. The RBACAdmin user has full permission to manage roles and users in the RBAC Manager workspace in the BMC BladeLogic Console. where you can assign permissions for all users. enter the following: ■ ■ Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 35 . Network Shell scripts. ■ 1 To start the Post-Install Configuration wizard. Notification servers—The BMC BladeLogic Console optionally generates email and SNMP traps that send notifications when a job completes. Click Cancel to close the wizard. do one of the following: ■ Perform an installation that includes installation of the Application Server. the address from which the notification emails originate. the OS-specific x11 libraries must be installed. From the Windows Start menu.Using the Post-Install Configuration wizard to configure the default application server ■ File server—The BMC BladeLogic Console uses a file server to store large snapshots of files. BLPackages. ■ ■ NOTE Be aware of the following: ■ If your database is not set up or you do not currently have the information needed to establish a connection to that database. and the SNMP destination to which all SNMP traps are sent. Use the configuration wizard to provide SRP passwords for the RBACAdmin and BLAdmin users. Super-user passwords—The BMC BladeLogic Console provides several predefined users. — On a Windows system. and other types of information that is not easily stored in a database. Obtain the necessary connection information and run the PostInstall Configuration wizard again to complete your system configuration. you cannot configure the Application Server. Use the configuration wizard to identify an SMTP server. The BLAdmin user has Read access for all system objects within the BMC BladeLogic Console. select Programs => BMC Software => BladeLogic Server Automation Suite => Utilities => Application Server Configuration Wizard. Start the wizard manually by running one of the following commands in the directory where BMC BladeLogic is installed. Windows installables. Use the configuration wizard to identify the file server and a directory within the file server. If you are running the Post-Install Configuration wizard on UNIX.

(This option is only available for SQL Server databases./br/blappconf NOTE If you invoke the wizard without passing the -install flag. 3 Choose a Database Type—either Oracle or SQL Server.. The Database page displays. the wizard will display configuration settings that have already been entered for the Application Server and allow you to change those settings.Using the Post-Install Configuration wizard to configure the default application server \bin\ blappconf. enter the following: . 2 Read the introductory page and click Next. By default the database name is bladelogic. provide the following database configuration information: 36 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . (This option is only available for Oracle databases.) SID—System ID of the Oracle database. By default a BMC BladeLogic installation uses the following database ports: Database Type Oracle SQL Server Port Number 1521 1433 Database Name—SQL Server database name. or.) User ID—User name that the database needs to authenticate your connection. 4 If you are not using a custom connection string. Database Port—Port the database listens on. If you are using a custom connection string. provide the following database configuration information (and do not select the Advanced option): Database Server—Server running the database.exe — On a UNIX-style system.. The configuration wizard opens. Password—Password assigned to the user ID.

BMC BladeLogic recommends that the file server have 200 GB or more of available RAID 5 disk space. the file server is created on the same machine as the Application Server. One way to accomplish the necessary mapping is to create an entry like the following in the exports file on the file server: appServer rw.Using the Post-Install Configuration wizard to configure the default application server User ID—User name that the database needs to authenticate your connection. All users need to be mapped to the same user on the file server. ■ The internal System:System role/user must be mapped to the user name defined on the file server.user=userName ■ where appServer is a comma-separated list of Application Server names or IP addresses and userName is the name to which all users are mapped.local file on the file server: Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 37 . 5 Click Next. Without this mapping a user may not be able to access a file that another user has stored on the file server. Connection String—Type the custom connection string in the field below the Advanced checkbox. By default. A file server should meet the following requirements: ■ An RSCD agent must be installed and licensed. as a minimum. the directory of the file server is appserverInstallDirectory/storage. ■ A file server must have. The File Server page displays. and all users must be mapped to that user. NOTE Do not limit access to the file server by pushing agent ACLs to the agent on the file server. By default. Password—Password assigned to the user ID. 6 Provide the following file server configuration information: File Server Name—Name of the server where data is stored. 72 GB of available. A user name must be defined on the file server. create an entry like the following in the users. non-redundant. To accomplish the mapping. File Server Storage Location—Directory on the file server where data is stored. disk space. Advanced—Select this option to indicate that you are providing a custom connection string.

The Notification Servers page displays. the process will attempt to create it.) Email From—Email address from which BMC BladeLogic-generated email is sent. 7 Click Next. 10 Click Next. 11 Under both RBACAdmin User and BLAdmin User. provide information identifying the SNMP server by entering the following under SNMP Options: SNMP Server—Name or IP address of the host to which SNMP traps should be sent. 12 Click Finish. where you can assign permissions for all BMC BladeLogic users. typically bladmin or administrator. If the required directory structure does not already exist on the file server. 9 If you are using SNMP trap notifications. The BLAdmin user has Read access for all system objects within BMC BladeLogic. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. 8 Provide information identifying an email server by entering the following under SMTP Options: SMTP Server—Name or IP address of the host managing email.user=userName where userName is the name to which all users are mapped. SNMP Port—The port on the SNMP server that listens for SNMP traps. 38 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . enter a password and then retype the password to confirm your entry.Using the Post-Install Configuration wizard to configure the default application server System:System rw. The User Passwords page displays. For more information on the RBACAdmin and BLAdmin users. Passwords are used to authenticate the RBACAdmin and BLAdmin users via the SRP authentication protocol. BMC BladeLogic jobs can generate email upon their completion. By default the port is set to the standard SNMP port of 162. (SMTP stands for simple mail transfer protocol. You will not be able to enter a password if a password has already been set. The RBACAdmin user has full permission to manage roles and users in the RBAC Manager workspace in the BMC BladeLogic Console.

For example. To change. except that it is in a tabbed format and shows current settings in the text boxes. you can use the Application Server Configuration wizard (blappconf). if an Application Server is in Boston. The Application Server Configuration wizard.. Attributes (configuration settings) specified The Infrastructure Management window. the clock on client machines in San Francisco should be set to 4:04. See “Using the Application Server Administration console (blasadmin) to configure Application Servers” on page 44.. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 39 . You can also use the Application Server Administration console (blasadmin) to change these settings. For information.Changing the configuration of an application server NOTE BMC BladeLogic recommends that you synchronize the clock on the Application Server and all client machines. see “Using the application server configuration wizard to change configuration settings” on page 39. This wizard presents the same information as the Post-Installation Configuration wizard.. where the time is 7:04. Initial (post-installation) configuration settings for the Application Server: ■ ■ ■ You can use.. Database connection File server Notification servers Most configuration settings or to set additional configuration parameters on an Application Server The Application Server Administration console (blasadmin). Which tool you use depends on the settings you want to change. host) Using the application server configuration wizard to change configuration settings To change configuration settings on an Application Server. Changing the configuration of an application server There are three tools you can use to change an Application Server’s configuration. See in an Application Server’s profile (when there “Viewing and editing an Application Server’s are multiple Application Servers on the same profile” on page 100. Clocks should be synchronized to the minute.

exe ■ To change the configuration of a specific Application Server when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host. — From the directory where BMC BladeLogic is installed. enter the following: . from the directory where BMC BladeLogic is installed. enter the following: \bin\blappconf — On a UNIX-style system.Using the application server configuration wizard to change configuration settings You can change the following settings: ■ Database connection parameters File server name and storage location Notification servers — SMTP server and email address from which notification emails originate and SNMP server and port to which SNMP traps are sent ■ ■ NOTE After super-user passwords are set in the Post-Installation Configuration wizard. use one of the following methods: — From the Windows Start menu. you cannot use the Application Server Configuration wizard to change them. select Programs => BMC Software => BladeLogic Server Automation Suite => Utilities => Application Server Configuration Wizard./br/blappconf. You must use the RBAC Administration tool. 1 Start the Application Server Configuration wizard: ■ To change the configuration of the default Application Server. enter the following: \bin\blappconf -s applicationServerName Where applicationServerName is the name of the Application Server you want to change. For example: blappconf -s JobServer1 40 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .

from the directory where BMC BladeLogic is installed. use this command to configure the template deployment: blappconf -s _template 2 The Application Server Configuration wizard appears. To start all Application Servers on the host. Application Servers created on the host in the future will not have the changes. The method you use depends on the Application Servers you want to start: ■ To start all Application Servers on the host. changes affect only the default deployment. See “Starting a specific Application Server” on page 109. changes affect the specified deployment.d/blappserv start ■ Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 41 . do one of the following: ■ On Windows. enter the following: /etc/init. see “Starting all Application Servers on the host”. select Settings => Control Panel.Starting Application Servers NOTE If you specify blappconf -s. use the Infrastructure Management window. 3 Click OK. Starting Application Servers There are two methods for starting Application Servers. To have changes affect future Application Servers. and double-click Services. whether a single (default) Application Server or multiple Application Servers. On a UNIX-style system. from the Start menu. whether a single (default) Application Server or multiple Application Servers. Right-click BladeLogic Application Server and select Start from the pop-up menu. ■ Starting all Application Servers on the host This operation starts all Application Servers on the host. To start a specific Application Server (when additional Application Servers are configured on the host). Double-click Administrative Tools. Make changes you want. If you specify blappconf with no -s option. 4 Restart the Application Server.

See “Restarting a specific Application Server” on page 111. whether a single (default) Application Server or multiple Application Servers. To use this stop method. and double-click Services. use the Infrastructure Management window. use the Infrastructure Management window. see “Stopping all Application Servers on the host” on page 43. To use this restart operation.d/blappserv restart ■ Stopping Application Servers There are two methods for stopping Application Servers. On a UNIX-style system.Restarting Application Servers Restarting Application Servers There are two methods for restarting Application Servers. The method you use depends on the Application Servers you want to restart: ■ To restart all Application Servers on the host. See “Stopping a specific Application Server” on page 109. The method you use depends on the Application Servers you want to stop: ■ To stop all Application Servers on the host. Right-click BladeLogic Application Server and select Restart from the pop-up menu. see “Restarting all Application Servers on the host”. the default Application Server must already be started. To restart a specific Application Server (when additional Application Servers are configured on the host). from the Start menu. enter the following: /etc/init. ■ Restarting all Application Servers on the host This operation restarts all Application Servers on the host. Double-click Administrative Tools. select Settings= > Control Panel. ■ 42 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . the default Application Server must already be started. To stop a specific Application Server (when additional Application Servers are configured on the host). whether a single (default) Application Server or multiple Application Servers. Do one of the following: ■ On Windows. whether a single (default) Application Server or multiple Application Servers.

These commands are available in the AppServerShutdown name space of the BLCLI.d/blappserv stop ■ ■ Shutting down Application Servers gracefully The BLCLI provides commands that allow you to shut down an Application Server after all jobs running on it have completed or after a specified period of time has elapsed. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 43 . or resume a specific Application Server or all Application Servers on the host. enter Control-C. the following occurs: ■ The job execution thread on the Application Server no longer processes newly scheduled jobs. or shut down an Application Server When you pause an Application Server. Double-click Administrative Tools. To stop all Application Servers on the host. do one of the following: ■ From the Windows command line window where the Application Server is running. What happens when you pause. NOTE You can also use the Infrastructure Management window to gracefully shut down a specific Application Server (when multiple Application Servers are configured on the host). even though they may be currently processing jobs. From the Windows Start menu. pause. The BLCLI provides commands that allow you to shut down Application Servers more gracefully (see “Shutting down Application Servers gracefully”). select Settings => Control Panel. enter the following: /etc/init.Stopping all Application Servers on the host Stopping all Application Servers on the host Performing this procedure immediately stops all Application Servers on the host. See the BLCLI Help for specific information on AppServerShutdown. Right-click BladeLogic Application Server and select Stop from the pop-up menu. You can also use related commands to pause an Application Server while it processes all active jobs or resume service after you have paused the Application Server. On a UNIX-style system. and double-click Services. resume. You can use these commands to shut down. See “Stopping a specific Application Server” on page 109.

When you instruct a paused Application Server to resume work. the Application Server continues to give out work item threads to other Application Servers. The Application Server is temporarily set so it can no longer request work item threads from other Application Servers. 44 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . the Application Server’s job framework is paused. These parameters define the location and behavior of the application. if requested. The blasadmin utility lets you configure all parameters. versus the subset you can configure with the Post-Install Configuration Wizard. file. When you use AppServerShutdown commands to shut down an Application Server. Using the Application Server Administration console (blasadmin) to configure Application Servers The BMC BladeLogic Application Server Administration console (blasadmin) is a command line utility that lets you set parameters needed for an Application Server. as described above. If any of those work items take a long time to finish. you essentially undo the actions listed above. ■ ■ NOTE When you pause an Application Server. The job execution thread can again process scheduled jobs and the Application Server can request work item threads from other Application Servers. This section provides procedures to control all aspects of the Application Server’s behavior. the shutdown sequence begins. the Authentication Service. database.Using the Application Server Administration console (blasadmin) to configure Application Servers ■ The Application Server is temporarily set so other Application Servers cannot distribute jobs to it. When all jobs and work items have completed or a specified period of time has elapsed. it continues to process all of its current work items. the Application Server will not appear to be paused until all of those work items are complete. To expedite the processing of any currently active jobs. and SNMP servers. mail. and other components of an Application Server.

do one of the following: — From the Start menu. you can both run the blasadmin utility and pass it a command at the same time.exe Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 45 . run the blasadmin command. See “Starting the Application Server Administration console”. do one of the following: ■ On Windows. enter the commands. How you enter the command depends whether you want to configure the default Application Server or one of multiple Application Servers on the host. For information. TIP If you want to enter just one or two commands. 2 At the prompt. enter the following: \bin\blasadmin. select Programs => BMC Software => BladeLogic Server Automation Suite => Utilities => Application Server Administration. How you start this utility determines the Application Server configuration affected by the commands. see: ■ ■ ■ The set Command The show Command The help Command 3 Exit the blasadmin utility. Starting blasadmin to Configure the Default Application Server To start the Application Server Administration console when there is a single Application Server on the host. Starting the Application Server Administration console To start the Application Server Administration console. you can change the location of a file server (on the default Application Server) by entering the following command blasadmin set fileserver location /tmp/Storage. For example. — From the directory where BMC BladeLogic is installed.Starting the Application Server Administration console To configure Application Servers with the Application Server Administration Console (blasadmin): 1 Start the Application Server Administration Console. 4 Restart the Application Server to have your configuration settings take effect.

Starting the Application Server Administration console

Both options run the same command.

On a UNIX-style system, from the directory where BMC BladeLogic is installed, enter the following:
./br/blasadmin

This command starts the blasadmin utility and you can use blasadmin set and show commands.

NOTE
All commands you enter during the session affect only the default Application Server. Application Servers created on the host in the future do not have the changes. To have changes affect future Application Servers, use this command to start blasadmin and configure the _template deployment: blasadmin -s _template For information on the default and _template deployments, see “Editing the list of roles with Application Server Launcher access” on page 113

Starting blasadmin when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host
If there are multiple Application Servers on the same host, you need to specify whether you want to use blasadmin to configure one specific Application Server or all Application Servers on the host. Do one of the following:

To start blasadmin and configure one specific Application Server, use:
blasadmin -s appServerName

Where: -s appServerName is the Application Server’s name. For example:
blasadmin -s OtherJobServer

This command starts the blasadmin utility and you can enter blasadmin commands. All commands you enter during the session (until you enter exit at the blasadmin prompt) affect only the Application Server you specified.

To start blasadmin and configure all Application Servers on the host, use:
blasadmin -a

46

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

The set Command

This command starts the blasadmin utility and you can enter set and show commands. All commands you enter during the session affect: — All additional Application Servers configured on the same host — The _template deployment — The default Application Server For information on deployments, see “Editing the list of roles with Application Server Launcher access” on page 113.

The set Command
The set command sets the parameter to the specified value in the configuration. The setting takes effect when you restart the Application Server.The format for the set command is:
set component parameter value

Where:
■ ■ ■

component is the Application Server functionality you can configure parameter is an option that controls the Application Server behavior value is the value for the parameter

For example:
blasadmin> set fileserver name redhat1

This example sets the file server’s name to redhat1.

NOTE
When configuring settings on the Application Server, you must restart the Application Server for a setting to take effect.

TIP
When there is no ambiguity about the command you are typing, you can enter a shortened version of a command. For example, you can type set f n instead of typing set fileserver name.

Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server

47

The show Command

The show Command
The show command shows components, parameters, and current settings for an Application Server. The format is: show [component] [component parameter] [all]
To Show Descriptions of all parameters for all components At the bladmin> prompt, enter show descriptions For example:
bladmin> show descriptions [AccountConfig] AccountLockoutDuration - How long (in minutes) to keep the account locked AccountLockoutThreshold - How many failed logins before the account is locked MaxPasswordAge - How many days before a password needs to be changed MinPasswordLength - Minimum length of password required [AgentConfig] EnableAgentRpc - Enable or disable agent RPC communication [true, false] SecureFilePath - Path to the rsc “‘secure’ file. [AppServer] AppServerName - name of application server AppSvcPort - listening port for Application service . . .

All components and parameters, plus settings for parameters that have them

show all For example:
bladmin> show all [AccountConfig] AccountLockoutDuration:0 AccountockoutThreshold:0 MaxPasswordAge:0 MinPasswordLength:0 [AgentConfig] EnableAgentRpc:false SecureFilePath: . . .

48

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

The show Command

To Show

At the bladmin> prompt, enter

A component’s parameters show component (with descriptions) For example:
bladmin> show fileserver available options: [all|location|name] all - display all configuration parameters for this option location - the NSH style </c/temp> location name - the name of the fileserver

A component’s parameters show component all and settings For example:
bladmin> show snmpconfig all [SnmpConfig] SnmpPort:162 SnmpServer:

The current setting for a single parameter

show component parameter For example:
bladmin> show database MaxGeneralConnections MaxGeneralConnections:100

Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server

49

The help Command

The help Command
The help command provides help on the set and show commands.
To get help on At the bladmin> prompt, enter

A list of components (with help set | show descriptions) you can specify with the command For example:
bladmin> help set AccountConfig - minimum password length configuration AuthServer - authorization configuration ConfigManagerUI - configuration for UI Database - the database configuration parameters . . .

All of the parameters for a help set | show component component For example:
bladmin> help set Database

A description of a parameter

help set | show component parameter For example:
bladmin> help show pxeserver listen_port the server port the PXE server listens on

Specifying multiple values for a parameter
Some Application Server parameters accept more than one value. To specify multiple values for a parameter, use a comma-separated list. For example:
blAdmin> set ManagementService EmailRecipients adA@ACo.com,adB@ACo.com

Changing the default separator for multiple values
In the blasadmin utility, the comma is the default separator for specifying multiple parameter values. If the values you want to specify include commas, you can change the separator to a different character. To change the default separator, enter the blasadmin command with the -c option.

50

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

Deleting a configuration setting

blasadmin -c value_separator_character

For example, to change the value separator to a semicolon, you would enter:
blasadmin -c ;

The setting is in effect only for the blasadmin session (until you exit the blasadmin utility).

Deleting a configuration setting
You can delete a parameter value from an Application Server’s configuration. To delete the value, use the blasadmin set command and specify an empty value surrounded by quotation marks (““). For example:
blasadmin -s OtherConfigServer set AuthServer AppServiceURLs ““

This example removes the AppServiceURLs value for Application Server named OtherConfigServer.

Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server

51

Managing Application Server behavior with the Application Server Administration console

Managing Application Server behavior with the Application Server Administration console
Using the Application Server Administration console, (the blasadmin utility) you can perform a variety of tasks to manage all aspects of Application Server behavior. The following list describes the procedures you can perform to manage the Application Server. Many of these procedure include subordinate procedures.
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Configuring the Application Server Configuring the file server Configuring a mail server Configuring Perl Configuring an SNMP server Configuring a database server Configuring the process spawner Processing across mount points Restricting the size of configuration and extended objects Configuring user interface settings Setting SRP login requirements Configuring the PXE Server Configuring the Licensing Module Enabling asynchronous execution Enabling web services

Configuring the Application Server
The Application Server is the core of the middle tier in a BMC BladeLogic installation. Not only does the Application Server control communication between clients and servers, it also regulates activity between the client and the database, file, and mail servers. The Application Server provides many adjustable parameters that allow you to scale a BMC BladeLogic system to virtually any size.

Scaling the Application Server
The Application Server provides several options that you can adjust to accommodate increased activity. An Application Server should be configured so that even when all of its work item threads are busy, the Application Server still has additional resource capacity.

52

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

Configuring the Application Server

1 Start the Application Server Administration console, as described in “Starting the
Application Server Administration console” on page 45.

2 To specify the maximum number of worker threads, enter the following:
set appserver maxworkerthreads #

where # is the maximum number of threads that can process requests from clients. For example, you might set this to 10, which means that only 10 client connections can be serviced at a time even though many more users might actually be connected to the Application Server. Worker threads should not be confused with work item threads, which process BMC BladeLogic Console jobs (see step 5).

3 To specify the maximum number of client connections that the Application Server
can manage, enter the following:
set appserver MaxClientContexts #

where # is the maximum number of connections to clients.

4 To specify the maximum number of jobs, enter the following:
set appserver MaxJobs #

where # is the maximum number of jobs. By controlling the number of jobs that are processed simultaneously, you can avoid overtaxing Application Server resources.

5 To specify a maximum size for the pool of threads that can be used to process BMC
BladeLogic Console jobs, enter the following:
set appserver MaxWorkItemThreads #

where # is a number of work item threads. All BMC BladeLogic jobs let you specify how many targets to process in parallel. You can set a value from 1 to 10 or allow an unlimited number of targets to be processed in parallel. The MaxWorkItemThreads and MaxLightweightWorkItemThreads (see step 6) also can control how many targets can be processed in parallel. If your system uses one Application Server, the maximum number of targets that can be processed is based on the Application Server’s available work item threads. If your system uses multiple Application Servers, the maximum number of targets that can be processed in parallel is based on the sum of all available work item threads on all Application Servers.

Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server

53

Lightweight work item threads primarily perform tasks on target servers and consequently consume almost no memory on an Application Server. These threads are only used during the Simulate and Commit phases of a Deploy Job. 7 Restart the Application Server. lightweight work item threads behave exactly like work item threads. Other than being limited to particular types of tasks. enter the following: set appserver MaxLightweightWorkItemThreads # where # is a number of lightweight work item threads. By default this value is set to 0. the Application Server can use a pool of lightweight work item threads to process phases of a Deploy Job that access target servers. 54 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . To avoid this kind of inefficiency. Using lightweight work item threads helps you run more Deploy Jobs in parallel more efficiently. see “Work item threads and the job execution thread” on page 31. For more on the role of work item threads. work item threads often sit idle while target servers process deployment tasks. An Application Server can optionally provide a secondary pool of lightweight work item threads. 6 To specify a maximum size for the pool of lightweight work item threads that can be used for Deploy Jobs.Configuring the Application Server When processing Deploy Jobs.

keystore files. and 10 seconds elapse between heartbeats. NOTE For Application Servers to cooperate. the following prerequisites must be met: ■ Each Application Server must be configured to access the same database and have the same bladelogic. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. To accomplish this. its heartbeat). System clocks on all Application Servers must be synchronized to within a few seconds of each other. they automatically attempt to cooperate by balancing their job processing workloads. For example. 2 To specify a time span that indicates a remote Application Server has timed out. see “Synchronizing keystore files of multiple Application Servers” on page 58. if RemoteServerTimeout is set to 5. which functions as its heartbeat.Configuring the Application Server Setting up job distribution between multiple Application Servers When Application Servers are configured to access the same database. For information on synchronizing bladelogic. it also checks for the heartbeat of any remote Application Servers. the Application Server is considered out of service. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 55 .keystore file. 3 To specify an interval between heartbeats for an Application Server. For Application Servers to cooperate. They accomplish this by distributing the processing of entire jobs or work items for large individual jobs to other Application Servers. Application Servers that are cooperating monitor each other’s heartbeat to determine which Application Servers are in service. they must know which Application Servers are in service. When an Application Server updates its heartbeat. enter the following: set appserver ServerMonitorInterval # where # is the frequency with which an Application Server updates its own time stamp (that is. each Application Server periodically updates its time stamp. ■ 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. enter the following: set appserver RemoteServerTimeout # where # is number of seconds between heartbeats before a remote Application Server is considered out of service.

8 To specify a port used for communication between Application Servers. the connection times out. connections encrypted with SSL also require client authentication. 5 To specify a time-out for responses from a remote Application Server. the connection times out. enter the following: set appserver SocketTimeout # where # is the maximum number of seconds to wait for a response from an Application Server after the initial connection has already been established. 6 To specify that a socket connection use SSL. enter the following: set appserver RegistryPort # where # is a port number. 7 To specify that remote Application Servers contacting the Application Server must authenticate. 56 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . By default the RegistryPort is set to 9836. enter the following: set appserver SocketConnectTimeout # where # is the maximum number of seconds for obtaining an initial socket connection to a remote Application Server.Configuring the Application Server 4 To specify a time-out for connecting to a remote Application Server. Once that maximum is exceeded. Once the maximum is exceeded. enter the following: set appserver RequireClientAuthentication true where true instructs the Application Server to require authentication from remote Application Servers. enter the following: set appserver UseSSLSockets true where true indicates that connections to this Application Server must be encrypted using SSL. 9 Restart the Application Server. Generally.

1\NSH\br/deploymentProfileName.log Windows installationDirectory\BladeLogic\8. For example. which by default are located in: UNIX /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8.log There are also individual log files for each Application Server deployment. In this example. and the Distribution Manager is dynamically allocating resource and running jobs on both Application Servers as needed. the Application Server log file is located in: UNIX /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8. which means that the log information is also distributed.lo g Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 57 . When Application Servers are configured to access the same database.Configuring the Application Server Considerations for troubleshooting jobs in a MAS environment Each Application Server has a log file which contains information about what is being executed on that Application Server. they automatically attempt to cooperate by balancing their job processing workloads. By default. with one job server running on each.log Windows installationDirectory\BladeLogic\8.1/NSH/br/deploymentProfileName.1\NSH\br/appserver.1/NSH/br/appserver. you may have two physical Application Servers (appserver1 and appserver2). the logging information for the job is actually distributed between the log files on both appserver1 and appserver2. Therefore you would need to review the log files on both Application Servers.

the Distribution Manager queues work items in respect to priority. and Lowest. and so on). all job types have a priority of Normal. For a list of the permissions and authorizations required to modify Job Priority. For example. the individual work items of the higher priority job are queued to be processed before the work items of the lower priority job. with a relatively higher priority to ensure they are executed first in case of resource contention. see “Authorizations for changing job priority” and “Setting job priority” in the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide.) For this cooperation to take place. If you have implemented a multiple Application Server environment. Low. You can assign one of any of the following priorities: Critical. if two concurrent jobs are competing for resources. Synchronizing keystore files of multiple Application Servers Multiple Application Servers on different hosts can be set up to cooperate on processing jobs. consider the case of a job with a priority of Critical. its target vector. Note that these priority levels are meaningful only in relation to each other. the responsiveness of the target space. do the following on each cooperating Application Server: 58 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . see BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. To synchronize keystore files of cooperating Application Servers. Such a job would appear to relinquish resources to a lower priority job with a high parallelism level. High. all Application Servers must have the same bladelogic.Configuring the Application Server Job distribution and job priority in a MAS environment You can use the PRIORITY* property to mark a job. or a class of jobs. Normal. For example.keystore file. (For information. note the following considerations regarding job priority: ■ While queuing work items across all jobs. The parallelism configuration of a job can significantly impact the appearance of the effectiveness of the job’s priority level. By default. see “Setting up job distribution between multiple Application Servers” on page 55. once the initial work item assignment quota for that Critical priority job is reached. as it controls the maximum number of simultaneous work items that can be allocated for a given job. There is no guarantee about the order of completion of each job (which is dependent on various extraneous factors including the actions performed in each job. but with a low maximum parallelism level. ■ ■ For more information on setting the job priority level.

) To change the password needed for the bladelogic. (If keystore passwords match.keystore file. you can skip this step. If the new bladelogic. enter: Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 59 .keystore files of all deployments of the cooperating Application Server. enter: blasadmin -s _launcher E At the blasadmin prompt.keystore file for all Application Server deployments: A On the cooperating Application Server.Configuring the Application Server 1 Stop the cooperating Application Server. if it is in use. change the keystore password for that deployment. enter: blasadmin -s deployment_name For example: blasadmin -s default or blasadmin -s _template B At the blasadmin prompt. enter: set appserver CertPasswd password C Repeat these steps for each deployment whose keystore file has changed.keystore file you copied into a deployment has a different password from that of the old bladelogic. The file location is: installationDirectory/br/deployments/_template/bladelogic. enter: set appserverlauncher KeyStorePassword password F If the process spawner is in use.keystore file from the _template directory of the central Application Server to each deployment directory of the cooperating Application Server. At the command prompt.keystore 3 Make sure that the passwords match for bladelogic. At the command prompt. At the command prompt. change the keystore password for the _spawner deployment. including the PXE server. D Change the keystore password for the _launcher deployment. 2 Copy the bladelogic. start the Application Server Administration console for the deployment.

enter the following: set appserver MaxTimeForCancelToFinish # where # is the maximum amount of time in minutes that should elapse for job cancellation. If the client exceeds these maximums. such as a prune time for idle connections or the maximum amount of time a client can perform read operations from the Application Server. When there is no traffic over the connection between a client and the Application Server for this period of time. enter: set ProcessSpawner KeyStorePassword password 4 Restart the cooperating Application Servers. enter the following: set appserver IdleConnectionPruneTime # where # is a value in minutes. 2 To specify an idle prune time. Setting limits for client connections The Application Server lets you specify certain limits for connections to the Application Server. 60 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. 2 To set a maximum period for job cancellation. If cancellation of a job part exceeds this maximum. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. 3 Restart the Application Server. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. the job part is classified as stuck and the job part is aborted. This prevents situations where cancellation of a job is not performing as expected and the act of canceling the job can potentially hang the job. Specifying a maximum time for canceling a job part You can specify a maximum period of time that can elapse for a job part to be canceled. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console.Configuring the Application Server blasadmin -s _spawner G At the blasadmin prompt. the connection is closed. the connection is considered expired.

which means the connection never expired. 3 Restart the Application Server. By default this value is set to 0. In addition. 4 Restart the Application Server. use this procedure. 2 To set time-out behavior. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. 3 To specify a time-out for client socket read operations from the Application Server. you can use this procedure to override the default behavior so that only one work item thread times out automatically. a work item thread is canceled when it exceeds the time period you have defined in the JOB_PART_TIMEOUT property. By default. Setting time-out behavior for work item threads The Application Server lets you specify time-out behavior for work item threads. all other work item threads acting on the same server are also canceled. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. This prevents situations where multiple work item threads time out serially on the same unresponsive server. if you assign job part time-outs.Configuring the Application Server When a new incoming connection is made. enter the following: set appserver SocketTimeout # where # is the maximum number of seconds for client socket reads before the socket times out. idle connections with non-zero IdleConnectionPruneTime values are checked. If necessary. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 61 . and the connections that have expired are pruned. To ensure that these jobs are automatically restarted when the Application Server restarts. a job waiting for the PXE client to boot). Setting it to false means only the one work item thread is canceled. Enabling automatic restart of provisioning jobs after Application Server restart A restart of an Application Server cancels provisioning jobs that have been submitted but are waiting idle (for example. enter the following: set appserver PropagateWorkItemTimeout true|false Setting this value to true means all work item threads acting on the same server are canceled when one work item thread times out.

you may tax your system resources. Setting the value to false means that the Update Server Properties Job will be reported (in the log and in the display of job results) as having ended in failed status if the agent on the remote target is unreachable or not licensed. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45.Configuring the Application Server 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. particularly disk space. 2 Set the outcome of Update Server Properties Jobs by entering the following: set JobFactory UspJobSucceedsWhenAgentDown true|false The default value is true. Parts that do not comply are shown in Compliance Job results. as the AGENT_STATUS property for the target servers is updated in any case. however. 2 Enable automatic restart of provisioning jobs by entering the following: set appserver restartIdleProvisionJobs true 3 Restart the Application Server. If results for a Compliance Job exceed the limits you set in this procedure. set the Update Server Properties Job to end in failed status whenever agents do not respond. 62 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Setting the outcome of Update Server Properties Jobs when target agents are unresponsive By default. the job run is marked with a warning and the job log includes a message saying that job results have been truncated. Setting a maximum number of Compliance Results displayed The Application Server lets you specify the maximum number of compliance results that are displayed for any failed condition in a compliance rule. You can. If you are running a Compliance Job that examines many server objects that fail a compliance condition. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. even if the RSCD agents on the remote target servers are unresponsive. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. A Compliance Job examines a component and compares its parts to conditions defined in compliance rules for a component template. an Update Server Properties Job always ends successfully.

If you restart the Application Server and the specified period has elapsed.Configuring the Application Server 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. enter the following: set scheduler MaxJobTimeInSchedulerQ # where # is a value in minutes. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 63 . By default this value is set to 60. enter the following: set appserver ComplianceResultMaxNumberOfAssets # where # is a the maximum number of server objects displayed per failed condition in a compliance rule. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. 2 To set past due job execution behavior. Setting this value to 0 means that all past due jobs execute when the Application Server starts. 3 Restart the Application Server. Setting a value for this option specifies that: ■ If you restart the Application Server and the specified period has not elapsed. The period of time is measured from the scheduled occurrence of the job to the time the Application Server starts. all existing jobs remain in the job queue for the default amount of time—60 minutes. 2 To set a maximum for compliance results displayed. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. the scheduled occurrence of a one-time-only job does not execute but the scheduled occurrence of a recurring job does execute. 3 Restart the Application Server. Setting behavior for past due jobs The Application Server lets you specify a period of time that a newly created job can remain in a queue while the Application Server is down or too busy to process the job. No matter how you define this value. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. ■ NOTE This procedure only defines behavior for new jobs. the scheduled occurrence of a job does not execute.

3 To set a maximum and minimum number of non-job-related database connections. NOTE The sum of the maximum numbers you define for MaxJobExecutionConnections and MaxGeneralConnections cannot exceed the connection limit specified by the database server. 4 Restart the Application Server.Configuring the Application Server Setting the number of database connections Use this procedure to set maximums and minimums for database connections. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. non-job-related purposes. You can set the maximum and minimum number of database connections that jobs use. you can help to prevent situations where client connections seem to hang because large jobs are using all available database connections. 2 To set a maximum and minimum number of job-related database connections. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. such as client connections to the database. increasing the value for MaxJobExecutionConnections can sometimes increase the performance of large Audit Jobs. 64 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . use either of the following commands: set database MaxGeneralConnections # set database MinGeneralConnections # where # is a number of database connections. use either of the following commands: set database MaxJobExecutionConnections # set database MinJobExecutionConnections # where # is a number of database connections. NOTE Because each work item in an Audit Job requires a dedicated database connection. You can also set the maximum and minimum number of database connections used for general. By providing separate settings for job-related and non-job-related activity.

By default the Authentication Service runs and listens on port 9840. the Application Server does not run a Network Shell Proxy Service. and so on. When you deploy a new Application Server with its type set to NSH_PROXY or ALL. the ProxySvcPort is automatically set to the Base Port plus 42. Application Server ports By convention the Application Server listens to the ports listed in the following table: Port Number (By Convention) 9840 Traffic Type AuthSvcPort Description Listening port for the Authentication Service associated with an Application Server. Typically. If this value is set to 0. ProxySvcPort 9842 RegistryPort 9836 Listening port for traffic between Application Servers that cooperate by distributing jobs to each other. coordinate job work item execution. and is used in conjunction with the JMX Management Port 9838 (by default) to authenticate the client AppSvcPort (port 9841 by default).Configuring the Application Server Setting communication ports The following sections list the port requirements for both the Application Server and the Application Server Launcher. You must manually define a listening port for the default deployment of an Application Server. This port is used in a multiple Application Server configuration for Application Server to Application Server communication. ProxySvcPort is set to 9842 for the default Application Server. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 65 . AppSvcPort 9841 Listening port for the Application Service (that is. This communication is used for various administration tasks. You can modify this value if necessary. the service that accepts client connections). It is used in conjunction with the RMI Execution Port 9850+ (which is obtained from the MaxPort/MinPort range when the Application Server starts). the Application Server does not run an Authentication Service. By default the Application Service runs and listens on port 9841. If this value is set to 0. If this value is blank. update the remote heartbeat status. This port is used for BMC BladeLogic Console to Application Server communication. The listening port for a Network Shell Proxy Service. the Application Server does not run an Application Service. such as to pull Application Server statistics.

which the Application Server can provide if you perform the following procedure. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. This communication is all local traffic for this port Incoming messages 9701 RMI execution 9702 In a firewall environment. If the HTTP proxy server authenticates users. The patch management component of BMC BladeLogic incorporates the ability to download files from the Internet. and # is the number of the port. such as AuthServer. Many organizations provide Internet access through a proxy server. Default communications port used for Application Server communication with the Application Server Launcher. 2 To specify a listening port. 3 Restart the Application Server. Ports used in a multiple application server deployment by the Application Server Launcher By default. listeningport is the type of listening port. the following ports are used by the Application Server Launcher for BMC BladeLogic Console to AppServerLauncher communication: Port Number (By default) 9700 Traffic Type JMX Description Default Java Management Extensions (JMX) port used by the BMC BladeLogic Console to communicate with the Application Server Launcher.Configuring the Application Server 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. use this port is used for BMC BladeLogic Console /Application Server Launcher communication. 66 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . enter the following: set appServerComponent listeningport # where appServerComponent is the option category you want to modify. it requires a user name and password. such as AuthSvcPort. Each managed Application Server uses this port to notify the Application Server Launcher that the Application Server is up and in a ready state. Setting up HTTP proxy server support This procedure describes how to set up a user name and password for authentication on an HTTP proxy server.

4 To specify a user name provided to the HTTP proxy server.Configuring the Application Server 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. 3 To specify a listening port for the HTTP proxy server. You can also instruct the Application Server to listen for connections on all of its IP addresses. enter the following: set appserver SocketsBindAddress IP_address|all Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 67 . 2 To specify an IP address to which the Application Server should listen. enter the following: set appserver HTTPProxyPassword password where password is the password assigned to the proxy user you identified in the previous step. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. 6 Restart the Application Server. This procedure is primarily useful when an Application Server has more than one network interface and you want the Application Server to listen for connections on only one. 2 To identify a proxy server. Binding the Application Server to an IP address Use this procedure to specify an IP address to which an Application Server should listen. 5 To specify a password. enter the following: set appserver HTTPProxyUser userName where userName is the name of a valid user on the proxy server. enter the following: set appserver HTTPProxyPort # where # is the port used to contact the proxy server. enter the following: set appserver HTTPProxyName serverName where serverName is the name of the HTTP proxy server.

the packet is not delivered. When this inspection reveals a problem. such as the management object used by JConsole. 2 To specify a port used to access the Application Server’s remote execution objects. If you have previously instructed an Application Server to listen for a specific IP address. the Application Server listens on all IP addresses. Configuring ports for remote execution objects Use this procedure to configure ports used to access remote execution objects. If you do not specify an IP address or host name. enter the following: set ProcessSpawner RMIExecutionPort # For more on the process spawner. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. 68 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . if you enter all in the command shown above. enter the following: set appserver JMXManagementPort # 4 To specify a port used to access the process spawner’s remote execution objects. the Application Server listens on all of its IP addresses. enter the following: set appserver RMIExecutionPort # where # is the number of the port. 5 Restart the Application Server. You can use this procedure to turn off packet inspection. Enabling and disabling Network Shell proxy inspection To ensure data integrity. 3 Restart the Application Server.Configuring the Application Server In the command shown above IP_address is the IP address or host name to which the Application Server should listen. BMC BladeLogic inspects data packets traveling between Network Shell clients and proxy servers. Similarly. see “Configuring the process spawner” on page 79. you must use all in this command to change those instructions so the Application Server listens on all IP addresses. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. 3 To specify a port used to access JConsole.

2 Enable or disable packet inspection by entering the following: set appserver EnableProxyInspection true | false where false turns off proxy inspection and true turns it on. at a level of detail you specify. 5 is the minor part. This check compares the version numbers of the client and the Application Server. suppose the Application Server version is 7. 3 Restart the Application Server. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. 2 Enter the following command: set appserver VersionCompatibilityCheck major|minor|micro|build (In the version number 7. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console.0.0. For example. By default proxy inspection is turned on. If the version numbers are not the same. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45.123. This is the default. build — Sets the check to compare all four parts of the version numbers. the Application Server refuses the connection. minor — Sets the check to compare the major and minor parts of the version numbers.) major — Sets the check to compare only the major part of the version numbers. minor.5.125.125 and the client version is 7.5. 7 is the major part. you can set up a version compatibility check.0. and micro parts of the version numbers. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 69 . micro — Sets the check to compare the major. Ensuring version compatibility between Application Server and client To ensure that a connection does not take place when an Application Server and client are at different versions.Configuring the Application Server 1 Start the Application Server Administration console.5. and so on. If you specify: set appserver VersionCompatibilityCheck micro The check would find that the version numbers are the same and allow the connection.

2 To set a maximum cache size for file system objects. You can use this setting to improve database performance. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. if you take a snapshot of a directory structure contains multiple instances of the same. 3 Restart the Application Server.Configuring the Application Server If you specify: set appserver VersionCompatibilityCheck build The check would find that the version numbers differ and would refuse the connection. 3 Restart the Application Server. as the file system object is stored in the cache and can be reused. Setting a maximum cache size for file system objects The Application Server lets you specify the maximum number of file system objects that are stored in the cache. 70 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . For example. The default value is 5000. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. the Job does not have to write the same file to the database multiple times. enter the following: set appserver FileSystemObjectCacheMaxSize # where # is a the maximum number of file system objects that will be stored in the cache.

Changing the heap size for the Application Server You can the heap size for the Application Server from the BMC BladeLogic Console or using the blasadmin utility. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. search groups. You can adjust this display number by selecting Window => Preferences. select Infrastructure Management.Changing the heap size for BMC BladeLogic components Setting the maximum number of items per page The Application Server lets you specify a maximum number of records retrieved from a managed server. folders. smart groups. enter the following: set appserver MaxPageSize # where # is a the maximum number of items retrieved per page. per page. Changing the heap size for BMC BladeLogic components You can change the heap size for the Application Server. and server objects in the Configuration Object Dictionary. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 71 . 3 Restart the Application Server. for example. TIP In the BMC BladeLogic Console. The default value is 1000. Expand BMC and Paging Options to change the default. large numbers of objects are presented in groups of 50. These records are used when working with groups. from the Configuration menu. You must choose File => Refresh after changing the default to have the change take effect. and other BMC BladeLogic components as described in the following sections. by default. custom objects. You can then page through these groups to make working with large numbers of objects more manageable. 2 Expand the hierarchy of the Application Servers node. 2 To set a maximum page size. database assets. From the BMC BladeLogic Console 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. the Application Server Launcher.

1024 MB Linux . by default. update the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\BladeLogic\Operations Manager\Application Server\option1 72 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . change the values for the MaxHeapSize attribute. perform the following steps according to your environment. Application Servers inherit the heap size value from the Application Server Launcher. The Edit Application Server Profile dialog opens. the recommended Max Heap Size value for each platform is as follows: ■ ■ ■ Windows . as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. 2 Enter the following command: set AppServer MaxHeapSize heapSize For example: set AppServer MaxHeapSize 1024M TIP Assuming that the Application Server has the recommended configuration of 4GB or more of physical memory. 4 In the Edit Application Server Profile dialog. In a multiApplication Server environment.1536 MB Solaris . To change the heap size for the Application Server Launcher. perform the following steps: 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. Using the Application Server Administration console (blasadmin utility) To change the heap size for the Application Server using the blasadmin utility.Changing the heap size for BMC BladeLogic components 3 Right-click the Application Server you want to edit and select Edit. ■ On Windows platforms.2048 MB Changing the heap size for the Application Server Launcher You can also change the heap size for the Application Server Launcher.

to change the heap size for the blasadmin utility on Windows.io.io.tmpdir=$BLADELOGIC_HOME/tmp……. modify the following line in the corresponding script. Enabling/disabling SOCKS proxy rule evaluation By default. In the configuration file... modify the following line in the blappserv script. you modify the blasadmin. specifies a max heap size of 1GB.tmpdir=$BLADELOGIC_HOME/tmp……. for example.Enabling/disabling SOCKS proxy rule evaluation ■ For UNIX and Linux platforms.cfg file. Changing the value to Xmx1G. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 73 . where -Xmx512M specifies a max heap size of 512Mb./usr/nsh/br directory: $JAVA_HOME/bin/java -Xss2m -Xmx512M Djava. ■ For Windows platforms. Changing the value to Xmx1G. For example. which is located in the .. To change the heap size for the BMC BladeLogic Console on UNIX or Linux. If your system does not use SOCKS Proxy Servers to route to remote servers. By default. for example. ■ For UNIX and Linux platforms. where -Xmx512M specifies a max heap size of 512Mb. the BMC BladeLogic system evaluates communication requests to remote servers against routing rules to determine if the communication needs to be routed through a SOCKS Proxy Server. specifies a max heap size of 1GB.cfg) file in the br directory.arg=-Xmx1024M. the format for setting the max heap size is jvm.. the configuration files are located in C:\Program Files\BMC Software\Bladelogic\versionNumber\NSH\br. you modify the configuration script or file for the component. modify the corresponding configuration (. you can disable routing rule evaluation. which is located in the ./usr/nsh/br directory: $JAVA_HOME/bin/java -Xss2m -Xmx512M Djava. you modify the blclient script. Changing the heap size for other BMC BladeLogic components To change the heap size for other BMC BladeLogic components.

All users need to be mapped to the same user on the file server. NOTE Do not limit access to the file server by pushing agent ACLs to the agent on the file server. you must perform this procedure. BMC BladeLogic uses the file server to store the contents of files included in snapshots. 74 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Before you can start BMC BladeLogic for the first time after a fresh installation. the system does not evaluate communication requests against routing rules. In addition. the file server stores registry. 3 Restart the Application Server. enter the following: set RoutingConfig EvaluateSocksProxyRules true|false Where: true — Turns on routing rule evaluation.Configuring the file server 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. false — Turns off routing rule evaluation. BLPackages. By default. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. For information on setting up communications to remote servers through SOCKS Proxy Servers. routing rule evaluation is turned on. software packages. ■ The file server should have substantial disk space (see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Installation Guide for exact recommendations). The system evaluates communication requests against routing rules. Network Shell scripts. and metabase values longer than 255 characters. and other types of information that is not easily stored in the database. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. COM+. Configuring the file server To configure a file server you must specify a host and directory where BMC BladeLogic stores content. 2 To enable or disable routing rule evaluation. A file server should meet the following requirements: ■ An RSCD agent should be installed and licensed.

and all BMC BladeLogic users must be mapped to that user.Configuring the file server ■ A user name must be defined on the file server. One way to accomplish the necessary mapping is to create an entry like the following in the exports file on the file server: applicationServer rw. Use a Network Shell style path to a directory. such as /c/FileServer. such as C:\FileServer. user=userName where applicationServer is a comma-separated list of Application Server names or IP addresses and userName is the name to which all users are mapped. Setting up the file server 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. 2 Right-click the file server and select choose from the following options: Option Update File Server Status Description Contacts the file server to determine current status Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 75 . Updating a file server You can update the status or change the properties of a file server using the Infrastructure Management window. enter the following: set fileserver location directory where directory is the directory on the file server where data is stored. 4 Restart the Application Server. enter the following: set fileserver name hostname where hostname is the name of the server where data is stored. 1 Select Configuration => Infrastructure Management. as opposed to a Windows-style path. Without this mapping a user may not be able to access a file that another user has stored on the file server. 2 To specify the name of the file server. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. For more information see “Exports file” on page 240. 3 To specify the location of the file server directory.

1 Start the Application Server Administration console.) 3 To specify the email address from which system-generated email is sent. see “Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers” on page 312 Configuring a mail server BMC BladeLogic jobs can generate email upon their completion.Configuring a mail server Option Refresh Properties Description Updates the status of the server Launches the properties dialog. where you can modify the host name or the file server root directory. 76 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . enter the following: set emailconfig smtpserver hostname where hostname is the name or IP address of the host managing email. You do not have to configure a mail server if you are not using the system’s ability to generate email. To enable this capability. 5 Restart the Application Server. 4 To display the email address for technical support. enter the following: show emailconfig techsupport NOTE The techsupport parameter is a read-only parameter. enter the following: set emailconfig fromaddress address where address is the address from which mail should be sent. For more information. select the Enable Advanced File Server option. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. To modify the file server to an advanced file server. 2 To specify the name or IP address of the SMTP server. you must configure a mail server. (SMTP stands for simple mail transfer protocol.

3 To specify a listening port for the SNMP server. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. it too can generate an SNMP trap. you should configure the Application Server so it knows the location of the Perl executable.Configuring Perl Configuring Perl The BMC BladeLogic Console and Network Shell both support the Perl scripting language. such as /c/perl/bin/perl. you must configure an SNMP server. enter the following: set snmpconfig snmpserver hostname where hostname is the name or IP address of the host managing SNMP trap notifications. In addition. 3 Restart the Application Server. 2 Specify the path and name of the Perl executable by entering the following: set perlconfig location pathToPerl where pathToPerl is a Network Shell-style path. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. when an Audit Job detects consistent or inconsistent results. enter the following: set snmpconfig snmpport # where # is the port used to contact the SNMP server. If you are using Perl.exe. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 77 . Configuring an SNMP server When a BMC BladeLogic job completes. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. 4 Restart the Application Server. it can generate an SNMP trap. 2 To specify the name or IP address of the SNMP server. To enable SNMP traps.

SelectMethod=cursor When using one of the formats shown above. However. a BMC BladeLogic installation uses the following database ports: Port Number 1521 1433 ■ ■ Database Type Oracle SQL Server 3 To specify the driver class for the database. Replace DBNAME with the name of the database or replace SID with the Oracle SID. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console”. By default. and SQL Server database name or Oracle SID. The installation program can configure the Application Server to communicate with this database. the server running the database. enter the following: set database connectionstring string where string is a string that specifies the database type. Replace PORT with the port number the database is listening on. do the following: ■ Replace DBServer with the name or IP address of the server running the database. The connection string can use one of the following formats: ■ ■ jdbc:oracle:thin:@DBSERVER:PORT:SID jdbc:sqlserver://DBSERVER:PORT. the port the database listens on. 2 To specify a connection string for the database. enter the following: set database driverclass class where class is the Java® class used to communicate with the database.jdbc. as described in this procedure.DatabaseName=DBNAME.driver.OracleDriver 78 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . you can define the class with one of the following strings: ■ oracle.Configuring a database server Configuring a database server BMC BladeLogic works in conjunction with an Oracle® or SQL Server database server. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. Depending on the type of database you are using. you can manually configure the Application Server to communicate with the database.

Configuring the process spawner An Application Server can be configured to spawn processes externally to the Application Server process itself. an Application Server spawns processes for Network Shell Script Jobs and some types of extended objects.microsoft. Commit size is primarily used when taking snapshots or performing audits in BMC BladeLogic. which starts a new child process. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 79 . enter the following: set database commitsize size where size is the maximum number of rows that can be updated in an Oracle database before you either have to commit your updates or roll them back. you may want to consult your Oracle DBA to achieve best results when defining a commit size. TIP Because Oracle databases can be highly tuned. a separate dedicated process (the process spawner) is used only for spawning processes. Spawning processes externally can be beneficial for memory management. The Application Server transfers the necessary information to the child process. A larger commit size means database processes execute more quickly. it contacts the process spawner. 6 Restart the Application Server.jdbc.sqlserver. Primarily. When the Application Server needs to spawn a process. but at the same time you run the risk of losing more data should a database process fail. 5 To specify a commit size for an Oracle database. enter the following two commands: set database userid id set database password ****** where id is the user name that the database needs to authenticate your connection and ****** is the password assigned to that user ID.Configuring the process spawner ■ com. If you configure an Application Server in this way.SQLServerDriver 4 To specify the user ID and password for the database.

Configuring the process spawner To configure the process spawner. do the following: 1 Configure the Application Server to use the process spawner. see “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. this value is set to false. Enter the following: set ProcessSpawner RegistryPort # where # is the number of a port. 2 Specify that processes be spawned externally from the Application Server process. 2 Configure the process spawner itself. 80 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . For example: blasadmin -s JobServer1 For more information on methods for starting this console. Enter the following: set ProcessSpawner SpawnExternally true Setting this value to false indicates the process spawner runs within the Application Server process. Configuring an Application Server to use the process spawner 1 Start the Application Server Administration console for the Application Server that you want to execute the NSH jobs. BMC Software recommends that you run the following command before starting the Application Server service (to avoid ‘connection refused’ failures for any scheduled jobs): ■ ■ run /etc/init. NOTE If you set the ProcessSpawner SpawnExternally value to true. See “Configuring an Application Server to use the process spawner”.d/blprocserv start (UNIX) net start “BladeLogic Process Spawner” (Windows) 3 Specify a port for communicating with the process spawner. The default port is 1067 and is the port recommended by BMC BladeLogic. See “Configuring the process spawner” on page 81. By default. 4 Restart the Application Server.

The default port is 1067 and is the port recommended by BMC BladeLogic. select Settings > Control Panel. blasadmin -s _spawner For more information on methods for starting this console.d/blprocserv restart ■ Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 81 . 7 Restart the process spawner. and double-click Services. enter the following: /etc/init. On a UNIX-style system. from the Start menu. Enter the following: set AppServer RegistryPort # where # is the number of a port. see “Starting the Application Server Administration console”. Do one of the following: ■ On Windows. Right-click BMC BladeLogic Process Spawner and select Restart from the pop-up menu. Double-click Administrative Tools.Configuring the process spawner Configuring the process spawner 5 Start the Application Server Administration console for the process spawner deployment. 6 Set the Registry Port for the process spawner to match the port specified to the when you configured the Application Server to use the process spawner.

Configuring expiration time for credentials of jobs Configuring expiration time for credentials of jobs Use this procedure to set a timeout value for the session credentials that are passed to jobs. Choosing not to cross mount points can substantially increase the speed of snapshots. enter the following: set ProcessSpawner NshScriptJobCredentialTimeout # where # is the number of hours (minimum of 24). For more on the process spawner. you can perform a snapshot or audit of / and processing can traverse other volumes such as /home or /usr that may reside under /. audits. see “Configuring the process spawner” on page 81. and BLPackages in BMC BladeLogic can be processed across UNIX mount points and network mount points for remote file systems shared through NFS. audits. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. By default. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. an error message is written to the Application Server log and the job log. For example. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. processing does not cross mount points. enter the following: set mountconfig SnpAudPkgCrossMounts true|false 82 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . and packaging of BLPackages. The NshScriptJobCredentialTimeout setting is a global setting that applies to all jobs. Processing across mount points Use this procedure to configure the Application Server so snapshots. 3 Restart the Application Server. 2 To set a timeout value for the job session credentials. The default setting is 96 hours. Once the credentials expire. 2 To specify how UNIX mount points are processed. if you want to cross mount points. all active client connections are closed. NOTE If a job exceeds the timeout value in the NshScriptJobCredentialTimeout setting.

3 To specify how network mount points are processed. By default this value is set to 50. Setting this value to 0 means no records are processed. Audit. Snapshot. To set SnpAudPkgNetworkMounts to true. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 83 . the job fails on that server with a parsing error. 3 Restart the Application Server. If a job targets a server that returns more records for a configuration object or extended object than the limit set in this procedure. and BLPackages crosses network mount points. and Compliance Jobs. snapshots. enter the following: set mountconfig SnpAudPkgNetworkMounts true|false In the command shown above.Restricting the size of configuration and extended objects In the command shown above. true means processing of audits. enter the following: set AssetThresholds MaxConfigRecords # where # is the maximum number of records to be processed. 2 To limit the number of records that an Application Server can process for a single configuration object or extended object. the SnpAudPkgCrossMounts option must also be set to true (see step 2). false means that processing does not cross network mount points (this is the default value). 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. Restricting the size of configuration and extended objects Use this procedure to limit the number of records that a server can provide to an Application Server for a single configuration object or extended object. Using this procedure can help prevent the Application Server from running out of memory. Configuration objects and extended objects can be used in component templates. snapshots. 4 Restart the Application Server. particularly when the Application Server processes multiple configuration objects or extended objects on multiple servers simultaneously. false means that processing does not cross mount points (this is the default value). as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. and BLPackages crosses mount points.000. true means processing of audits. and in live browsing. Processing large numbers of records for a configuration object or extended object can consume large quantities of memory.

Configuring user interface settings Configuring user interface settings The Application Server Administration console gives you several options for controlling the behavior of the BMC BladeLogic Console and the BLCLI. users cannot display no access nodes. enter the following: set ConfigManagerUI ShowNoAccessNodes true|false In the command shown above. which users can always delete. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. users can delete groups and folders even when they contain system objects. 2 To show or hide no access nodes. true indicates that no access nodes can be shown in the BMC BladeLogic Console. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. users can potentially see system objects even when those users do not have appropriate permissions to interact with those objects. This procedure lets you globally show or hide no access nodes. This setting has no effect on smart groups. BMC BladeLogic users have the option of hiding or displaying no access nodes. 84 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Deleting groups in the BMC BladeLogic Console Use this procedure to specify that users of the BMC BladeLogic Console cannot delete groups or folders unless they are empty. If you use this procedure to show no access nodes at the Application Server level. BMC BladeLogic calls these type of objects no access nodes. 3 Restart the Application Server. If you use this procedure to hide no access nodes. The following procedures describe the available options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Displaying no access nodes in the BMC BladeLogic Console Deleting groups in the BMC BladeLogic Console Creating properties automatically in the BMC BladeLogic Console Limiting the number of results displayed when browsing Controlling the permissions of copied objects Enabling export and import of property dictionaries and classes Setting temporary group location for update Displaying no access nodes in the BMC BladeLogic Console In the BMC BladeLogic Console. false indicates no access nodes are hidden. By default.

By default. false indicates users can delete groups and folders even when they contain objects. This procedure lets you set an arbitrary limit to the number of results that can be displayed during live browse. BMC BladeLogic can automatically create properties so you can map them to the properties referenced by the imported object. Creating properties automatically in the BMC BladeLogic Console When you import objects into the BMC BladeLogic Console and those objects reference properties not defined on the destination system. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. 2 To specify whether users can delete groups or folders. This procedure lets you specify whether properties should be created automatically during the import process. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. Limiting the number of results displayed when browsing Use this procedure to limit the number of results displayed when a user is browsing in the BMC BladeLogic Console. false indicates properties are not automatically created. 2 To turn the automatic creation of properties on or off. properties are automatically created. 3 Restart the Application Server. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. enter the following: set ConfigManagerUI GroupsMustBeEmpty true|false In the command shown above. true indicates that groups must be empty before they can be deleted. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 85 . true indicates that properties are automatically created. 3 Restart the Application Server.Configuring user interface settings 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. Selecting some nodes while browsing can potentially display large numbers of results. enter the following: set ConfigManagerUI AutoCreate true|false In the command shown above. which can slow your system performance.

3 Restart the Application Server. Setting this number to 0 indicates no results are displayed. 3 Restart the Application Server. The limit set in the console cannot exceed the limit established with this procedure. users can copy and paste an object. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. Also the user’s role is granted full permission to the object (that is. a * authorization). Controlling the permissions of copied objects Use this procedure to control the permissions that are assigned to objects during copy and paste operations in the BMC BladeLogic Console. By default this option is set to 50. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. 86 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . true means that when you copy and paste an object. 2 To limit the number of live browse results that can be displayed. users can set a preference that also establishes a limit for results displayed while browsing. the newly created object is granted a default set of permissions. After you use blasadmin to perform this procedure. By default this option is set to false. when users copy and paste an object. and the newly created object has the permissions that are specified for that type of object in the object permissions template defined for the user’s role. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45.Configuring user interface settings In the BMC BladeLogic Console. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. enter the following: set ACLCopy UseDefaultAclOnObjectCopy true In the command shown above. 2 To enable copying of objects so that the copied objects are assigned a default set of permissions.000. the newly created object has the same permissions as those assigned to the object that was copied. the newly created object has the same permissions that were defined for the object that was copied. false means that when you copy and paste an object. Normally. enter the following: set AssetThresholds MaxAllowedLiveBrowseResults # where # is the maximum number of results that can be displayed for any node when browsing in the console.

2 To enable or disable the import and export of the Property Dictionary or custom property classes. true indicates that you can export and import the Property Dictionary or custom property classes. Setting temporary group location for update When you run any of the BLCLI importAndUpdate commands in the Template or BlPackage name spaces. false indicates import/export is disabled. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 87 . By default this option is set to false. the temporary group is /importAndUpdate. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45.Configuring user interface settings Enabling export and import of property dictionaries and classes Use this procedure to enable or disable the export and import of the entire Property Dictionary or specific custom property classes. the import and update process creates a temporary group at the root of the relevant workspace and uses that group to store the imported object. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. This temporary group is deleted at the end of the update operation. enter the following: set ConfigManagerUI DefaultImportAndUpdateFolder /path/to/some/folder 3 Restart the Application Server. By default. 3 Restart the Application Server. 2 To specify a new location for the temporary group. this option must be set to true on both the exporting and the importing Application Server. To enable import/export. enter the following: set ConfigManagerUI PropertySync true|false In the command shown above. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. This procedure lets you change this group to another name or location. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45.

you can specify how many failed logins cause a user to be locked out and how long that lockout lasts. ■ To specify how many times a user can fail to log in before being locked out. Entering a 0 indicates passwords do not expire. Entering a 0 indicates there is no minimum length for passwords. Maximum password age—By setting a maximum password age. enter the following: set accountconfig MinPasswordLength # where # is the minimum length for passwords. there is no minimum length for passwords.Setting SRP login requirements Setting SRP login requirements Use this procedure to configure the Application Server so it forces users logging in via SRP to meet any of the following requirements: ■ Minimum password length—By setting a minimum password length. ■ To specify how long a user is locked out when he or she has surpassed the lockout threshold. you can require users specifying passwords to provide a password of minimum length. ■ ■ 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. For more information on RBAC see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. By default. enter the following: 88 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . enter the following: set accountconfig AccountLockoutThreshold # where # is the number of failed logins that trigger a lockout. ■ To specify how long it takes for a password to expire. 2 Do any of the following: ■ To specify a minimum password length. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. enter the following: set accountconfig MaxPasswordAge # where # is a period of time in days. you can require users to change passwords at specified intervals. Account lockout—By setting a threshold and duration for account lockouts. In RBAC you can specify that passwords never expire no matter what expiration period you specify. Entering a 0 indicates that users cannot be locked out because of login failures.

255. Multicast addresses must fall in the range 224. 3 Identify the address of the TFTP server by entering the following: set pxeserver default_address TFTP_address where TFTP_address is the IP address of the TFTP server.2.0. you might enter the name of a network interface card. By default.0. a BMC BladeLogic PXE Server listens on the multicast address of 224. Use this procedure to provide various parameters needed to run a PXE Server. Enter the following: blasadmin -s _pxe 2 Identify the type of Ethernet interface that the PXE server uses to listen by entering the following: set pxeserver interface_to_bind interfaceName where interfaceName is the type of Ethernet interface. For example. which provides instructions for downloading the bootstrap program needed to begin the provisioning process.0. Configuring the PXE Server When provisioning some types of servers.1. such as eth0 or eth1.255. 5 Identify the IP address of a multicast TFTP server by entering the following: set pxeserver mtftp_address MTFTP_address where MTFTP_address is the multicast address that the TFTP listens on. Entering a 0 indicates that users can only be unlocked by an administrator using RBAC.Configuring the PXE Server set accountconfig AccountLockoutDuration # where # is the number of minutes the user is locked out.0 to 239. 4 Identify the IP address of the multicast group that the PXE server listens on by entering the following: set pxeserver multicast_address address where address is an IP address.255. you must set up a PXE Server. Servers being provisioned download bootstrap programs from a TFTP server. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console and specify the PXE Server deployment (_pxe). Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 89 .

10 Specify whether the PXE Server can use a broadcast by entering the following: set pxeserver is_use_broadcast # where # can be one of the following: ■ ■ 0—The PXE Server cannot use a broadcast. 9 Specify whether the PXE Server uses a multicast by entering the following: set pxeserver is_use_multicast # where # can be one of the following: ■ ■ 0—The PXE Server cannot use a multicast. 11 Specify the amount of time the boot prompt displays before the boot process begins by entering the following: set pxeserver prompt_timeout # where # is the maximum amount of time the boot prompt can display. 1—The PXE Server can use a multicast. If you enter 0. 8 Identify the PXE Server’s listening port by entering the following: set pxeserver listen_port port where port is the port on which the PXE Server listens for connections from PXE clients. 90 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .Configuring the PXE Server 6 Identify the multicast port that PXE clients should use to communicate with the TFTP server by entering the following: set pxeserver mtftp_client_port port where port is the multicast port that servers being provisioned should use to communicate with the TFTP server. 7 Identify the port that the TFTP server should use to listen for traffic from PXE clients by entering the following: set pxeserver mtftp_server_port port where port is the multicast port. By default BMC BladeLogic uses port 1759. By default BMC BladeLogic uses port 1758. 1—The PXE Server can use a broadcast. the boot prompt does not display.

com/ BMCBladelogicLicensingWS/services/BMCBladelogic LicenseService Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 91 . For example.Configuring the Licensing Module 12 Identify the base directory on the TFTP server where operating system bootstrap programs are stored. to display the user name the Application Server uses to connect to the Licensing Portal.com/services/LicensingWS set Licensing DeregisterServiceURL https://webapps. Configuring the Licensing Module The Application Server communicates with the BMC Software Licensing Portal to register or deregister managed servers.bmc. TIP To display the value of a parameter you have set previously. 13 Identify the PXE Server’s domain by entering the following: set pxeserver domain domain_name where domain_name is the name of the PXE Server’s domain. 14 Restart the PXE Server. Enter the following: set pxeserver tftpd_base_dir directory where directory is the base directory on the TFTP server for storing bootstrap programs. Use the Licensing command to specify the information required to access the services of the Licensing Portal. use the show parameter instead of the set parameter. enter: show Licensing ServiceUsername Connecting to the Licensing Portal Use the following parameters for the Licensing command to specify the location of the portal and the credentials the Application Server uses to communicate with the Licensing Portal. Task Set the location of Licensing Portal for registering servers Set the location of Licensing Portal for deregistering servers Command set Licensing LicenseServiceURL http://www.bladelogic.

Enabling asynchronous execution Asynchronous execution lets Deploy Jobs run without blocking work item threads for extended periods of time. Asynchronous execution can occur during the Simulate and Commit phases of a Deploy Job as well as during an undo. Connecting to the Licensing Portal using a proxy These optional parameters for the Licensing command specify the system and credentials for the proxy host through which the Application Server communicates with the Licensing Portal. When you use the show Licensing ServicePassword command. This allow an Application Server to process a Deploy Job more efficiently and frees up valuable Application Server resources that can be used by other jobs. Task Set the proxy host name Set the proxy port Set the proxy user name and password Command set Licensing ProxyHost hostName set Licensing ProxyPort portNumber set Licensing ProxyUsername userName set Licensing ProxyPassword password While the ProxyPassword is entered in clear text. it is stored in the database in encrypted form. When you use the show Licensing ProxyPassword command. 2 To enable or disable asynchronous execution. the password is displayed in encrypted form. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. it is stored in the database in encrypted form. the password is displayed in encrypted form. Notes Enter the fully-qualified name of the host machine. enter the following: 92 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. Turning asynchronous execution on or off does not affect the Staging phase of a Deploy Job.Enabling asynchronous execution Task Set the user name and password Command set Licensing ServiceUsername userName set Licensing ServicePassword password Note: While the password is entered in clear text.

enter the following: set AppServer enableWebServices true For information about additional web services settings. All Application Servers on the same host must use the same database connection.) Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 93 . the performance of one Application Server does not affect the behavior of another. see “Using the Post-Install Configuration wizard to configure the default application server” on page 34. To configure multiple application servers on the same host. in addition to the Application Server initially installed. follow these steps: 1 If you have not done so already. install and configure the Application Server on the host machine. 3 Restart the Application Server. (For information. Defining multiple Application Servers also lets you utilize more fixed memory on a host system because the JavaVM heap limit would otherwise restrict a single Application Server to a fixed amount of memory. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Web Services Developer Guide. such as a Configuration Server or a Job Server. Configuring multiple Application Servers on the same host BMC BladeLogic lets you run multiple Application Servers on a single host. You can configure each additional Application Server so it performs one or more distinct functions. Using separate Application Servers in this way. The easiest way to achieve this result is to run the Post-Install configuration wizard as the last step of the Application Server installation. Enabling web services To enable web services.Enabling web services set appserver EnableAsyncExecution true | false By default this value is set to true.

See “Creating additional Application Servers”. About Application Server deployments and profiles The following sections provide an overview of Application Server deployment and the different types of Application Servers. 3 Optionally. The table describes each deployment and the effect of configuration changes on it.About Application Server deployments and profiles 2 Use the Infrastructure Management window or the Application Server Administration console (blasadmin) to create and configure additional Application Servers on the host. See “Using the Application Server Administration console (blasadmin) to configure Application Servers” on page 44. NOTE When you start blasadmin. based on their Application Server Type and other information you specify. The creation process not only creates the additional Application Servers but also gives them an “out-of-the-box” configuration. 94 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Application Server deployments A deployment is a directory of services that an Application Server runs. you must use options to specify the Application Server you are configuring or to specify configuration of all Application Servers on the host. use the Application Server Administration console (blasadmin) to further configure Application Servers.

each Application Server’s profile determines the number and type of services in its deployment. see “Using the application server configuration wizard to change configuration settings” on page 39. ■ AppServerName The deployment for each Application Server created on the same host (in addition to the default Application Server). default The deployment for a single Application Server or the initial Application Server when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host. This deployment is created during BMC BladeLogic installation. Changes you make using the Application Server Configuration Wizard or the blappconf command with no -s option. The following configuration changes affect the default deployment: ■ Changes you make using the Application Server Administration console from the BMC BladeLogic menu or using blasadmin without the -a option or -s option. See “Starting blasadmin to Configure the Default Application Server” on page 45. The following configuration changes affect the deployment: ■ Changes you make using blasadmin -s appServerName or blasadmin -a. When there are multiple Application Servers configured on the same host. Configuration changes you make using blasadmin -a affect this deployment. ■ Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 95 . This deployment is created when a single or initial Application Server is first started. This deployment contains default (“out-of-the-box”) settings and initial configuration settings made with the Post-Install Configuration wizard.About Application Server deployments and profiles Deployment Name _template Description The “master” from which other Application Server deployments are created. Changes you make using blappconf -s appServerName For more information. The start-up process copies the _template deployment to create the default deployment. Changes to this deployment affect all new Application Servers created. See “Using the application server configuration wizard to change configuration settings” on page 39. See “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45.

About Application Server deployments and profiles Deployment Name _spawner _pxe _launcher Description The deployment for the process spawner. An Application Server’s profile is essentially a pre-packaged set of configuration options for an Application Server. A JOB server responds to local connection requests from the BMC BladeLogic Console or the BLCLI. provided that one or more of the connection ports (for example. See “The Application Server Launcher” on page 34. BMC BladeLogic uses the profile to create and update an Application Server’s deployment (the services that the Application Server runs). JOB 96 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Application Server Type CONFIGURATION Functional Description Handles all requests from the BMC BladeLogic Console and the BLCLI. See “Configuring the process spawner” on page 81. The attributes needed for each type are predefined in the profile for the type. Executes work items needed to process a job. An Application Server profile can include attributes of one or more Application Server types. Each Application Server has a different profile. The following table lists Application Server types and describes each. See “Configuring the PXE Server” on page 89. You specify the Application Server types when you create the Application Server. Application Server profiles A profile is a definition of an Application Server’s identity: its name. type. The deployment for the Application Server Launcher. A JOB server never responds to remote connection requests. AppSvcPort) is open. only a JOB server can run the work items needed to process a job. Application Server types The Application Server Type defines the work that an Application Server performs and services that it runs. While a CONFIGURATION server can create jobs and start the execution of jobs. and attributes. The deployment for the PXE Server. regardless of settings for the connection ports.

ALL Creating additional Application Servers You can create additional Application Servers from the BMC BladeLogic Console using the Infrastructure Management window or from the command line using the Application Server Administration console (blasadmin). entering the following information for the new Application Server.Creating additional Application Servers Application Server Type NSH_PROXY Functional Description Manages traffic between Network Shell clients and remote servers. Choose one of the following options: ■ Click No to return to the new Application Server dialog. NSH_PROXY) An Application Server with its type set to ALL performs the functions of all Application Server types. ■ 3 In the New Application Server dialog. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 97 . Click Yes to redeploy the unmanaged deployment with the base port and configuration type you specify. select Infrastructure Management. 2 Expand the Application Server Launchers node and right-click the Application Server Launcher that you want to control the new Application Server. 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. Then select New Application Server. Creating additional Application Servers from the BMC BladeLogic Console Use this procedure to create Application Servers in addition to the Application Server installed on a host. Note that you will not preserve the data that was in the previous unmanaged deployment. If there are unmanaged deployments which match this new Application Server request. JOB. from the Configuration menu. you are presented with the option of using the unmanaged deployment or creating a new one. An NSH_PROXY server cannot service requests from the BMC BladeLogic Console or the BLCLI. Equivalent to (CONFIGURATION.

Accept the default (All Server Types) or uncheck All Server Types and select one or more types. The name can include letters. Used internally within the BMC BladeLogic environment. hyphens (-). if the default port numbers have a base of 9800 (9836 for Registry Port. Do not use the same name as the default Application Server. The Application Server Type determines the attributes included in its Application Server profile. digits. use Ctrl-Click to select individual items). and so on. 98 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . asking if you want to edit the new Application Server’s profile. Specify a number that makes the new Application Server’s default ports unique on the host. and so on). 5 A prompt appears. _spawner. For information on each type. Follow these guidelines: ■ Specify a name that is unique on the host. or ALL (a combination of all three types). _postmig ■ ■ ■ You cannot change the Application Server Name after configuration. and underscores (_). _template. 4 Click OK. 9829 for SRP Port. However. (Use Shift + Click to select multiple contiguous types. JOB. Do not use the following reserved names: default. See “Viewing and editing an Application Server’s profile” on page 100. see “Application Server types” on page 96. _util. you could specify 9900 as the base port for the new Application Server. The name can be no more than 200 characters in length. The creation process sets the Registry Port to 9936. BMC BladeLogic uses the base port with the last two digits of the default port. Base Port (Required) The number that BMC BladeLogic uses to automatically generate default port numbers for the new Application Server. Application (Required) Specifies the type of Application Server to create: Server Type(s) CONFIGURATION. The system creates a profile for the new Application Server. _pxe. _old. the SRP Port to 9929. _install. NSH_PROXY. as well as for the Display Name in the interface. you can change the Display Name. _launcher. To generate the numbers. For example. The number must be between 1000 and 65536.Creating additional Application Servers Field Application Server Name Description (Required) The name for the new Application Server.

For example. Creating additional Application Servers from the command line You can also add a new Application Server deployment using the blasadmin Create command. see “Viewing and editing an Application Server’s profile” on page 100. or All (a combination of all three types). (You can always edit the profile later. If the base_port is 9500. You can create deployments while executing from a shell or while reading in a file. click No. click Yes. For information on each type. You can either start the Application Server or deploy it and start it later. see “Viewing and editing an Application Server’s profile” on page 100. the offset for the authentication port is 40 by default. For information. base_port is a number that is combined with offset values to determine Authentication and Application Server port numbers. see the description of the Application Server Name field in “Creating additional Application Servers from the BMC BladeLogic Console” on page 97. profile_type is a comma separated list of the type of Application Server to create: Configuration. To accept the profile. The Edit Application Server Profile dialog appears. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 99 . Job.Creating additional Application Servers ■ To add or change attributes for the server. For guidelines for creating the name. To add a new deployment 1 Start blasadmin for the _template deployment by entering the following: blasadmin -s _template 2 Create a new default deployment of a specific type by entering the following: create deployment_name base_port profile_types where deployment_name is the name of the new deployment you are creating. the authentication port would be 9540.) ■ BMC BladeLogic creates the Application Server. NSH_Proxy. This command provides the ability to set up an environment from the command line.

To change an existing value. 4 In the Edit Application Server Profile dialog. NOTE Always use the Edit Application Server Profile dialog to add or change the attributes (configuration parameters) in an Application Server’s profile. 3 Right-click the Application Server you want to edit and select Edit. ■ To add an attribute to the Application Server’s profile or to change a default value. from the Configuration menu. 2 Expand the hierarchy of the Application Servers node. select Infrastructure Management. ■ ■ 100 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . type a value in the blank field. and attributes (configuration parameters). See “Starting Application Servers” on page 41. see “Setting up a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server” on page 145. The Edit Application Server Profile dialog opens. The fields in this dialog are effectively overrides to default values or to previouslyspecified configuration parameters. type. 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. clear the field and type the value you want. 3 Start the Application Server on the machine where you are setting up the deployment. To remove an attribute from the profile. clear the field.Viewing and editing an Application Server’s profile NOTE For instructions on using blasadmin to create a stand-alone NSH Proxy. To view an Application Server’s profile or change attribute values. add or change values for attributes. Viewing and editing an Application Server’s profile An Application Server profile is a definition of an Application Server’s identity: its name. Do not use the blasadmin utility. use the Edit Application Server Profile dialog.

The name that appears in all user interfaces. or ALL. ■ By default. the Display Name is the same as the Application Server name. _launcher. see “Editing the list of roles with Application Server Launcher access” on page 113. follow these guidelines: ■ Specify a name that is unique on the host. You cannot edit this attribute. Do not use the following reserved names: default. digits. ■ A ServiceType of Manual. and underscores (_). The following table describes all attributes that a profile can include. False —The Application Server do not use the default deployment. as specified during configuration. Do not use the same name as the default Application Server. ServiceType Determines if the Application Server should be automatically started by the AppServerLauncher. which means that the Application Server can only be started using the Infrastructure Dialog. NSH. If you leave this field blank. _template.Viewing and editing an Application Server’s profile Attributes listed depend on the Server Profile Type (Application Server Type). See “Application Server types” on page 96. A ServiceType of Automatic means that the Application Server will be started automatically by the AppServerLauncher. The name can include letters. _util ■ ■ Default Deployment Shows whether the Application Server uses the default deployment. JOB. You do not have to specify a name. the ServiceType is Automatic. _pxe. _install. _old. Attribute Application Server Name Display Name Description The name for the Application Server. For information. Server Profile Type(s) The Application Server’s type. _spawner. rather than the Application Server name. hyphens (-). ■ ■ True — The Application Server uses the default deployment. The type can be one or more of the following: CONFIGURATION. specified during configuration. You cannot edit this attribute. You cannot edit this attribute. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 101 . If you specify a name.

AppSvcPort The listening port for the Application Service (the service that accepts client connections). In that case. If you set this value to 0. 102 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .bladelogic:blsess://10. the default is Base Port plus 40. For example: service:appsvc. To include this attribute in the profile. BMC BladeLogic sets this value to the Base Port plus 40. If you set this value to 0. BMC BladeLogic sets this value to the Base Port plus 41.bladelogic:blsess://localhost:9841. If that Application Server is a JOB type Application Server.10. that service accepts only connections from the local machine. By default BLCLI commands run on the Application Server processing the job. it runs a ClientConnectionService. it cannot process BLCLI commands used for import/export. service:appsvc. the port is disabled. you can direct these commands to run on a particular Application Server. this port defaults to 0. the Application Server does not run an Authentication Service. When you create a new Application Server. When you create a new Application Server. specify one or more comma-separated values. CLRProxyPort The listening port for Network Shell (NSH) communication. However. unless the server is also a configuration server (Application Server Type JOB and CONFIGURATION). Note: When you create a job server (Application Server Type JOB). Note: When you create a job server (Application Server type JOB). AuthSvcPort The listening port for the Authentication Service (the service that authenticates user identities). This convention avoids conflicts when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host. This convention avoids conflicts when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host.Viewing and editing an Application Server’s profile Attribute AppServiceURLs Description The Application Service URLs distributed in the session credentials issued by the Authentication Service. you do not need to specify a value for this attribute.10:9841 Typically. if you want to run Network Shell Script Jobs that include BLCLI commands.10. the Application Server does not run an Application Service. BLCLI commands used for import or export must run on an Application Server with its type set to CONFIGURATION or ALL. unless the server is also a configuration server (Application Server Type JOB and CONFIGURATION). However. If you set this value to 0.

the Application Server does not start. If you edit this attribute. BMC BladeLogic sets this value to the Base Port plus 38. The console log file contains all information logged to the Application Server log. The maximum dynamic port number. The default is 50. When you create a new Application Server. The default is 20. When you create a new Application Server. BMC BladeLogic sets this value to the Base Port + 50. specify a name that is unique on the host. see the hardware requirements for the Application Server in the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Installation Guide. If you do not specify a value. JVMArgs Arguments to pass to Java Virtual Machine for this Application Server.Viewing and editing an Application Server’s profile Attribute ConsoleLogfileName Description The name of the console log file for the Application Server. MaxHeapSize You can specify a value for MaxHeapSize but you are not required to do so. MaxWorkItemThreads The maximum size of the pool of threads that can be used to process BMC BladeLogic Console jobs. This value is usually adequate. plus any information logged to the console. this value is set to Base Port + 99. it is assumed to be valid and is used when the Application Server is started. the Application Server uses the heap size set in the Application Server start-up script or service definition. LogfileName The name of the log file for the Application Server. Determines how many targets can be processed in parallel. If you specify a value. BMC BladeLogic sets the console log file’s name to the Application Server name plus “_console”. If you edit this attribute. This convention avoids conflicts when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host. This convention avoids conflicts when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host. Specify any argument that can be specified to the Java command line If the MaxHeapSize attribute is set and you specify an -Xmx flag for JVMArgs. use the standard Java notation. To specify a value. By default.log extension. For information on recommended maximum Java heap size for Application Servers. This convention avoids conflicts when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 103 . for example: 1G or 225M. This convention avoids conflicts when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host. the value for JVMArgs is used instead of MaxHeapSize. If the value is not valid. specify a name that is unique on the host. MinPort The minimum dynamic port number. You do not need to specify a value for this attribute. JMXManagementPort The port used to access the BMC BladeLogic JConsole. BMC BladeLogic sets the log file’s name to the Application Server name plus the . MaxJobs MaxPort The maximum number of jobs the Application Server can execute simultaneously. When you create a new Application Server. When you create a new Application Server.

this name is the same as the Application Server Name and its location is: installDirectory/tmp/temporaryDirectoryName When you create a new Application Server. This convention avoids conflicts when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host. You must manually define a listening port for the default deployment of an Application Server.properties sql/reports-sql. To override the default URLs. For example: service:proxysvc. However.bladelogic:blsess://host1. If you leave this field blank. When you create a new Application Server. specify a name that is unique on the host. BMC BladeLogic sets this value to the Base Port plus 36.bladelogic. type a comma-separated list in the field. BMC BladeLogic sets this value to the Base Port plus 31. the list is: sql/sqlmap. ProxySvcPort is set to 9842 for the default Application Server. SSLPort The listening port for SSL communication. This convention avoids conflicts when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host.properties In most cases. You can modify this value if necessary. BMC BladeLogic sets the temporaryDirectoryName to the Application Server Name. Usually.Viewing and editing an Application Server’s profile Attribute ProxyServiceURLs Description The Network Shell Proxy Service service URLs. When you create a new Application Server. the system uses the default URLs.com:9842 ProxySvcPort The listening port for a Network Shell Proxy Service. TempDirectoryName The name of the directory that stores the Application Server’s tmp files.bladelogic.bladelogic:blsess://host2. If you edit this attribute. This convention avoids conflicts when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host. you can override the default list by typing a comma-separated list of properties in the field. If you leave this field blank. RegistryPort The listening port for traffic between Application Servers that cooperate by distributing jobs to each other. When you deploy a new Application Server with its type set to NSH_PROXY or ALL. SqlFiles The list of SQL properties files used by the Database Service. service:proxysvc. If this value is blank. there is no need to change this list. 104 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Typically.properties sql/streamable_sqlmap.com:9842.properties sql/blas-sqlmap. the ProxySvcPort is automatically set to the Base Port plus 42. the Application Server does not run a Network Shell Proxy Service.

regardless of what that value is. attributes for these Application Servers cannot have the same values. click OK. MaxWorkItemThreads. Typically. or SqlFiles. The Application Server Launcher automatically detects attribute conflicts among the Application Servers that it controls. select Infrastructure Management. Failure to make them unique results in conflicts that can cause a start or restart failure in one or more Application Servers. 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. For information on identifying conflicts in Application Servers’ attributes. All other attributes must be unique. Rules for defining unique attributes Several rules apply when assigning unique values to attributes: ■ Multiple Application Servers can share any port that is set to 0 if that setting of 0 disables the port. each should have a unique profile. For the most part. 2 In the Infrastructure Management window. ■ ■ Listing conflicting attributes When there are Application Servers on the same host. from the Configuration menu. These conflicts prevent an Application Server from starting or restarting if it has conflicts with one or more currently running Application Servers. a conflict occurs because the same port number has been assigned to more than one Application Server. expand the hierarchy of the Application Servers node. 7 Start or restart the Application Server to have changes take effect. Multiple Application Servers can have the same value for MaxJobs. When an Application Server’s profile has a conflicting attributes. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 105 . its Application Server details shows State = CONFLICT. You can also use the List Conflicts operation to identify attributes on an Application Server that conflict with attributes on other Application Servers. 6 Click OK on the warning that configuration changes do not take effect until you restart the Application Server.Listing conflicting attributes 5 When you are finished editing the profile. see “Listing conflicting attributes” on page 105.

Getting information about Application Servers You can display information about an Application Server and the services that it runs.Read authorization. A Warning panel lists the attributes that conflict with those other Application Servers. For each attribute. To display. host (using the same database). from the Configuration menu. 4 Click OK. 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. Do the following: A list of Application Servers on the Expand the Application Servers node. General information about an Application Server Click the Application Server’s name in the left pane... NOTE To display information about the Application Server. the panel shows the attribute name and the name of Application Server that has the same attribute value specified. This information can be useful for diagnostic purposes. 2 Expand the hierarchy of the Application Servers node. The left pane lists each Application Server’s Display Name and Authorization Port. your role must be granted the BL_Administration.Getting information about Application Servers 3 Right-click an Application Server and select List Conflicts. select Infrastructure Management. The right pane shows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Software version Number of jobs running Number of work item threads Database connections Host operating system JVM memory usage 106 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .

A menu of actions you can perform Right-click the Application Server. (The number and type of services vary according to the Application Server’s type. Click the service name. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A list of the services that an Application Server provides Status information about an Application Server service Expand the hierarchy of an Application Server. or starting up. Start Date — The date when the Application Server was started. (For information.) Expand the hierarchy of the Application Server. specified during configuration.) Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 107 . Status information from the Application Server Launcher. ■ ■ Server Type— Application Server Type. Display name— The name that appears in all BMC ■ ■ BladeLogic user interfaces.The Application Server Launchers node To display. The right pane shows: ■ The Application Server Launcher that controls the Application Server Name — The name for the Application Server. on the Application Server The Application Server Launchers node The Application Server Launchers node lists a node for each Application Server Launcher that is configured to use the database and is available. Needs Restart — (True | False) Whether the Application Server has been reconfigured and needs to be restarted. scroll down. Elapsed Time — The uptime of the Application Server. see “The Application Server Launcher” on page 34.) Do the following: Click the Application Server’s name in the left pane.. In the right pane. State — (VALID | CONFLICTS) Whether the Application Server’s profile has conflicts that can keep the Application Server from starting. ServiceType — (Manual | Automatic) Whether the Application Server is automatically started by the AppServerLauncher. stopped. (This information is displayed if your role has authorization to access the Application Server Launcher. Status — (Ready | Stopped | Starting) Whether the Application Server is ready to perform tasks..

General information for each PXE server connected to the database and detailed status information about each PXE Servers services. 108 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . The report includes: ■ General information for each Application Server configured on the host machine (and using the same database) and detailed status information about each Application Server’s services. Edit the list of roles allowed access to the Application Server Launcher. select a directory where the report should be stored. from the Configuration menu. select Infrastructure Management. B For Object Type. 4 On the dialog. such as UTF8 or Western (windows-1252). select a subdirectory by double-clicking its name in the panel.Reporting Application Server information The Application Server Launcher lists a node for each Application Server it controls. C For File Encoding. select a file format. 3 On the Export AppServer Details Report dialog. enter the information for the report file: A For Object Name. it is only through the Application Server Launcher that you can: ■ ■ ■ Obtain port information for the Application Server Launcher. ■ ■ 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. However. Optionally. you can get the same information about Application Servers and perform the same operations as with the Application Servers node. select the type of character encoding that should be used for the exported data. type a file name for the report. Through the Application Server Launchers node. Information about the database to which the Application Server is connected. from the pull-down menu. Create new Application Servers. click Export Detail Report . 5 Click Save. Reporting Application Server information You can generate a report containing information about all of the Application Servers on the host. 2 In the Infrastructure Management window.

You can select options for handling the running jobs. you manage the additional Application Servers through the Infrastructure Management window. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 109 . providing a controlled shutdown. You can perform any of the following management tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Starting a specific Application Server Stopping a specific Application Server Redeploying a stopped Application Server Terminating a specific Application Server Restarting a specific Application Server Removing an Application Server Adding unmanaged deployments Starting a specific Application Server The start operation starts the Application Server and automatically deploys it. if it has not been deployed. from the Configuration menu. 2 Expand the Application Servers node. 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. 3 Right-click the Application Server and select Start. select Infrastructure Management. Stopping a specific Application Server The stop operation ends running jobs and stops the Application Server. NOTE You cannot use the stop operation on an Application Server to which a BMC BladeLogic Console is connected.Managing multiple Application Servers on the same host Managing multiple Application Servers on the same host When there are multiple Application Servers configured on the same host.

select the method for handling any running jobs: ■ ■ ■ Stop immediately without waiting for running jobs to finish. 4 On the Stop Application Server dialog. Stop when all running jobs finish. select Infrastructure Management. or ALL (a combination of all three types). 5 Click OK. select Infrastructure Management. For example. 2 Expand the Application Servers node. 3 Right-click the Application Server and select Redeploy. 4 On the Redeploy Application Server dialog. from the Configuration menu. see “Application Server types” on page 96. For information on each type. Application Server Type: select the profile type for this Application Server: ■ CONFIGURATION. NOTE This action is only available for stopped Application Servers. enter the following ■ Base port: enter a new base port.Redeploying a stopped Application Server 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. from the Configuration menu. base_port is a number that is combined with offset values to determine Authentication and Application Server port numbers. Redeploying a stopped Application Server You can select a stopped Application Server and then redeploy it with a different profile type. If the base_port is 9500. whichever comes first. 110 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 2 Expand the Application Servers node. JOB. the offset for the authentication port is 40 by default. the authentication port would be 9540. NSH_PROXY. 3 Right-click the Application Server and select Stop. Stop when all running jobs finish OR after specified number of minutes.

This option automatically migrates any customizations from the existing deployment to the new deployment. for example. Use this operation to have configuration changes take effect. select Infrastructure Management. Terminating a specific Application Server The terminate operation terminates the Application Server process immediately. those options are ignored. from the Configuration menu. Restarting a specific Application Server The Restart operation first stops the Application Server and then starts it again. You cannot enter a new Application Server name. In the case where there are options in the customized deployment that do not exist in the new deployment type. when the Application Server is hung. 3 Right-click the Application Server and select Terminate.Terminating a specific Application Server ■ Preserve Existing Data: Check this box if you want to preserve deployment data from the existing deployment. NOTE You cannot use the restart operation on an Application Server to which BMC BladeLogic Console is connected. 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. NOTE You cannot use the terminate operation on an Application Server to which BMC BladeLogic Console is connected. This selection is useful in cases where Stop does not work. 5 Click OK to validate the information you entered and execute the action on the Application Server launcher. 2 Expand the Application Servers node. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 111 .

If you create a new Application Server with the same name. specify options for handling the Application Server’s deployment directory and the database registration. 3 Right-click the Application Server and select Restart. 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. Delete deployment Preserve server registration Delete server registration 5 Click OK. Removes the Application Server but does not delete the database entry for the Application Server. such as when a system has been decommissioned or repurposed. it uses this deployment directory. 2 Expand the Application Servers node. The Application Server is removed from the Application Server Launcher. Option Preserve deployment Description Removes the Application Server but leaves its deployment directory unchanged. In addition. select Infrastructure Management. deletes its database entry. This selection ensures that the Application Server can still be referenced from routing rules. 4 In the Remove Application Server dialog. This operation can be useful in situations where an Application Server is “missing” and no longer in use. Removes the Application Server and deletes its deployment directory. from the Configuration menu. In effect. the Application Server still appears under the Application Server Launchers node Removes the Application Server. this selection removes the Application Server from the BMC BladeLogic environment.Removing an Application Server 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. from the Configuration menu. select Infrastructure Management. 112 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 2 Expand the Application Servers node. Removing an Application Server The remove operation removes an Application Server from the Application Server Launcher so the Application Server does not automatically restart when the Application Server Launcher starts. and removes references to the Application Server from routing rules. 3 Right-click the Application Server and select Remove.

4 Under Available Roles. select one or more roles. 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. Editing the list of roles with Application Server Launcher access At BMC BladeLogic installation time. select Infrastructure Management. Then click the right arrow to move the role to the Selected Roles list. Users with this role can use the Edit Application Server Launcher Roles dialog to grant or deny authorization to other roles. 1 Right-click an Application Server Launcher node and select Add Unmanaged Deployments. 2 Expand the Application Server Launchers node. 3 Click OK. select one or more unmanaged deployments you want to add to the Application Server Launcher. Chapter 3 Configuring the Application Server 113 . but have had their deployments preserved (using the Preserve deployment option). you can add the deployment back into the system without having to restart the launcher. To remove roles from the selected list.Adding unmanaged deployments Adding unmanaged deployments If you have Application Servers which have been removed from the system. select one or more roles you want to have access to the Application Server Launcher. enabling you to manage these deployments as you would any other deployment in the system. NOTE The option is displayed only if there are unmanaged deployments for this Application Server Launcher. under Selected Roles. from the Configuration menu. only the BLAdmins role is granted authorization to access to the Application Server Launcher. The Application Server Launcher added the deployments you selected as managed Server Profiles. Then click the left arrow. 3 Right-click the Application Server Launcher and select Edit Role List. 2 On the Add Unmanaged Deployments dialog.

commit. See “Using the application server configuration wizard to change configuration settings” on page 39. 1 Execute the following command to set the passwords to a blank value. delete from system_property where name = 'tpasswd. update bluser set password = ''. 2 Run the application server configuration wizard and set the new password on the Database page of the wizard.Resetting database passwords for the Application Server 5 When you have finished editing the list.conf_created_on'. use this procedure to update the password on the Application Server. Resetting database passwords for the Application Server In the event that the database user password has been changed. click OK. 114 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .

depending on which system components are communicating. Chapter 4 Administering security 115 .Chapter 4 4 Administering security This chapter describes the approaches to security that are possible with BMC BladeLogic. The following graphic illustrates the various communication legs possible within a BMC BladeLogic system. including a discussion of some fundamental security concepts (see “Fundamentals of BMC BladeLogic security” on page 117). In BMC BladeLogic. the approaches to security vary.

116 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .See “Security for different communication legs” on page 130 for a discussion of the security approaches that are possible with each leg and references to any implementation procedures required. “Security Glossary”. A discussion of network security requires many technical terms. This chapter includes links to specialized terms that are defined in the Chapter 9.

BMC BladeLogic employs a twostep process. Network Shell. BMC BladeLogic client applications can cache SSO session credentials obtained from the Authentication Service. If the user’s session credential is cached and the credential has not expired. Often that entity is a user. Chapter 4 Administering security 117 . For example. BMC BladeLogic offers the following capabilities: ■ ■ ■ ■ Authentication Session layer security Impersonation and privilege mapping Authorization Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying the identity claimed by a system entity. a user can launch the BMC BladeLogic Console and authenticate.509 certificates. In this way a user’s context can easily be passed between BMC BladeLogic client applications. see “Single sign-on” on page 121. For communication between most client tier applications (the BMC BladeLogic Console. when an Application Server establishes an authenticated connection with an agent. On the other hand. For any entity that communicates directly with agents—including Network Shell clients that access agents without going through a Network Shell Proxy Server— authentication relies on the TLS protocol’s support for client authentication via clientside X. Written into the session credential are service URLs. allowing client users to re-establish new application sessions without re-authenticating. when a user starts the BMC BladeLogic Console. but in some situations the entity is a service. he or she must authenticate with the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service (one of the services hosted by a BMC BladeLogic Application Server) prior to establishing a client/server session. or BLCLI) and middle tier applications (Application Server or Network Shell Proxy Server). the identity to be verified is the server hosting the Application Service. depending on the communication leg.Fundamentals of BMC BladeLogic security Fundamentals of BMC BladeLogic security To implement a secure data center automation system. the user can then exit the console and start a BLCLI session without authenticating again. Then the client uses that session credential to establish an application session with middle tier services. For more information on single sign-on. First. BMC BladeLogic uses different approaches for authentication. client users authenticate with the Authentication Service and acquire a BMC BladeLogic single sign-on (SSO) session credential. which are the identities and addresses of the Application Services and Network Shell Proxy Services that can be accessed using the session credential. For example.

In the course of the TLS handshake. Application. (Optionally. The client cannot recognize the certificate as trusted so the client prompts the user to accept or reject the self-signed certificate. At installation. see “Securing communication with CA certificates” on page 224. When Network Shell connects to a Network Shell Proxy Server. The client application displays the certificate’s content. the certificate is added to the client’s list of trusted certificates and a secure session is established for the client. If the user chooses not to trust the self-signed certificate. this document refers only to TLS. which includes the following capabilities: ■ RSA key negotiation 128-bit AES block encryption algorithm CBC (Cipher Block Chaining) block cipher mode SHA1 HMAC construction for integrity protection. For more information. this document refers to that state as Network Shell operating in proxy mode.509 certificates. BMC BladeLogic system components employ TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA for the TLS cipher suite. you can provision middle tier entities with certificates issued by a CA. For the sake of simplicity. the Authentication. the client must validate a certificate from that entity.509 certificate. the session is terminated. If the user chooses to trust the self-signed certificate. the Authentication Service) to authenticate and obtain an SSO credential. the client establishes a TLS connection with the Application Server hosting the Authentication Service. ■ Session layer security BMC BladeLogic uses TLS for session layer security across all communications legs. In all contexts (excluding BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation).Session layer security NOTE Be aware of the following documentation conventions: ■ BMC BladeLogic supports both TLS and its predecessor. the client is presented with the Application Server’s self-signed X. ■ ■ ■ The BMC BladeLogic Application Server and all client applications use FIPS 140-2 certified modules for cryptographic operations on all transported data. 118 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Communication with middle tier When a BMC BladeLogic client establishes a TLS connection with a middle tier entity (that is. middle tier entities are provisioned with self-signed X. SSL. as well as its SHA1 and SHA256 fingerprints. or Network Shell Proxy Services).) When a client first accesses a middle tier entity (by necessity.

Network Shell Proxy Server.Impersonation and privilege mapping All client services running on a BMC BladeLogic Application Server (Authentication Service. repeaters. The certificate is stored in a file called certificate.pem in the directory where the agent is installed. (For details on this process. but you can modify that location. or Network Shell clients. they too share the same certificate. Network Shell Proxy Servers. as described in “Setting override locations for client SSO files” on page 150. user. When a client—that is an Application Server. BMC BladeLogic generates self-signed certificates when an agent is installed on a server.) If entries in the configuration files map the client user to a local user. If your installation employs multiple Application Servers or stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Servers. Client applications re-write the keystore file when a trusted X. This file is known as a keystore. and users. To accomplish this. or Network Shell client—contacts an RSCD agent on a remote server. it is read every time an Application Server. the user is no longer prompted to trust that certificate when establishing future sessions with any of these other related entities. you can choose to use self-signed client-side certificates for TLS sessions with RSCD agents. If this file is present. repeater.509 certificate is added to or removed from the trusted certificate store. In this way BMC BladeLogic takes advantage of the access control mechanisms provided by the remote server’s operating system. The keystore resides in a default location. you must provision agents with the SHA1 fingerprints of trusted clients’ self-signed certificates. Chapter 4 Administering security 119 . Application Service. BMC BladeLogic does not use client-side certificates. Network Shell Proxy Server. By default. These entities could be Application Servers. the agent creates one. By default. the agent temporarily acquires the privileges that the managed server’s operating system grants to this local user.local configuration files can specify the local user context under which the client’s commands should execute. Self-signed server-side certificates are used to secure the exchange of TLS session keys between agents and entities that communicate with agents. settings in the exports. and Network Shell Proxy Service) share the same certificate. Communication with server tier Self-signed certificates are used to secure communication between entities that communicate directly with agents. A client’s list of trusted certificates are stored in a file written in the Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. If this file is not present. see “How BMC BladeLogic grants access to RSCD agents” on page 237. or Network Shell client establishes a connection with the agent. However. Impersonation and privilege mapping Impersonation (on UNIX) and privilege mapping (on Windows) allow a user to assume an effective user identity and a set of user permissions on remote servers. Once a client application has added the Authentication Service’s certificate to its list of trusted certificates.

BMC BladeLogic supports authorization via a role-based access control (RBAC) model and a set of very granular access control lists (ACLs). For more on RBAC and authorization in BMC BladeLogic. (Network Shell users communicating directly with agents do not assume any particular role. If user equivalency is not possible (that is.Authorization If the managed server is a UNIX-style system. or ps on certain directories within a group of servers. and those ACLs can grant a range of authorizations to users. which allows the agent to temporarily grant the local user’s group privileges to an unprivileged user account called BladeLogicRSCD. the user is assigned that user’s permissions in the same manner as if there was explicit mapping—that is. see Chapter 5. a Network Shell user with a junior admin role can be permitted to perform read-only Network Shell commands such as ls. the agent fully impersonates a user through a call to the setuid command. If the managed server is a Windows machine.) For example. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. On Windows systems the agent performs user privilege mapping. For example. Every system object that you manage with the BMC BladeLogic Console has ACLs defined for it. If there is no user mapping defined in the exports. but that same junior administrator cannot make any changes on those servers. users are mapped to an underprivileged account (nobody on UNIX or Anonymous on Windows).” Authorization Authorization refers to the process of giving someone access to resources or permissions to perform certain actions. BMC BladeLogic uses a technique called user privilege mapping. the BMC BladeLogic Console can allow users with an expert role to create component templates and other users with a junior admin role to check for compliance with these templates. the user will take on the privileges and permissions of the user “joe” on the target server. This privilege mapping mechanism allows the agent to acquire the mapped local user’s group privileges without having to access that user’s Windows credentials (user name and password). If there is a match. on UNIX systems the agent fully impersonates the user through setuid. For more on impersonation and privilege mapping. Or. joe does not exist on the target server as a user). 120 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . if a user authenticates as “joe” and then begins to use Network Shell. or users. “Setting up configuration files.local configuration files. You can also define authorizations for Network Shell users if they are configured to communicate through a Network Shell Proxy Server. grep. user. the system attempts to match the user ID of the incoming user to a user ID defined on the managed server where the RSCD agent is installed.

Single sign-on Single sign-on BMC BladeLogic employs a two-stage procedure for authenticating client application users to their respective middle-tier servers. The two client command line applications (BLCLI and Network Shell) do not. which validates the credential and uses it to establish the identity of the client user. BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation is a web-based application that uses BMC BladeLogic single sign-on functionality in a different manner than other BMC BladeLogic applications. First. All BMC BladeLogic client applications except BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation can share the same session credential. Single sign-on functionality supports the following authentication mechanisms: SRP LDAP RSA SecurID PKI Active Directory/Kerberos Domain Authentication Chapter 4 Administering security 121 . The session credential cache file can only hold one session credential. The reports server uses these credentials to authenticate to the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. BMC BladeLogic provides a command linebased user authentication utility called blcred. To connect to a middle tier server. If a client application's credential cache contains an unexpired session credential. the command line applications require access to a session credential that was acquired previously. The BMC BladeLogic Console has user authentication utilities built into it. having acquired a credential. Then. Once the TLS session is established. that credential can be used to establish a new client/server session without requiring the user to re-authenticate. the client presents its SSO session credential to the service. BMC BladeLogic Console users can choose whether to cache newly acquired session credentials in a cache file. the client application establishes a TLS session with a middle tier service—either an Application Service or Network Shell Proxy Service. client users authenticate with a BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service (one of the services hosted by a BMC BladeLogic Application Server) and acquire an SSO session credential. SSO session credentials have a finite lifetime and can be cached in the file system of the client host. A reports user logs in by providing the user credentials required for his or her authentication type. Readers familiar with HTTP cookies may view SSO session credentials as analogous to cookies used to communicate an authenticated identity to a BMC BladeLogic service. Users can authenticate with blcred and acquire session credential for the command line applications. This constraint will be relaxed in a future release.

When a BMC BladeLogic client-tier user logs in and provides an LDAP “distinguished name” and password. This type of protocol allows a client-tier user to prove to an Authentication Service that he or she has knowledge of a password without ever revealing that password to the middle-tier service. The Authentication Service authenticates users by contacting the first available LDAP server in the list. To take advantage of automatic failover. 122 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . After successfully authenticating the SRP user. At that point a BMC BladeLogic client application can use the session credential to establish a secure authenticated session with the Application Service or a Network Shell Proxy Service identified by the service URLs in the session credential. tree-like structure. Information in the user table is derived from the RBAC utility in the BMC BladeLogic Console. the Authentication Service issues the client a session credential. that registry is a user table in the central Application Server’s database. For SRP.SRP SRP The secure remote password (SRP) protocol is a non-disclosing authentication protocol (also characterized as a zero-knowledge protocol). If the LDAP server successfully authenticates the user. allowing password-based mutual authentication of a client and server. LDAP BMC BladeLogic authentication can be based on Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP). users can set up a list of multiple LDAP servers that provide the same directories of user information. a protocol for querying and modifying directory entries that are arranged in a hierarchical. At that point a BMC BladeLogic client application can use the session credential to establish an authenticated secure session with the Application Service or Network Shell Proxy Service identified by the service URLs in the session credential. Client-tier users are correlated to identities maintained in directories on external LDAP servers. the Authentication Service issues the client a session credential. the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service connects to an LDAP server to authenticate the user. In BMC BladeLogic. the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service authenticates client-tier users against a registry of authorized users. Non-disclosing authentication protocols protect against man-in-the-middle attacks.

At that point a BMC BladeLogic client application can use the session credential to establish a secure authenticated session with the Application Service or Network Shell Proxy Service identified by the service URLs in the session credential. After successfully Chapter 4 Administering security 123 .RSA SecurID RSA SecurID BMC BladeLogic authentication can incorporate RSA’s Authentication Manager to utilize its two factor authentication mechanism. SecurID users authenticate by providing a user name and a passcode. Client-tier users in BMC BladeLogic are correlated to identities maintained within RSA’s Authentication Manager rather than the central Application Server’s RBAC-based database. When an Active Directory domain user chooses to authenticate using AD/Kerberos. Through middleware. a BMC BladeLogic client can access the appropriate certificate and private key on the smart card to authenticate the user. If authentication is successful. PKI BMC BladeLogic authentication can be based public key infrastructure (PKI) for users who present a type of smart card known as a common access card (CAC). which is obtained from an RSA SecurID token. While logging into a BMC BladeLogic client. Kerberos mediates an authentication exchange between the client (the BMC BladeLogic Console or the blcred utility) and the domain controller as well as between the client and the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. Active Directory/Kerberos Active Directory/Kerberos (AD/Kerberos) authentication integrates BMC BladeLogic with a key distribution center (KDC) to utilize the Kerberos v5 protocol for authenticating client-tier users. The passcode consists of a PIN and the current token code. At that point a BMC BladeLogic client application can use the session credential to establish a secure authenticated session with the Application Service or Network Shell Proxy Service identified by the service URLs in the session credential. If the information the user enters is valid and the OCSP Responder verifies the validity of the user’s certificate. The current status of a certificate can be verified by contacting an OCSP Responder. AD/Kerberos authentication correlates client-tier users to identities maintained within an Active Directory domain controller rather than the central Application Server’s RBAC-based database. the Authentication Service issues the client a session credential. the Authentication Service issues the client a session credential. the user must insert a smart card into a card reader and enter a PIN.

a BMC BladeLogic client application can use that session credential to establish an authenticated secure session with the Application Server or a Network Shell Proxy Service identified by the service URLs in the session credential. the Authentication Service issues the client a session credential. Authentication profiles To facilitate single sign-on. domain. Domain Authentication The Domain Authentication solution integrates BMC BladeLogic with Active Directory without requiring users to obtain a Kerberos ticket—that is. the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service issues the BMC BladeLogic client an SSO session credential.Domain Authentication authenticating the domain user. The BMC BladeLogic client application can then use the session credential to establish an authenticated secure session with the Application Server or a Network Shell Proxy Service identified by the service URLs in the session credential. This information is passed to the Authentication Service. At that point. Domain Authentication provides greater flexibility than AD/Kerberos. a Windows user credential. BMC BladeLogic clients (the BMC BladeLogic Console or the blcred utility) accept a user’s name. and password (see Domain Authentication).COM and then log into BMC BladeLogic as Administrator@DOMAIN. For example. it can authenticate AD/Kerberos users who provide a user name. An authentication profile identifies the following: 124 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .COM. Although BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation does not support AD/Kerberos authentication. BMC BladeLogic clients use authentication profiles. If the domain controller successfully authenticates the user. AD/Kerberos takes advantage of the Windows single-sign on functionality. which are collections of information that a BMC BladeLogic client application needs to log into the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. A user logging into the BMC BladeLogic Application Server can authenticate with a different user name than the user name used to log into the Windows system hosting the BMC BladeLogic client application. and password. In Domain Authentication. which delegates user authentication to the Active Directory domain controller. A user logging into the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service authenticates with the same user credential he or she acquires when the logging into the Windows domain. domain. a user can log into Windows as Sally@DOMAIN.

For BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation. and an authentication mechanism. ■ ■ ■ A user can define multiple authentication profiles. the port used to access the Authentication Service. LDAP. If the client application does not possess an appropriate session credential. Each reports server always accesses the same Authentication Service. Chapter 4 Administering security 125 . If a user wants to connect to all three from the same client application. the BMC BladeLogic Console prompts the user to log into the Authentication Service identified by the specified authentication profile. PKI. he or she would need an authentication profile for each mechanism. establishment of the client/server session is aborted if the session credential cache does not contain a session credential matching the requirements specified in the authentication profile. each pointing to a different instance of BMC BladeLogic. an organization might employ three instances of BMC BladeLogic—one for Operations. he or she would need three different authentication profiles. so a user does not have to specify an Application Server or listening port. users simply specify an authentication type. AD/Kerberos. Each authentication profile specifies an Application Server hosting an Authentication Service.Authentication profiles ■ Application Server host name Listening port for the Authentication Service hosted by the Application Server Authentication protocol: SRP. if a user plans to log into the Application Server using various authentication mechanisms. If a cached session credential includes information matching these specifications. In another example. In Network Shell or BLCLI. Using authentication profiles When a user launches a BMC BladeLogic client application (except BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation). the client application establishes a connection to the service listed in the session credential. he or she must specify an authentication profile. when logging on. The client application looks in its cache of session credentials to determine if it holds a current credential that was acquired under the conditions defined by the authentication profile. users do not define authentication profiles. The BLCLI or Network Shell user can use the BMC BladeLogic Console or the blcred utility to obtain and cache the appropriate SSO session credential. or Domain Authentication Information specific to individual authentication protocols. For example. SecurID. one for QA. and one for Development. Instead. such as the distinguished name template for LDAP.

Mechanisms to Identify Authentication Profile environment variable: BL_AUTH_PROFILE_NAME secure file setting: auth_profile BLCLI command line option: -v authenticationProfileName environment variable: BL_AUTH_PROFILE_NAME Takes precedence over environment variable Application Network Shell (in proxy mode) Precedence Takes precedence over secure file setting BMC BladeLogic Console login dialog For more information on setting up authentication profiles for the BMC BladeLogic Console. Single sign-on session credentials When an Authentication Service authenticates a user. For more information on using environment variables. it issues a session credential to the client application. The blcred utility also can be used to add or delete authentication profiles. The BMC BladeLogic Console lets users choose to cache session credentials. BMC BladeLogic clients use session credentials to establish secure sessions with Application Servers and Network Shell Proxy Servers. The BMC BladeLogic command line applications provide various options for identifying an authentication profile by name. Note that BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation does not require authentication profiles so it is not listed in the table below. A session credential contains the following information: ■ BMC BladeLogic user name 126 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .Single sign-on session credentials The BMC BladeLogic Console provides a dialog that allows users to add or delete authentication profiles as well as select an authentication profile for the purpose of logging in. The blcred utility always caches any session credential it obtains from the Authentication Service. see “Environment variables” on page 129. The following table summarizes these options. as described in “Setting override locations for client SSO files” on page 150. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. For more information on using blcred. see “Using the blcred utility” on page 226. but you can modify that location. The XML file resides at a default location. Authentication profiles are stored in a single XML file. Within that file each authentication profile must have a unique name.

BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation can automatically renew the user’s session credential without requiring the user to re-authenticate. upon being presented with a session credential. Expiration time for session credential Maximum lifetime for session credential Client system’s IP address Authorized roles for user Service URLs of BMC BladeLogic services that the credential can be used to access. BMC BladeLogic relies on system access controls to restrict access to the session credential cache. such as Application Services and Network Shell Proxy Services. This allows users to schedule recurring report jobs. which identifies the Authentication Service that issued the session credential. AD/Kerberos. A BMC BladeLogic service.Single sign-on session credentials ■ Protocol used to authenticate user: SRP. and its port. Chapter 4 Administering security 127 . the credential cache can hold a maximum of one session credential at any time. its host address. Each time a user logs into the reports server from a browser. On both Windows and UNIX. but you can modify that location. the reports server does not cache the session credential on the client’s system. This restriction will be relaxed in a future release. its host address. SSO session credentials are cached in a file on the client host. SecurID. The session credential cache file resides at a default location. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Session credentials are digitally signed by the issuing Authentication Service. verifies the digital signature to ensure the credential’s authenticity and integrity. LDAP. File system access controls only allow the user for whom the credential was issued to access the credential cache Unlike other BMC BladeLogic system components. Each of these URLs specifies the type of service. The reports server relays this information to the Authentication Service and obtains a session credential for the user. as described in “Setting override locations for client SSO files” on page 150. or Domain Authentication Service URL. and its port. The reports server can potentially hold the user’s session credential even after the user’s connection with the reports server terminates. the user provides data required for authentication.

BMC BladeLogic command line applications can specify a role using a command line option or an environment variable. if multiple roles are defined interactive prompts from command line dialog command line option: -r roleName environment variable: BL_RBAC_ROLE Network Shell (in proxy mode) interactive prompts from command line dialog environment variable: BL_RBAC_ROLE Takes precedence over environment variable 128 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . If a user is authorized for multiple roles. the user can interactively select a role while logging into a BMC BladeLogic client application. Application BMC BladeLogic Console BLCLI Mechanisms to Specify a Role Precedence GUI dialog. RBAC role selection When a session is established. keytab files are useful when running unattended automation scripts that make use of Network Shell proxy services or make calls to the BLCLI. The following table summarizes the options available to specifying a role. Note that BMC BladeLogic also employs a keytab file for its AD/Kerberos implementation. The SRP keytab file is called user_info. In this release. the role may be specified through an environment variable. For instructions on setting up user_info. Procedures for the AD/Kerberos implementation explain the use of a keytab file in that context. access to keytab files should be tightly controlled. for single sign-on.dat. Because of their sensitive nature. see “Generating a user information file” on page 230. When a user is authorized for multiple roles.dat.Keytab files Keytab files If you are using SRP authentication. Keytab files provide the blcred utility with long-term user credentials that can be used to authenticate a user. If a user is authorized for only one role. When using Network Shell or BLCLI. he or she is assigned to that role after logging into an application. BMC BladeLogic only supports a keytab file for SRP authentication. Network Shell also provides a command called chrole. a user must be assigned to an RBAC role. which lets you change roles after a Network Shell session is established.

To set an environment variable. The command line options take precedence over environment variable settings.Environment variables Environment variables BMC BladeLogic provides environment variables that can be used to pass configuration data to the command line client applications (BLCLI and Network Shell) and the blcred utility. BLCLI and blcred also provide command line options for providing the same data. use a procedure like the following: % BL_SSO_CRED_CACHE_FILE=userHomeDirectory\bladelogic_alt\bl_sesscc % export BL_SSO_CRED_CACHE_FILE The following table details the environment variables that can be used with single sign-on functionality. Environment Variable BL_SSO_TRUSTED_CERT_ KEYSTORE_FILE BL_RBAC_ROLE Description Specifies location of file storing trusted certificates Specifies RBAC role For More Information: “Trusted keystore” on page 151 “RBAC role selection” on page 128 BL_SSO_CRED_CACHE_FILE Specifies location of session “Session credential cache file” credential cache file on page 151 BL_AUTH_PROFILES_FILE Provides location of file containing authentication profile definitions Identifies authentication profile to use when authenticating “Authentication profile file” on page 151 “Using authentication profiles” on page 125 BL_AUTH_PROFILE_NAME Chapter 4 Administering security 129 .

The BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service supports many authentication mechanisms. see “Implementing single sign-on” on page 135. The following sections describe security for the following communication legs in BMC BladeLogic: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ BMC BladeLogic Console to Application Server BLCLI to Application Server Network Shell to Network Shell Proxy Server Reports client to reports server Application Server to agent or repeater Network Shell to agent Repeater to agent BMC BladeLogic Console to Application Server For traffic between the BMC BladeLogic Console and an Application Server. Additional configuration is necessary if you want to customize the default behavior or use other authentication protocols. BLCLI to Application Server For traffic between BLCLI and an Application Server. and authorization—are consistent throughout BMC BladeLogic. Implementation A default BMC BladeLogic installation sets up a single sign-on system using SRP authentication and TLS session layer security. BMC BladeLogic relies on TLS to secure communication between client and server and single sign-on credentials to authenticate client users. For implementation details. SRP is the default user authentication mechanism. Client users obtain single sign-on credentials by authenticating themselves to the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. 130 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . authentication can be configured differently for the various communication legs. privilege mapping. BMC BladeLogic relies on TLS to secure communication between client and server and single sign-on credentials to authenticate client users.Security for different communication legs Security for different communication legs Although some aspects of security—session layer security.

to authenticate themselves to an Authentication Service and acquire a SSO session credential. BLCLI users can use a separate user authentication command line utility. blcred. Additional configuration is necessary if you want to customize the default behavior or use other authentication protocols. blcred. The BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service supports many user authentication mechanisms. Users can acquire and cache a SSO session credential through the BMC BladeLogic Console.Network Shell to Network Shell Proxy Server BLCLI users obtain single sign-on credentials by authenticating themselves to the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. SRP is the default user authentication mechanism. implement any authentication mechanism other than SRP. see “Implementing single sign-on” on page 135. SRP is the default user authentication mechanism. to authenticate themselves to an Authentication Service and acquire a SSO session credential. For information on using the blcred utility to obtain session credentials. For implementation details. Network Shell can use that credential. Additional configuration is necessary to set up a Network Shell Proxy Service. or customize SSO behavior. Network Shell does not have a built-in authentication utility. ■ Network Shell to Network Shell Proxy Server For traffic between a Network Shell client and a Network Shell Proxy Server. BMC BladeLogic relies on TLS to secure communication between client and server and single sign-on credentials to authenticate client users. see “Using the blcred utility” on page 226. Alternatively. Implementation ■ A default BMC BladeLogic installation sets up a single sign-on system using SRP authentication and TLS session layer security. The BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service supports many user authentication mechanisms. Network Shell users obtain single sign-on credentials by authenticating themselves to the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. Chapter 4 Administering security 131 . For implementation details. Network Shell users can use a separate user authentication command line utility. Implementation ■ A default BMC BladeLogic installation sets up a single sign-on system using SRP authentication and TLS session layer security. The BLCLI does not have a built-in authentication utility. Users can acquire and cache a SSO session credential through the BMC BladeLogic Console and the BLCLI can use that credential. Alternatively. see “Implementing single sign-on” on page 135.

domain. Once a user on the reports client is authenticated. Reports client to reports server A BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation client is a web browser that connects to the reports server. By default the reports server uses a self-signed certificate. BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation data is packaged using Cognos Reports. BMC BladeLogic relies on the HTTPS protocol (HTTP over TLS) to secure communication between the browser and reports server. but you can replace it with a custom certificate. see “Using the blcred utility” on page 226. they are granted session credentials. Organizations that want Kerberos-based authentication for BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation can use the Domain Authentication protocol. you can use a tool such as OpenSSL. Implementation A default installation of BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation sets up a BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service called BMC SARA Authentication. Server-side certificates The TLS communication protocol automatically negotiates an encryption algorithm to secure data. By default 132 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .Reports client to reports server ■ For information on using the blcred utility to obtain session credentials. Users authenticate themselves to the reports server over the HTTPS session. Server-side certificates are used during the TLS handshake to establish session keys for encrypting traffic between the web browser and the reports server. Authentication For BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation. For traffic between the reports client and the reports server. BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation supports all BMC BladeLogic authentication protocols except AD/Kerberos. user authentication functions much like authentication for other BMC BladeLogic applications. which can authenticate AD/Kerberos users when they provide their user name. The reports server accesses the BMC SARA Authentication Service to authenticate a user and acquire SSO credentials in the name of the authenticated user. After users are authenticated. the reports server obtains data for reports from the reports data warehouse. To generate a new certificate. and password.

modify the exports file on each agent or repeater. use these procedures as well. For all implementation details. ■ IP address—Limits incoming traffic for an agent or repeater to IP addresses of specific Application Servers. To accomplish this. BMC BladeLogic relies on TLS to secure communication and the following options for authenticating the Network Shell client to the agent: Chapter 4 Administering security 133 . Implementation A default installation of BMC BladeLogic provides no authentication for this communication leg. Application Server to agent or repeater For traffic between an Application Server and an agent or repeater. when an Application Server connects to an agent or repeater. no authentication occurs. see “TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Windows Application Server” on page 202 or “TLS with client-side certs – Securing a UNIXbased Application Server” on page 206. BMC BladeLogic relies on TLS to secure communication and the following options for authenticating the Application Server host to the repeater or agent: ■ Self-signed certificates—Enables agents or repeaters to authenticate Application Servers. Additional configuration is necessary if you want to use an Authentication Server that is not located on the same machine as the reports server. Network Shell to agent For traffic between a Network Shell client and an agent.Application Server to agent or repeater only SRP authentication is enabled on the BMC SARA Authentication Service. ■ No authentication—By default. If you want to set up self-signed certificates for a Network Shell Proxy Server. agents and repeaters are provisioned with the SHA1 fingerprints of the Application Servers’ self-signed certificates. see the BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation User Guide. see “Exports file” on page 240. For more information. Implementation For implementation details. The procedure is identical. Implementation To implement this approach.

■ IP address—Limits an agent’s incoming traffic to IP addresses of specific Network Shell clients. see “Exports file” on page 240. Implementation For implementation details. BMC BladeLogic relies on TLS to secure communication and the following options for authenticating the repeater host to the agent: ■ Self signed. this configuration relies on the host operating system of the Network Shell client to authenticate a user. Repeater to agent For traffic between a repeater and an agent. ■ No authentication—By default. when a Network Shell client connects to an agent. Application Servers can also be specified in the same way. 134 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .Repeater to agent ■ Self-signed. Implementation For implementation details. see “TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Network Shell client” on page 212. For more information. agents are provisioned with SHA1 fingerprints of repeaters’ selfsigned certificates. Instead. Implementation A default installation of BMC BladeLogic provides no authentication.) Implementation To implement this approach. no authentication occurs other than the authentication provided by the underlying operating system of the host where Network Shell is running when a Network Shell user logs in. modify the exports file on each agent. (If necessary. To accomplish this. agents are provisioned with SHA1 fingerprints of Network Shell clients’ self-signed certificates. client-side certs—Enables agents to authenticate repeaters. To accomplish this. see “Implementing Security – Repeater to agent” on page 217. client-side certs—Enables agents to authenticate Network Shell clients.

Application Servers and specific clients can be specified in the same way. (If necessary. After a client user authenticates. Chapter 4 Administering security 135 ■ ■ . All communication with the Application Service occurs over TLS. A standard installation of the Application Server sets up the Application Service. see “Exports file” on page 240. no authentication occurs. A client application (the BMC BladeLogic Console or the BLCLI) presents the session credential to the Application Service to establish a secure session with one of the targeted services listed within the session credential. For more information. when a repeater connects to an agent. A Network Shell client presents the session credential to the Network Shell Proxy Service to establish a secure session with the Network Shell Proxy Server. the client application is issued a session credential. After a client user authenticates.) Implementation To implement this approach. A standard installation of BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation sets up a stand-alone Authentication Server for reports users. Network Shell Proxy Service—Used for accessing the functionality of a Network Shell Proxy Server. Implementing single sign-on To implement the BMC BladeLogic single sign-on system. A standard installation of the Application Server includes an Authentication Service. SRP authentication is supported by default for all BMC BladeLogic applications. ■ No authentication—By default. modify the exports file on each agent. Implementation A default installation of BMC BladeLogic provides no authentication for this communication leg. Some configuration is necessary to set up a Network Shell Proxy Service. you need the following services: ■ Authentication Service—Used for authenticating user identities and issuing session credentials to authenticated users. All communication with the Network Shell Proxy Service occurs over TLS. the client application is issued a session credential. All communication with the Authentication Service occurs over TLS.Implementing single sign-on ■ IP address—Limits an agent’s incoming traffic to IP addresses of specific repeaters. Application Service—Used for accessing the functionality of the BMC BladeLogic Application Server. all requests from the BMC BladeLogic Console or the blcred utility. The Authentication Service processes all user authentication requests—that is.

see “Setting up certificate verification using OCSP” on page 153. A default installation of a BMC BladeLogic Application Server sets up an Application Service to support single sign-on. see “Setting override locations for client SSO files” on page 150. A default installation of a BMC BladeLogic Application Server sets up an Authentication Service to support single sign-on for BMC BladeLogic client applications. 5 If you want to set up OCSP verification of certificates. The files used by the SSO system reside at default locations. 3 If you want to use a Network Shell Proxy Server. You can optionally use OCSP verification for Application Servers provisioned with custom certificates. OCSP verification is only enabled by default for PKI authentication. 2 If you want to modify the default behavior of the Application Service. 1 If you want to modify the default behavior of an Authentication Service. you can instruct a client application to use different files. 6 If you want the SSO system to support any authentication protocol other than SRP. Each of the steps in this procedure references a section that describes another procedure. 4 If you want to modify the location of any SSO files used by any BMC BladeLogic client application. see “Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service” on page 142.Implementing single sign-on Use the following master procedure to implement the single sign-on system. Currently. see “Configuring the Application Service” on page 140. see “Configuring the Authentication Service” on page 137. see any of the following: Implementing LDAP authentication Implementing RSA SecurID authentication Implementing PKI authentication Implementing Active Directory/Kerberos authentication Implementing Domain Authentication 136 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . If necessary.

1 Start the Application Server Administration console (that is. Use the following procedure to set any of those options. enter the following: set AuthServer IsLdapAuthEnabled true|false By default. 3 To specify the duration of session credentials that the Authentication Service issues. ■ To enable or disable LDAP authentication. Setting AuthSvcPort to 0 turns off the Authentication Service. this value is set to false. do any of the following: ■ To enable or disable SRP authentication. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45.Configuring the Authentication Service Configuring the Authentication Service A default installation of a BMC BladeLogic Application Server sets up an Authentication Service to support single sign-on and SRP authentication. in minutes. enter the following: set AuthServer IsSRPAuthEnabled true|false By default this value is set to true. the session credential lifetime is 600 minutes (10 hours). There are various options for modifying the standard behavior of an Authentication Service. enter the following: set AuthServer IsSecurIdAuthEnabled true|false Chapter 4 Administering security 137 . enter the following: set AuthServer AuthSvcPort # where # is the number of the port. 2 To specify a listening port other than 9840 for the Authentication Service. enter the following: set AuthServer SessionCredentialLifetime # where # is the lifetime. of issued session credentials. 4 To specify the types of authentication mechanisms that are enabled. Additional configuration is necessary to support other authentication protocols. By default. The Authentication Service runs on the same machine as the Application Server. the blasadmin utility). ■ To enable or disable SecurID authentication.

it cannot process BLCLI commands used for import/export. if you want to run Network Shell Script Jobs that include BLCLI commands. this value is set to false. By default BLCLI commands run on the Application Server processing the job...com:9841 Typically. 138 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . If that Application Server is a JOB type Application Server. ■ To enable or disable PKI authentication. enter the following: set PkiAuth IsEnabled true|false By default. However. this value is set to false. enter the following: set AuthServer AppServiceURLs serviceURL. enter the following: set AuthServer IsADKAuthEnabled true|false By default.. 5 To write non-default destination service URLs into a session credential.bladelogic. bladelogic:blsess://host2. enter the following: set AuthServer IsDomainAuthEnabled true|false By default. enter the following: set AuthServer AppServiceURLs " " Note the blank space between the quotation marks.bladelogic. you do not need to change the default Application Server URL. ■ To configure the Authentication Service so it does not write any Application Service service URLs into the session credential it issues. BLCLI commands used for import or export must run on an Application Server with its type set to CONFIGURATION or ALL... this value is set to false.service:appsvc. this value is set to false.serviceURL is a list of alternative Application Service’s service URLs. For example: set AuthServer AppServiceURLs service:appsvc.. do any of the following: ■ To override the default Application Service URL.. ■ To enable or disable Domain Authentication.bladelogic: blsess://host1.Configuring the Authentication Service By default. ■ To enable or disable AD/Kerberos authentication.. you can direct these commands to run on a particular Application Server.com:9841.serviceURL where serviceURL.

com:9842 If you are setting up a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server. you must identify the URL for the stand-alone server’s Network Shell Proxy Service service URL.serviceURL is a list of alternative Network Shell Proxy Service’s service URLs.com:9842. see “Setting up a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server” on page 145. set AuthServer ProxyServiceURLs service:proxysvc. enter the following: set AuthServer ProxyServiceURLs serviceURL. ■ To configure the Authentication Service so it does not write any Network Shell Proxy Service service URLs into the session credential it issues. Chapter 4 Administering security 139 . NOTE If you provide a value for ProxyServiceURLs on an Application Server that is defined as type ALL.Configuring the Authentication Service ■ To configure the Authentication Service so it reverts to its default behavior of writing the service URL of the local Application Service into session credentials. For example.service:proxysvc. For more information on setting up a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server. ■ To configure the Authentication Service so it reverts to its default behavior of writing the service URL of the local Network Shell Proxy Service into session credentials (assuming the local proxy service is enabled).serviceURL where serviceURL.bladelogic: blsess://host1.bladelogic. bladelogic:blsess://host2. ■ To override the default Network Shell Proxy Service service URL. enter the following: set AuthServer AppServiceURLs "" Note that there is no blank space between the quotation marks. then any Network Shell commands run by jobs on this Application Server are routed to the Network Shell Proxy Servers identified by ProxyServiceURLs. enter the following: set AuthServer ProxyServiceURLs "" Note that there is no blank space between the quotation marks.bladelogic. enter the following: set AuthServer ProxyServiceURLs " " Note the blank space between the quotation marks.

the Authentication Service will. 7 To specify a time-out for responses from Authentication Service worker threads. When a session credential has no destination service URL. by default. By default. enter the following: set AuthServer MaxAuthSvcThreads # where # is the maximum number of threads that can process requests from clients.Configuring the Application Service Providing service URLs lets you specify alternative addresses (in the form of service URLs) for an Application Service or Network Shell Proxy Service. the maximum is 5. 140 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . a firewall) that requires address translations. Use the following procedure to set any of those options. 8 Restart the Application Server (see “Restarting a specific Application Server” on page 111). Once the maximum is exceeded. enter the following: set AuthServer AuthSvcSocketTimeout # where # is the maximum number of minutes to wait for a response from a worker thread. include its service URL in the session credential it issues. This is particularly useful when your installation has a network configuration (for example. 6 To specify the maximum number of worker threads used for authentication. There are various options for modifying the standard behavior of an Application Service. Configuring the Application Service A default installation of BMC BladeLogic sets up an Application Service to support single sign-on. Overriding the defaults and specifying empty service URLs results in session credentials with no destination service URLs. Typically. a client cannot use it to access an Application Service or Network Shell Proxy Service. By default the Authentication Service creates a session credential that only includes the service URL for the local Application Service. If the local Network Shell Proxy Service is enabled. the connection times out. By default the maximum is 1. no additional configuration is necessary.

4 To specify whether the service URL of the Application Service or Network Shell Proxy Service specified in a client’s service request should be compared to the actual service URL of that service. Chapter 4 Administering security 141 . and a client can access any one of many Application Servers when establishing a session connection. enter the following: set appserver ValidateClientIpAddress true|false In the command shown above: ■ true means the IP address of the client must match the client’s IP address included in the session credential. this option is set to true. enter the following: set appserver AppSvcPort # where # is the number of the port. you are not using a load balancer for the Authentication Service. Set this value to false only if you are using a network load balancer for your Application Servers or Network Shell Proxy Servers. 3 To specify whether the client’s IP address included in a session credential should be compared to the IP address of the client that is presenting the credential. By default. 2 To specify a listening port other than 9841 for the Application Service. this option is set to true.Configuring the Application Service 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. ■ false means the receiving service’s URL does not have to match the service URL to which the request is addressed. By default. the client is denied access. ■ false means the IP address of the client does not have to match the client’s IP address included in the session credential. Setting AppSvcPort to 0 turns off the Application Service. If the IP addresses do not match. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. enter the following: set appserver ValidateRequestURL true|false In the command shown above: ■ true means the service URL of the Application Service or Network Shell Proxy Service handling the request must match the service URL to which the request was addressed.

See “Setting Up a Network Shell Proxy Server” on page 142. ■ ■ This section also includes a description of how to set up Network Shell Proxy Services for Application Servers that process jobs (see “Setting up Network Shell Proxy Services for Windows user mapping” on page 149). Setting up an Application Server that serves as a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server. 5 Restart the Application Server (see “Restarting a specific Application Server” on page 111). 142 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . A default installation of a BMC BladeLogic Application Server does not set up a Network Shell Proxy Server. See “Setting up a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server” on page 145. A stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server cannot access the BMC BladeLogic database. When setting up a Network Shell Proxy Server. Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service Use this procedure to set up a Network Shell Proxy Server that manages traffic from Network Shell clients. which means it only manages Network Shell traffic and performs no other Application Server functionality. and a client can access any one of many Application Servers when establishing a session connection. you may want to reduce overall traffic loads by setting up an Application Server that functions exclusively as a Network Shell Proxy Server. a Network Shell Proxy Server can accommodate all authentication protocols that BMC BladeLogic supports. It can relieve the overall workload by processing all Network Shell traffic. This procedure is only necessary if you want to use Windows user mapping to run jobs that act on Windows target servers. Setting Up a Network Shell Proxy Server Use this procedure to configure an Application Server so that it either functions as an Application Server that also manages traffic from Network Shell clients or it only manages Network Shell traffic. See “Setting Up a Network Shell Proxy Server” on page 142. Using this configuration. If an Application Server experiences high traffic loads that include Network Shell activity. you have the following options: ■ Setting up an Application Server that performs many functions including that of Network Shell Proxy Server. Setting up an Application Server that functions exclusively as a Network Shell Proxy Server.Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service Always set this value to false if you are using a network load balancer for your Application Servers or Network Shell Proxy Servers.

specify a maximum idle time for thread processing. see “Configuring multiple Application Servers on the same host” on page 93. If a value is not set for ProxySvcPort. NSH_PROXY—The Application Server functions exclusively as a Network Shell Proxy Server.Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service 1 Start the Network Shell Proxy Server using an application server profile with its Type set so it includes one of the following: ■ ALL—The Application Server performs many functions including Network Shell Proxy Server. ■ For more information on application server profiles. 2 Start the Application Server Administration console. enter the following: set appserver MaxNshProxyThreads # where # is the maximum number of threads. modify the listening port for the Network Shell Proxy Server by entering the following: set appserver ProxySvcPort # where # is the number of the port on the Application Server that listens for Network Shell traffic. the Application Server does not run a Network Shell proxy service. 5 To adjust the performance of proxy threads processing Network Shell client connections. enter the following: set appserver NshProxyMaxThreadIdleTime # where # can be any of the following: Chapter 4 Administering security 143 . To accomplish this. Each proxy thread can accommodate multiple Network Shell client connections by switching between connections when there is no traffic on a particular connection. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. By default this value is set to 5. If this value is acceptable. However. By default the Network Shell Proxy Server listens for traffic on port equal to Base Port plus 42. 3 If necessary. 4 To specify the maximum number of threads that are available to process Network Shell client connections. using an excessive number of threads can potentially degrade the performance of a Network Shell Proxy Server. you do not have to set a value for ProxySvcPort. Increasing the maximum number of proxy threads can improve performance for Network Shell users.

144 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . -1 – Provides the fastest performance for a particular connection. A thread is always available to serve another connection after traffic ends on the current connection. By default this value is set to 0.Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service 0 – Provides the best thread switching performance. When the specified period expires. By default this value is set to 7200 seconds. Each thread is dedicated to a single connection so the thread never switches connections. By default NshProxyMaxThreadIdleTime is set to 500 ms. 8 To specify the timeout settings for NSH proxy socket reads. By default this value is set to 60 seconds. enter the following: set appserver IdleNshProxyPruneTime # where # is a value in minutes. A value greater than zero specifies a period. This value specifies the number of seconds for obtaining a NSH proxy socket connection to the Application Server. While the thread is idle it continues to serve the current connection. >0 – Provides a compromise between the two settings described above. enter the following: set appserver NshProxySocketConnectTimeout # where # is a value in seconds. the thread can switch to another connection. in milliseconds. 9 Restart the Application Server (see “Restarting a specific Application Server” on page 111). the connection is automatically closed. 6 To specify the maximum idle time for a connection with a Network Shell client. that a thread should remain idle. the harder it is for that thread to process more than one connection. 7 To specify the timeout settings for obtaining a NSH proxy socket connection to the Application Server. which means the connection is never closed. The longer you instruct a thread to be idle. This value specifies the number of seconds for NSH proxy socket reads before the socket times out. When there is no traffic over the connection between a Network Shell client and its proxy for this period of time. enter the following: set appserver NshProxySocketOperationTimeout # where # is a value in seconds.

1 Install an Application Server on the machine where you want to create a standalone Network Shell Proxy Server. See “Setting up a Network Shell Client to run in proxy mode” on page 147. 3 On the Network Shell Proxy Server. 11 Assign the NSH_PROXY. You must repeat this step for every Network Shell client that should communicate with the Network Shell Proxy Server. To perform this procedure. NOTE You cannot use Windows user mapping to grant permissions to a user on a managed server when that user is running a Network Shell client to access a managed server through a standalone Network Shell Proxy Server. To accomplish this. a deployment of an Application Server is configured to function only as a Network Shell Proxy Server.Connect authorization to any role that should be used to connect to a Network Shell Proxy Server. On the central Application Server. blasadmin) to create a new deployment of type NSH_PROXY and configure it as a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server. use the Application Server Administration console (that is. search for all instances of bladelogic. 2 Copy the bladelogic.keystore.Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service 10 Set up a client for Network Shell users. Using the copied bladelogic.keystore file from the central Application Server. such as the _template and _launcher directories. perform the following steps: A Start blasadmin for the _template deployment by entering the following: blasadmin -s _template Chapter 4 Administering security 145 .keystore that may exist within installDirectory/br/deployments or any of its subdirectories. Setting up a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server Use this procedure to configure a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server. provide the same password for the Application Server’s certificate that you entered when installing the central Application Server. you must create a Network Shell Proxy Server deployment using the blasadmin utility.keystore at installDirectory/br/deployments/_template/bladelogic. you can find bladelogic. It cannot even access the BMC BladeLogic database. replace all occurrences of bladelogic. In this configuration. A stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server can perform no other Application Server functionality. Do not run the Post-Install Configuration wizard.keystore on the Application Server where you are setting up a Network Shell Proxy Server. and you must perform some configuration on the central Application Server.keystore file. When installing. On the Network Shell Proxy Server.

right-click. you do not have to set a value for ProxySvcPort. the authentication port would be 9540. and select Edit. C Switch to the newly created deployment by entering the following: switch new_proxy D If necessary. C On the Edit Application Server Profile. If the base_port is 9500. E Indicate that the Network Shell Proxy Server should not contact the BMC BladeLogic database by entering the following command: set appserver PwdStore file 4 Start the Application Server on the machine where you are setting up a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server. B Expand Application Servers. If this value is acceptable. enter the following: 146 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . the Network Shell Proxy Server listens for traffic on a port equal to Base Port plus 42. base_port is a number that is combined with offset values to determine Authentication and Application Server port numbers. the Application Server does not run a Network Shell Proxy Service. For new deployments of an Application Server. the offset for the authentication port is 40 by default. select the central Application Server. modify the listening port for the Network Shell Proxy Server by entering the following: set appserver ProxySvcPort # where # is the number of the port on the Application Server that listens for Network Shell traffic. For example. for ProxyServiceURLs. 5 Using the BMC BladeLogic Console. See “Starting Application Servers” on page 41.Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service B Create a new default deployment of a Network Shell Proxy Server by entering the following: create new_proxy base_port NSH_PROXY new_proxy is the name of the new Network Shell Proxy Server you are creating. configure the central Application Server by doing the following: A Select Configuration => Infrastructure Management. If a value is not set for ProxySvcPort.

Primarily this procedure consists of some settings you must add to the secure file for a client installation. The value used for authProfile must match the name of an authentication profile included in that file. Note that the BL_AUTH_PROFILE_NAME environment variable can override the value of this secure file setting. if you plan to run Network Shell and BLCLI scripts unattended on this client machine. you must have the BMC BladeLogic Console installed. where authProfile is the name of the authentication profile that holds a description of the Authentication Service from which the required session credential should be issued and the authentication mechanism that was used to authenticate the user when the session credential was acquired. See “Setting up a Network Shell Client to run in proxy mode” on page 147. Additionally. 6 Restart the central Application Server (see “Restarting a specific Application Server” on page 111).Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service service:proxysvc. Chapter 4 Administering security 147 . so it can communicate with servers via a Network Shell Proxy Server. see the blcred man page. this procedure includes steps to ensure that the scripts have access to valid SSO session credentials. 8 Assign the NSH_PROXY. For a complete description of blcred.bladelogic:blsess://NSH_proxy_server_host:proxy_svc_port In this entry NSH_proxy_server_host is the host where you have set up the Network Shell Proxy Server and proxy_svc_port is the port number you defined in step D above (under step 3). You must repeat this step for every Network Shell client that communicates with the Network Shell Proxy Server. You can use the blcred utility to authenticate a user and acquire a new session credential. Setting up a Network Shell Client to run in proxy mode Use this procedure to configure a Network Shell client so it can run in proxy mode— that is.Connect authorization to any role that should be used to connect to a Network Shell Proxy Server. 1 Start Network Shell for a client installation and use the secadmin utility to create an entry in the secure file that specifies the following: ■ auth_profile=authProfile. 7 Set up a client for Network Shell users. Authentication profiles are defined in the authentication profiles file. NOTE To use the blcred utility.

you can use the BMC BladeLogic Console to generate authentication profiles on this client machine (see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide for details). 2 Assign the NSH_PROXY. You can create an authentication profile using blcred or you can create one beforehand using theBMC BladeLogic Console. See the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide for information on using the BMC BladeLogic Console to set up authentication profiles.Connect authorization to any role that should be used to connect to a Network Shell Proxy Server.xml" -appserver_protocol ssoproxy -T encryption_only -e tls For more information on the secure file. Note that the BL_AUTH_PROFILES_FILE environment variable can override the value of the auth_profiles_file setting in the secure file. do the following: A Provide an authentication profile name that can be used to generate an SSO session credential. the following is a default entry in the secure file on a client machine running Network Shell: default:protocol=5:auth_profile=QAProfile: auth_profiles_file=/c/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/ version/NSH/br/ authenticationProfiles. ■ appserver_protocol=ssoproxy For example. see “Secure file” on page 253. enter the following from Network Shell: secadmin -m default -p 5 -auth_profile QAProfile -auth_profiles_file "/c/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br /authenticationProfiles. 148 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . where fileName is the Network Shell-style path to the XML file containing authentication profile definitions. or you can copy authenticationProfiles.xml.xml from a machine where the console is installed and authentication profiles have already been created. 3 To run Network Shell and BLCLI scripts unattended from this client machine.xml: appserver_protocol=ssoproxy:tls_mode=encryption_only:encryption= tls To use the secadmin utility to generate the default entry shown above. To create the authenticationProfiles.Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service ■ auth_profiles_file=fileName. see “Using the secadmin utility” on page 258. such as /c/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/authenticationProfiles.xml file. You can provide an authentication profile name using a command line option for blcred or by defining the BL_AUTH_PROFILE_NAME environment variable. For more information on secadmin.

Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service B Provide user information required for the authentication mechanism specified in the authentication profile by doing any of the following: — Enter command line options to blcred that provide a user name. For information on setting up user_info. select Configuration => Infrastructure Management. and other information required for the authentication mechanism. This procedure is only necessary for Application Servers that handle jobs and are defined as type ALL or JOB. 1 Using the BMC BladeLogic Console.dat. and role. C If the user is authorized for multiple roles. provide a value for ProxyServiceURLs. and other information required for the authentication mechanism. The following procedure configures an Application Server so that Network Shell traffic will be routed through a Network Shell Proxy Service for any Application Server that is processing jobs. Chapter 4 Administering security 149 . make a role selection by doing one of the following: — Define the BL_RBAC_ROLE environment variable. password. — Provide a BLCLI command line option that specifies the user’s role. password. Setting up Network Shell Proxy Services for Windows user mapping If you are using automation principals to implement Windows user mapping. This procedure also requires you to modify the secure file on the Application Server. your Application Server environment must meet certain criteria.dat. — Let the Network Shell client (operating in proxy mode) and the BLCLI prompt the user to make a role selection after establishing an SSO session. or the job may not run at all. set up a keytab file called user_info. If Application Servers are not correctly configured. 2 Expand the Application Servers node. see “Generating a user information file” on page 230. 3 On the Edit Application Server Profile dialog. password. — Let the blcred utility prompt for a user name. jobs acting on target servers may not use Windows user mapping and instead may operate using user privilege mapping. Right-click the Application Server you want to modify and select Edit. which stores a user name. — For SRP authentication.

6 Restart the Application Server (see “Restarting a specific Application Server” on page 111). provide values for other Application Server attributes. portNumber is the value provided for ProxySvcPort on that Network Shell Proxy Server. The following procedures let you define override locations for SSO files for the different BMC BladeLogic client applications: ■ ■ Setting SSO file locations for BLCLI Setting SSO file locations for Network Shell 150 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . The value you provide should have the format service:proxysvc. 4 If necessary. nshProxyServerHost is the fully qualified name of the host where a Network Shell Proxy Server is running. If necessary.Setting override locations for client SSO files This value should identify a Network Shell Proxy Service running in the Application Server’s environment. see “Secure file” on page 253.bladelogic:blsess://nshProxyServerHost:portNumber In the value shown above. For more information. ProxySvcPort is set to Base Port plus 42. Setting override locations for client SSO files The BMC BladeLogic system of single sign-on stores SSO user information in the following files: Authentication profile file Session credential cache file Trusted keystore Each of these SSO files resides at a default location. see “Viewing and editing an Application Server’s profile” on page 100. For more information. 7 Configure the secure file on the Application Server so the appserver_protocol option is set to ssoproxy. 5 Click OK. By default. you can instruct a client application to use a file in a different location.

Setting override locations for client SSO files Authentication profile file Authentication profiles are collections of information that a BMC BladeLogic client application needs to log into the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. To create the authenticationProfiles. the client is presented with the Authentication Server’s self-signed X.509 certificate. BMC BladeLogic Console users can choose to cache session credentials. A standard BMC BladeLogic installation uses a default location for caching session credentials. In the course of the TLS handshake. that XML file resides at installDirectory/br/authenticationProfiles. the Authentication Service) to authenticate and obtain an SSO credential. The user is asked to trust the certificate. you can use the BMC BladeLogic Console to generate authentication profiles in their default location (see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide for details). as described below. the certificate is added to the client’s list of trusted certificates. When authenticating with the blcred utility. it issues a session credential. session credentials are automatically cached. If the user does. This list.xml file from a client machine where the console is installed and authentication profiles have already been created.xml file. the client establishes a TLS connection with that entity. All authentication profiles are stored within a single XML file. BMC BladeLogic clients use session credentials to establish secure sessions with Application Servers and Network Shell Proxy Servers. BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation does not need an authentication profile to authenticate users. Session credential cache file When an Authentication Service authenticates a user.xml. Platform Solaris Linux AIX HP-UX Windows Default Location userHomeDirectory/. which is known as a keystore.bladelogic/bl_sesscc where userHomeDirectory is the home directory of the user running the client application C:\Documents and Settings\WindowsUserName\ Application Data\BladeLogic\bl_sesscc Trusted keystore When a BMC BladeLogic client first accesses a middle tier entity (by necessity. resides in a default location. By default. as described below: Chapter 4 Administering security 151 . or you can copy the authenticationProfiles. Within that file each authentication profile must have a unique name.

For more information on setting environment variables. A location provided in a command line option takes precedence over a location provided with an environment variable. The following table identifies SSO file locations you can specify and the mechanisms available to provide that information.pem Setting SSO file locations for BLCLI To specify alternative locations for SSO files used by the BLCLI.Setting override locations for client SSO files Platform Solaris Linux AIX. see the BLCLI Help.pkcs12.509 certificates command line option: -x certificateStore environment variable: BL_SSO_TRUSTED_CERT_KE YSTORE_FILE Takes precedence over environment variable Takes precedence over environment variable SSO File SSO session credentials Precedence Takes precedence over environment variable For more information on using command line options in BLCLI. you can either provide command line arguments or define environment variables. Mechanisms to Identify Location command line option: -f credentialCacheFileName environment variable: BL_SSO_CRED_CACHE_FILE Authentication profile definitions command line option: -w authenticationProfilesFile environment variable: BL_AUTH_PROFILES_FILE Keystore for trusted X. A location provided in an environment variable takes precedence over a secure file setting. HP-UX Windows Default Location userHomeDirectory/.bladelogic/client_keystore. Setting SSO file locations for Network Shell To specify alternative locations for SSO files used by Network Shell operating in proxy mode. you can define environment variables or make settings in the client’s secure file.pkcs12. see “Environment variables” on page 129. 152 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . The following table identifies SSO file locations you can specify for BLCLI and the mechanisms available to provide that information.pem where userHomeDirectory is the home directory of the user running the client application C:\Documents and Settings\WindowsUserName\ Application Data\BladeLogic\client_keystore.

For example. Not only is OCSP checking enabled by default for PKI authentication. there is no URL for the OCSP Responder.Setting up certificate verification using OCSP SSO File SSO session credentials Authentication profile definitions Mechanisms to Identify Location environment variable: BL_SSO_CRED_CACHE_FILE environment variable: BL_AUTH_PROFILES_FILE secure file setting: auth_profiles_file Precedence Takes precedence over secure file setting Keystore for trusted X. an Authentication Server uses the information in a certificate to determine which OCSP Responder to access when verifying a certificate. For almost all situations. In response. Chapter 4 Administering security 153 ■ ■ . Setting up certificate verification using OCSP The Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) is an Internet standard used to verify the revocation status of X. You want failover capability that tries a second OCSP Responder in situations when the first OCSP Responder fails. You want to override the URL for the OCSP responder in the smart card certificate.509 certificates. this default approach is sufficient and users do not have to perform any additional configuration for OCSP checking. OCSP can determine the revocation status of customer-provisioned certificates for Application Servers (see “Securing communication with CA certificates” on page 224). it sends a message over HTTP to an OCSP Responder. Typically. When a BMC BladeLogic Authentication Server uses this type of verification. For more information on setting environment variables. If the certificate includes a valid URL for an OCSP Responder. BMC BladeLogic will contact that URL to verify the certificate. the OCSP Responder sends back a signed message indicating the certificate’s revocation status. see “Secure file” on page 253.509 certificates environment variable: BL_SSO_TRUSTED_CERT_KE YSTORE_FILE For more information on defining settings in the secure file. see “Environment variables” on page 129. You will need to perform additional configuration for OCSP if any of the following conditions are true: ■ In the smart card certificate. OCSP checking can be used to improve the security of the overall BMC BladeLogic system. it can also be used to further secure communication between components of the BMC BladeLogic system.

The response from that trusted responder may be using a certificate that was not issued by the CA that originally signed the certificate being verified. an organization can use the BMC BladeLogic system to designate another OCSP Responder (see “Configuring an additional OCSP responder” on page 155). the Authentication Server may be contacting a trusted responder specified within the BMC BladeLogic system. In a typical configuration. you may need to set up a trust store so the OCSP responses can be validated (see “Setting up a trust store for an OCSP trusted responder” on page 156). For more information on this capability. In this situation. either because a certificate does not include a URL for an OSCP Responder or conditions prevent users from contacting that responder. If that attempt fails. Trusting the response from an OCSP responder If you have used the BMC BladeLogic system to designate an OCSP Responder. However.Setting up certificate verification using OCSP ■ Your OCSP Responder signs OCSP responses with a private key that is unrelated to the Certificate Authority that issued your smart card certificates. The Authentication Server expects that same value will be returned in the response message from the OCSP Responder. When nonce is enabled. Using nonce helps to thwart replay attacks. In such a situation. you may want to enable the OCSP “PKCS” extension. in some situations. you must create a trust store used specifically for validating communication with the trusted responder. No additional configuration is needed to validate responses sent by the OCSP Responder. Designating another OCSP responder In some circumstances an organization may want to designate an OSCP Responder. the Authentication Server encloses a unique value in an OCSP request message. see “Enabling or disabling nonce support” on page 154. The Authentication Server can first attempt to contact the OCSP Responder identified within a certificate. Enabling or disabling nonce support Use this procedure to enable or disable nonce support when contacting OCSP Responders. the Authentication Server contacts the OCSP Responder identified within a certificate. identified within the BMC BladeLogic system. When you use BMC BladeLogic to designate an OCSP Responder. 154 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . you can set up a failover capability (see “Configuring failover to an OCSP responder” on page 155). The response BMC BladeLogic receives is signed either by the CA that issued the certificate or a responder designated by the CA. To enhance the security of communication with an OCSP Responder. the Authentication Server can then contact a secondary responder.

the blasadmin utility). 2 To enable or disable nonce support. the blasadmin utility). the blasadmin utility). Configuring an additional OCSP responder Use this procedure to define an OCSP Responder other than the responder specified in a certificate. If you set responderURL to an empty string (""). 3 Restart the Application Server. Configuring failover to an OCSP responder Use this procedure to set up failover capability between OCSP Responders. start the Application Server Administration console (that is. enter the following command: set OCSP IsNonceEnabled true|false By default nonce support is disabled. 1 On the Authentication Server. the Authentication Server only contacts the responder identified in this procedure unless you have defined a failover capability (see “Configuring failover to an OCSP responder” on page 155). This procedure enables the Authentication Server to send the OCSP request to the specified URL. a second OCSP Responder can be contacted in the event that the first fails for any reason. 2 Specify the additional responder by entering the following command: set OCSP ResponderUrl responderURL where responderURL is the URL of the additional responder. start the Application Server Administration console (that is.Setting up certificate verification using OCSP 1 On the Authentication Server. 3 Restart the Application Server. 1 On the Authentication Server. start the Application Server Administration console (that is. Once you perform this procedure to define an OCSP Responder. With failover. enter the following command: Chapter 4 Administering security 155 . the only URL used to find an OCSP Responder is the URL obtained from the certificate. 2 To enable failover between OCSP Responders. By default this value is set to an empty string.

2 Import the certificates into a trust store file on the Authentication Server. be sure to restart the Application Server. true means the Authentication Server first contacts the additional responder you have defined using the BMC BladeLogic system (see “Configuring an additional OCSP responder” on page 155). when the Authentication Server contacts an OCSP Responder. a trust store may be necessary in some unusual circumstances. 4 Restart the Application Server. enter the following command: set OCSP UseCustomResponder true|false In this command.Setting up certificate verification using OCSP set OCSP IsFailoverEnabled true By default this value is set to false and failover is not enabled. Setting up a trust store for an OCSP trusted responder Use this procedure to import a certificate and set up a trust store that is used to verify messages from an OCSP trusted responder. 156 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . No additional configuration is required. The certificate to be added to the OCSP trust store must be the same certificate that the OCSP Responder inserted into OCSP response messages or the certificate used to issue the certificate that was inserted into OCSP response messages. NOTE The Application Server only reads its certificate store when it starts up. 1 Obtain certificates for all OCSP trusted responders from a certificate authority. However. To establish secure communication with an OCSP trusted responder. In this situation. Typically. in some circumstances an OCSP trusted responder may sign its response with a key derived from some other entity. If you change the certificate trust store. the response is signed with the private key that was also used to sign the certificate being verified. Setting this value to false means the Authentication Server first contacts the OCSP Responder defined in the certificate. 3 To specify which OCSP Responder the Authentication Server should contact first. The trust store must contain a certificate that allows the Authentication Server to trust messages from the OCSP Responder. you must set up a trust store used exclusively for validating communication with the OCSP trusted responder.

and -alias is the name you are assigning to the certificate you are adding to the trust store. If you attempt to view this password later using the show command. 4 Make the OCSP trust store available to the Authentication Server by entering the following command: set OCSP TruststorePathname certificateStore where certificateStore is the local path to the OCSP trust store. you might enter a command like the following: installDirectory/jre/bin/keytool -import -keystore PkiOcspTruststore.jks -storepass ****** -file DODOcspCert. OCSP verification is enabled by default for PKI authentication only. -file identifies the certificate you are importing. it is displayed in clear text. it displays in encoded text. -storepass provides the password for accessing the trust store. which is available on any machine where the Authentication Server is installed. Enabling or disabling OCSP Use this procedure to enable or disable OCSP support.Setting up certificate verification using OCSP There are many methods for importing a certificate. Chapter 4 Administering security 157 . ■ 7 Restart the Application Server. 6 Specify the type of OCSP trust store by entering the following command: set OCSP TruststoreType trustStoreType In this command trustStoreType can be either of the following: ■ jks—Trust store uses the “JKS” format. 5 Provide the password needed to decrypt the certificate by entering the following command: set OCSP TruststorePassword ****** When you enter the password. Currently. start the Application Server Administration console (that is. pkcs12—Trust store uses the PKCS12 format. For example. One approach is to use Java’s keytool utility. 3 On the Authentication Server. if you are importing certificates with the Authentication Server’s version of keytool.cer -alias ocspt where -keystore identifies the trust store you are setting up. the blasadmin utility).

see step 3 on page 161 in “Configuring LDAP authentication” on page 161. start the Application Server Administration console (that is. enter the following command: set OCSP IsEnabled true|false By default OCSP is enabled. 3 Define a distinguished name template. see “High availability configurations” on page 159. 3 Restart the Application Server. For more information on high availability. to connect to an LDAP server and authenticate a user. the Authentication Service issues a session credential with the user’s distinguished name. 2 To enable or disable OCSP support. 158 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . the blasadmin utility). Implementing LDAP authentication The BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service can authenticate users defined in an LDAP registry. 1 Specify the LDAP servers. For more information. the Authentication Service uses the LDAP Service. including any servers used for high availability purposes. Overview of LDAP configuration tasks This section provides an overview of the concepts you should understand and the tasks you must perform to set up LDAP-based authentication. the service uses that information to bind to an external LDAP server—that is.Implementing LDAP authentication 1 On the Authentication Server. When a user logs in and provides an LDAP distinguished name and password. 2 Provision the Authentication Server with trusted certificates for all LDAP servers. See “Configuring LDAP authentication” on page 161 for a step-by-step procedure describing how to set up LDAP authentication. If the bind is successful. see “Certificate trust store” on page 159. For details on how to specify LDAP servers to the Authentication Server. For details on how to configure the Authentication Server to use a trust store for certificates. To accomplish this. see step 2 on page 161 in “Configuring LDAP authentication” on page 161.

The Authentication Service sends the user’s credential to the LDAP Server only if it can validate the LDAP server’s certificate. see “Authentication profiles” on page 124 and the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. High availability configurations When the Authentication Service needs to authenticate a user by connecting to an LDAP server. see “Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database” on page 160. Certificate trust store The Authentication Service uses TLS to encrypt its connection to the LDAP Server. For details on how to set up a distinguished name template for the Authentication Server.509 certificates. Listing multiple servers helps to ensure high availability and failover capability. When a list of multiple LDAP servers is available. you may want to provide a list of LDAP servers that it can potentially contact. B Set up an authentication profile for LDAP authentication. You must repeat this procedure each time an LDAP server’s certificate is updated. 5 Cross-register LDAP users with the users in the RBAC user database.509 certificates that LDAP servers provide during the TLS handshake. LDAP servers are authenticated via X. see “Distinguished names” on page 160. Chapter 4 Administering security 159 . For more information. see step 4 on page 162 in “Configuring LDAP authentication” on page 161. you can use one of the following approaches: ■ Install certificates for all LDAP servers. For more information. 4 On the BMC BladeLogic client: A Set up a distinguished name template. if necessary. When configuring LDAP.High availability configurations For more information. For more information. This file is the trust store. see “Distinguished names” on page 160 and the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. you must identify a file that contains trusted X. LDAP connects to the first functional LDAP server in the list. When provisioning X.509 certificates for the Authentication Server’s trust store.

the profile template transforms the name to CN=admin. the Authentication Service requires a full DN and a corresponding password. For more information. which replaces the {0} substring. CN=sub1 before sending it to the Authentication Service. ou=dev. CN=Users. The two templates can be used together or by themselves. o=bladelogic. with a DN template of CN={0}. A DN template is a static string containing a {0} substring. Distinguished names LDAP users are uniquely identified by distinguished names (DN). however. the user’s DN becomes CN=qatest3. There it is transformed into CN=admin. 160 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . o=bladelogic. DC=sub1. DC=com before it is used to contact the LDAP server. Consequently. DC=com. the user only enters a string such as “qatest3”. Since all CA-issued certificates are trusted. DC=bladelogic. be sure to enter the users full distinguished name in both RBAC and the LDAP registry.Distinguished names ■ Install the certificate of the trusted Certificate Authority that issued certificates to the LDAP servers. see the blcred man page. such as CN=admin. which is replaced with the name the user provides when logging in. When cross-registering users. For example. ou=dev. DC=sub1. To add X. Cross-registration allows users to be authorized for RBAC roles. For example. ou=dev. Only users authorized to use BMC BladeLogic should be entered into the BMC BladeLogic database. If the common names (CN) specified in the issued certificates are set to the directory server’s fully qualified domain names. For information on adding users to RBAC. Use RBAC to add users to the BMC BladeLogic database. The name the user provides is transformed to a full DN by the use of a distinguished name template. users only have to enter the part of a DN that is unique to their accounts. all current and future LDAP certificates are automatically trusted. To authenticate a user. be sure to also set IsHostValidationEnabled to True. If the user enters “admin” as a user name when logging in. the authentication profile DN template might be CN={0}. CN=Users. use the blcred utility. and the Authentication Service DN template might be {0}. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide.509 certificates to the Authentication Server’s trust store. o=bladelogic. DN templates can be defined in two places: the Authentication Service and LDAP authentication profiles (described in the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide). DC=bladelogic. Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database Users must be registered in both LDAP registries and BMC BladeLogic’s RBAC-based user database. Rather than entering a full DN. CN=Users.

enter the following: set Ldap IsHostValidationEnabled true Chapter 4 Administering security 161 . C To check that the certificate’s common name matches the LDAP server’s fully qualified name. see “High availability configurations” on page 159. Separate URLs with commas or other delimiters (see “Specifying multiple values for a parameter” on page 50). To provision a trust store. B To identify the trust store containing trusted certificates. B To specify the amount of time to wait for an LDAP server to respond before terminating the connection. In a high availability configuration. including any servers used for high availability configurations. For more information on high availability configurations in LDAP. 2 To identify LDAP servers.509 certificates. either by adding certificates from individual LDAP servers or by importing a certificate from a PEM file. the blasadmin utility). do the following: A Provision a trust store with X.Configuring LDAP authentication Configuring LDAP authentication Use this procedure to configure the Authentication Service so it can perform LDAP authentication. do the following: A To specify URLs of LDAP servers. this is the amount of time the service waits for a response from one URL before trying the next URL in the list you provided in step A.509 certificates. enter the following: set Ldap TrustStore certificateStore where certificateStore is the local path to a trust store. 1 On the Authentication Server. enter the following: set Ldap LdapServerURLs serverList where serverList is a list of one or more URLs. start the Application Server Administration console (that is. URLs must point to LDAPv3 servers that support the StartTLS extension. 3 To set up a trust store for X. enter the following: set Ldap ConnectionTimeoutMs # where # is the number of milliseconds to wait. use the blcred utility.

enter the following: set AuthServer IsLdapAuthEnabled true By default LDAP authentication is not turned on. 162 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 4 To define an LDAP distinguished name template. See “Distinguished names” on page 160 for more information on using a distinguished name template.509 certificates if the LDAP server’s fully qualified domain name (FQDN) is not contained in one of the alternative names or the common name (CN). see “Certificate trust store” on page 159. NOTE The Application Server only reads its certificate store when it starts up. enter the following: set AuthServer LdapUserDnTemplate "text {0} text" where text represents any distinguished name objects that should be included in the template. For more information on X. 7 Cross-register LDAP users with the users in the RBAC user database. See “Crossregistering users in the BMC BladeLogic database” on page 166.509 certificates and setting up trust stores. See “Authentication profiles” on page 124 and the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. be sure to restart the Application Server. If you change the certificate trust store. 6 Restart the Application Server (see “Restarting a specific Application Server” on page 111). NOTE The blasadmin utility provides two additional commands for the Ldap component that are not documented here: DefaultUser and DefaultPassword. 5 To enable LDAP authentication. 8 Set up authentication profiles using LDAP authentication on the BMC BladeLogic client. These commands are only used by BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation.Configuring LDAP authentication Setting this value to true causes the Authentication Server to reject X. See “Certificate trust store” on page 159 for more information on using this option.

rec) for the newly created agent.rec file to the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Server. BMC BladeLogic’s integration with SecurID requires the presence of a host configuration file called sdconf. If a user is registered in the RBAC system. Configuring SecurID authentication Use this procedure to configure the Authentication Server so it can perform SecurID authentication. that user can authenticate by providing his or her user name and passcode. 1 Log in to RSA Authentication Manager and define an Authentication Agent Host using the Application Server’s name or IP address. the Authentication Service issues a session credential to the user. the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service can share that agent’s configuration file. Configuring a BMC BladeLogic system to support SecurID authentication requires configuration beyond the default setup. In that situation you do not have to perform the following procedure.rec.Implementing RSA SecurID authentication Implementing RSA SecurID authentication The BMC BladeLogic Application Server can authenticate users by means of RSA SecurID. In addition. Then generate a configuration file (sdconf. If the information the user enters is valid. The following sections describe those requirements. If an RSA Authentication Agent is installed. This file provides the address of the RSA Authentication Manager Server and other parameters needed to contact it. 2 Copy the sdconf. which consists of a PIN and the current token code displayed on an RSA SecurID Token. Users might choose to install an RSA Authentication Agent to help troubleshoot SecurID. In some situations the user may be prompted for a new PIN before authentication can occur. you must configure a client to use an authentication profile set up for SecurID authentication. BMC BladeLogic does not require one to be installed on the Application Server. Chapter 4 Administering security 163 . RSA Authentication Agents are used to protect computers and other resources. Configuring RSA Authentication Manager BMC BladeLogic assumes you have installed RSA Authentication Manager and are familiar with its functionality. See “Authentication profiles” on page 124 and the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide for more information on authentication profiles.

enter the following: set SecurID ReadConfigInterval interval where interval is the interval in seconds for reloading the configuration file. 4 Provide the path to the RSA Authentication Manager’s configuration file (sdconf. 3 Restart the Authentication Server. ■ To specify the path to the RSA Authentication Manager’s optional configuration file (sdopts. if you change the SecurID configuration. all SecurID login attempts are rejected. start the Application Server Administration console (that is. you must wait the amount of time specified by ReadConfigInterval (described below) until the new configuration values are read. the blasadmin utility). ■ To specify the path to the RSA Authentication Manager’s server status file. enter the following: 164 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . you do not have to restart the Authentication Server if you are making changes to SecurID configuration. The valid range is 0-86400 (24 hours).rec file.rec).rec) by entering the following: set SecurID ConfigFilePath filePath where filePath provides a local path to the sdconf. The default file name is JAStatus. enter the following: set SecurID StatusFilePath filePath where filePath is a local path to that file. 1 On the Authentication Server.Configuring SecurID authentication When you perform this procedure. The default is 600 seconds.1. a new file is created in BMC BladeLogic’s /br directory. 2 To enable SecurID authentication. If you do not provide a path. 5 Do any of the following to set additional configuration options for SecurID: ■ To instruct the RSA Authentication Agent which IP address to use if the Authentication Server has multiple IP addresses. enter the following: set SecurID AgentHost iPAddress ■ To specify the interval at which SecurID settings are read. When set to false. However. enter the following: set AuthServer IsSecurIDAuthEnabled true By default SecurID authentication is not turned on.

the RSA SecurID module creates log entries in the file specified by the LogFilePath option. If you do not define a path. This file is created automatically the first time the Authentication Service successfully connects to the RSA Authentication Manager. enter the following: set SecurID LogFilePath filePath where filePathis local path to the log file. If you are running other applications that also use RSA authentication. you must ensure that the Application Server can access the node secret file by granting the appropriate operating system-level permissions to the file. they should all use the same node secret file. If multiple Application Servers are running on the same host. When multiple applications share a node secret file. ■ To specify the path to the SecurID log file.Configuring SecurID authentication set SecurID OptionsFilePath filePath> where filePath is a local path to that file. enter the following: set SecurID LogLevel OFF | DEBUG | INFO | WARN | ERROR | FATAL By default this option is set to OFF. On UNIX. on Windows you must grant permission to SYSTEM. you must grant permission to the bladmin user. Other applications may have similar access requirements. they may need to share the same node secret file that the Application Server is using. ■ To specify the path to the RSA Authentication Manager’s node secret file. Chapter 4 Administering security 165 . The default file name is securid. enter the following: set SecurID NodeSecretFilePath filePath where filePath is a local path to that file. ■ To turn on logging. enter the following: set SecurID LogToFile true | false If set to true. the file is automatically created in BMC BladeLogic’s /br directory. By default this option is set to false. ■ To set the logging level. This configuration file is used to configure a manual authentication load balancing policy.

While logging into a BMC BladeLogic client. a BMC BladeLogic client can access the appropriate certificate and private key on the smart card to authenticate the user. such as RSA_ENABLE_DEBUG=YES. By default. BMC BladeLogic documentation assumes you know how to add users to the SecurID user registry. Only users authorized to use BMC BladeLogic should be entered into the BMC BladeLogic database. 166 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . See “Authentication profiles” on page 124 and the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. To verify whether a certificate is currently valid. 7 Set up authentication profiles using SecurID authentication on the BMC BladeLogic client. Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database Users must be registered in both the SecurID user registry and the BMC BladeLogic RBAC-based user database.properties. OCSP verification is enabled for PKI authentication. See “Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database” on page 166. Refer to RSA’s product documentation for a more complete description of supported settings. If the information the user enters is valid and the OCSP Responder verifies the validity of the user’s certificate. Use RBAC to add users to the database. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. Through ActiveClient middleware. For more information on setting up OCSP. Implementing PKI authentication The BMC BladeLogic Authentication Server can use public key infrastructure (PKI) to authenticate users who present a type of smart card known as a common access card (CAC).Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database NOTE SecurID configuration settings are stored in installDirectory/br/deployments/ deploymentName/options/securid-options. 6 Cross-register users in both the SecurID user registry and the RBAC user data base. You can manually edit this file to specify additional debug options. the Authentication Server can access an OCSP Responder. For information on adding users to RBAC. Cross-registration allows users to be authorized for RBAC roles. the Authentication Service issues the client a session credential. see “Setting up certificate verification using OCSP” on page 153. the user must insert a smart card into a card reader and enter a PIN.

If you choose to cross-register users by their common name. you cannot also crossregister users by their distinguished name. start the Application Server Administration console (that is. If you are implementing PKI. See “Setting up a trust store for PKI authentication”. For more information on registering users. Chapter 4 Administering security 167 . 4 Set up a trust store for a PKI certificate. You must choose between the common name or the distinguished name approach. all PKI-based login attempts are rejected. Configuring PKI authentication Use this procedure to configure the Authentication Server so it can perform PKIbased authentication. users must be cross-registered according their full distinguished name (DN). PKI authentication is not supported for Windows 64-bit platforms.Configuring PKI authentication BMC BladeLogic does not provide a default set of trusted CA certificates for use with PKI authentication. the blasadmin utility). see “Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database” on page 166. Note that many steps in this procedure reference a sub-section that describes another procedure. enter the following: set PkiAuth IsEnabled true By default PKI authentication is not turned on. enter the following: set PkiAuth useCommonName true By default cross-registration by common name is not turned on. 2 To enable PKI authentication. you must obtain certificates yourself from a CA. NOTE In this release. 1 On the Authentication Server. 3 To register users by the common name portion of the subject name within a user’s certificate. When set to false.

Setting up a trust store for PKI authentication Use this procedure to import a certificate into a trust store and then make that trust store available to the Authentication Server. be sure to restart the Application Server. if you are importing a certificate with the Authentication Server’s version of keytool. which is available on any machine where the Authentication Server is installed. the blasadmin utility). 1 If you haven’t already done so. see “Setting up certificate verification using OCSP” on page 153. NOTE The Application Server only reads its certificate store when it starts up. you might enter a command like the following: installDirectory/jre/bin/keytool -import -keystore PkiTruststore. One approach is to use Java’s keytool utility. obtain the certificate for the certificate authority that issued the certificates on the smart card. 3 On the Authentication Server. 6 Cross-register users in both the user registry maintained for smart card holders and the RBAC user data base. If you change the certificate trust store.jks -storepass ****** -file DODJITCCA_19. In most situations. 7 Set up authentication profiles using PKI authentication on the BMC BladeLogic client. See “Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database” on page 169.Configuring PKI authentication 5 To configure certificate verification using an OCSP Responder. 2 Import the certificate into a trust store file on the Authentication Server. and -file identifies the certificate you are importing. start the Application Server Administration console (that is. See “Authentication profiles” on page 124 and the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. There are many methods for importing a certificate.cer where -keystore identifies the trust store you are setting up. 4 Make the trust store available to the Authentication Server by entering the following command: set PkiAuth TruststorePathname certificateStore 168 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . For example. -storepass provides the password for accessing the trust store (needed later in step 5). OCSP verification is enabled for PKI authentication and no additional configuration is necessary.

Only users authorized to use BMC BladeLogic should be entered into the BMC BladeLogic database. For information on adding users to RBAC. The Application Server Administration console encodes the password that is displayed. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database Users must be registered in both the registry maintained for smart card holders and the BMC BladeLogic RBAC-based user database.Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database where certificateStore is the local path to the trust store. pkcs12—Trust store uses the PKCS12 format. For details on this option. Use RBAC to add users to the database. By default. Optionally. BMC BladeLogic documentation assumes you know how to add users to the registry of smart card holders. Cross-registration allows users to be authorized for RBAC roles. 5 Provide the password needed to decrypt the certificate by entering the following command: set PkiAuth TruststorePassword ****** Enter the password using clear text. users are registered by their full distinguished name. users can be registered by just the common name portion of the subject name within their certificate. 6 Specify the type of trust store by entering the following command: set PkiAuth TruststoreType trustStoreType In this command trustStoreType can be either of the following: ■ jks—Trust store uses the “JKS” format. ■ 7 Restart the Application Server. Chapter 4 Administering security 169 . see “Configuring PKI authentication” on page 167.

Implementing Domain Authentication Implementing Domain Authentication The BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service can authenticate users via Windows Active Directory user credentials. 170 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . After you configure BMC BladeLogic for Domain Authentication. See “Authentication profiles” on page 124 and the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide for more information on authentication profiles. see “Configuring BMC BladeLogic for Domain Authentication” on page 171. For details on this process. use your existing Kerberos configuration files and modify as necessary based on the descriptions in this section. you must configure a client to use an authentication profile set up for Domain Authentication. a Kerberos realm is an Active Directory domain. which relies on the Active Directory registry to store the names and passwords of registered users within its Kerberos realm. If you have already set up AD/Kerberos authentication for BMC BladeLogic. The Authentication Service uses that information to authenticate the user to the Active Directory KDC. and password. Users provide a user name. Configuring a BMC BladeLogic system to support Domain Authentication requires configuration beyond the default setup. domain. In Windows. The following sections provide instructions for setting up Domain Authentication at installations where AD/Kerberos authentication is not already being used for BMC BladeLogic.

Configuring BMC BladeLogic for Domain Authentication Use this procedure to configure BMC BladeLogic so users can authenticate to the Authentication Service by providing an AD/Kerberos user name. and password. Each of the steps in this procedure references a sub-section that describes another procedure. This is an example. Your domain structure may be simpler or more complex.Sample domain structure Sample domain structure The following diagram shows a sample domain structure containing a parent domain and two child sub-domains. you must use UPPER CASE LETTERS. You may want to review the diagram in “Sample domain structure” on page 171 for an overview of the domain names and host names used in the examples in this section. Chapter 4 Administering security 171 . The sample names shown in this example are used in many procedures that relate to the Domain Authentication and AD/Kerberos solutions. The following is a master procedure. domain. NOTE When you specify a domain name in any of the following steps.

com 172 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide ._tcp.DEV.DEV.sub2. 2 Create the blappserv_krb5.MYCOMPANY.conf file” on page 173. enter the following: nslookup -type=srv _kerberos._tcp.MYCOMPANY.SUB1. 3 Create the blappserv_login. 6 Add users to built-in roles.dev.MYCOMPANY. If multiple realms are used. See “Authentication profiles” on page 124 and the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. also look up the KDC for the parent realm (DEV. See “Creating the blappserv_login._tcp.Configuring BMC BladeLogic for Domain Authentication 1 Obtain the host names for Active Directory KDCs.REALM where REALM is a Windows domain name.COM nslookup -type=srv _kerberos.mycompany. For example: nslookup -type=srv _kerberos.COM and SUB2.MYCOMPANY.DEV. Later in the configuration process. See “Creating the blappserv_krb5. See “Locating Active Directory KDCs”. you will need these host names. which provides necessary authentication information.COM). Locating Active Directory KDCs Use this procedure to obtain the host names for Active Directory KDCs. Look up the KDCs for each realm against which users authenticate.SUB2. For example: service = 0 100 88 kdc.DEV. such as SUB1.MYCOMPANY.COM nslookup -type=srv _kerberos. See “Defining Authentication Service settings for Domain Authentication” on page 175.conf file.conf file” on page 174._tcp.MYCOMPANY. See “Logging on using default users and roles” on page 177. From a command line. See “Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database” on page 176.conf file. 4 Configure the Authentication Service to support Domain Authentication.COM. 7 Set up authentication profiles using Domain Authentication on the BMC BladeLogic client. which defines Active Directory domains and servers.DEV. 5 Add user names based on Kerberos naming conventions to the RBAC user database.COM The Active Directory KDC’s host name is reported as the value of service (UNIX) or svr hostname (Windows).

mycompany. Chapter 4 Administering security 173 .dev.sub1. A period before a DNS name indicates you are mapping every system with a DNS name ending with that value to a corresponding Kerberos realm.conf.MYCOMPANY. list all of those KDCs. 1 Create a text file and add the following content to it: [libdefaults] ticket_lifetime = 6000 default_realm = USERS_REALM [realms] USERS_REALM = { kdc = USERS_REALM_KDC:88 } [domain_realm] .mycompany. Creating the blappserv_krb5. USERS_REALM_KDC is the host name for the KDC servicing that realm. create a separate stanza for each realm. you must define a default realm.dev.mycompany. If multiple KDCs are running.conf file Use this procedure to create a blappserv_krb5.MYCOMPANY.Configuring BMC BladeLogic for Domain Authentication Ignore the numbers before the host name. do not use IP addresses. they are authenticated as members of the default realm.sub2. as described in “Locating Active Directory KDCs” on page 172. When Domain Authentication users log in and they do not provide a fully qualified user name.com = SUB2. use the nslookup command. If users are defined in multiple realms. NOTE When identifying servers in the blappserv_krb5.COM .COM To obtain host names for any of the KDCs listed in this file.com = SUB1. When you create a blappserv_krb5.conf file.com = DEV.MYCOMPANY. For example: .USERS_DOMAIN = USERS_REALM USERS_REALM is the realm where users are defined. This file configures Kerberos so it can communicate with the Active Directory server or servers. The Application Server must be able to resolve DNS names of Active Directory servers.DEV. In the “domain_realm” section.conf file.dev. USERS_DOMAIN provides DNS names.COM .DEV.

This files provides necessary Kerberos authentication information. the file should be located as follows: /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/blappserv_login. save the file to the InstallDirectory/NSH/br directory with the name blappserv_login. For example. com. }. if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location. if the Authentication Server is installed in the default location.ADKerberosPasswordLogin { com.auth. save the file to the InstallDirectory\NSH\br directory with the name: blappserv_krb5.Configuring BMC BladeLogic for Domain Authentication 2 Do one of the following: ■ On a UNIX-style system.conf.conf For example.conf.security.service. the file should be located as follows: /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/blappserv_krb5. the file should be located as follows: C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\ blappserv_krb5.conf For example.bladelogic. if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location.auth. save the file to the InstallDirectory\NSH\br directory with the name blappserv_login.sun.conf file You must create a blappserv_login.conf ■ On Windows. For example. save the file to the InstallDirectory/NSH/br directory with the name: blappserv_krb5.conf file.conf Creating the blappserv_login.conf ■ On Windows.Krb5LoginModule required doNotPrompt=false useTicketCache=false debug=false. if the Authentication Server is installed in the default location. the file should be located as follows: 174 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .module. 1 Create a text file and add the text shown below to this file. 2 Do one of the following: ■ On a UNIX-style system.

You can skip this step unless you choose to use a different file name.Configuring BMC BladeLogic for Domain Authentication C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\ blappserv_login.conf file. enter the following: \bin\blasadmin.bat Both options run the same command./bin/blasadmin ■ On Windows.conf file. To perform this procedure. 4 To enable the blappserv_login. This file is essential for supporting Kerberos. enter the following: . — From the directory where BMC BladeLogic is installed.conf. 2 To allow users to log in using Domain Authentication. from the directory where BMC BladeLogic is installed.conf Defining Authentication Service settings for Domain Authentication Use this procedure to define settings for the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service so it can use the Kerberos configurations you set up in previous procedures. 3 To enable the blappserv_krb5. enter the following: set AuthServer isDomainAuthEnabled true By default this value is set to false. By default AuthSvcKrb5Config is set to a value of blappserv_krb5. enter the following: set AuthServer AuthSvcKrb5Config fileName where fileName is the name of the blappserv_krb5. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console by doing one of the following: ■ On a UNIX-style system. select Programs => BMC Software => BladeLogic Server Automation Suite => Utilities => Application Server Administration.conf file. do one of the following: — From the Start menu. enter the following: set AuthServer AuthSvcKrb5LoginConfig fileName Chapter 4 Administering security 175 . you must use the Application Server Administration console.

176 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .conf. you must ensure that domain user names stored in RBAC are fully qualified and that those names match the user names stored in the Active Directory. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide.DEV.MYCOMPANY. By default AuthSvcKrb5LoginConfig is set to a value of blappserv_login. Cross-registration allows users to be authorized for RBAC roles. For example. if you are using RBAC or the bladduser utility to add a new BMC BladeLogic user. Requirements for User Names When using AD/Kerberos to authenticate end users. Each BMC BladeLogic user name must be in the form: USER@DOMAIN where DOMAIN is the domain the user is registered in.DEV. BMC BladeLogic documentation assumes you know how to add users to Active Directory. This file is essential for supporting Kerberos. Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database Users must be registered in both Active Directory and BMC BladeLogic’s RBACbased user database. The user’s BMC BladeLogic user name must match the user’s fully qualified Active Directory user name. Use RBAC to add users to the BMC BladeLogic database.Configuring BMC BladeLogic for Domain Authentication where fileName is the name of the blappserv_login.MYCOMPANY. 5 Restart the Application Server. For information on adding users to RBAC. Only users authorized to use BMC BladeLogic should be entered into the BMC BladeLogic database.DEV. You can skip this step unless you choose to use a different file name.MYCOMPANY.COM.conf file.COM rather than filling in the name field with a value such as: mary Note that the user name mary@SUB1.COM is a different user name than than mary or mary@SUB3. you would fill in the name field with a value such as: mary@SUB1.

For more information on this command. the RBACAdmins role has the authorizations necessary to manage users and roles. In a default installation. you must use RBAC to add a fully qualified user name to the BLAdmins role. Implementing Active Directory/Kerberos authentication The BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service can authenticate users via Windows Active Directory single sign-on credentials or. that you can use to synchronize group information in Active Directory with role information in RBAC. you must use RBAC to add a fully qualified name to the GlobalReportViewers role.DEV. If you are using that default setup. RBACAdmin_ADK@SUB2. the user would also have to be registered in the Active Directory user registry for the domain SUB2. then. RBACRole:syncUsers. Windows single sign-on is based on the Kerberos authentication protocol.DEV. equivalently. prior to disabling SRP. the GlobalReportAdmins role. To allow a user to log into the BLAdmins role. which has built-in authorizations to see data for all BMC Service Automation Reporting and Analytics sites. BLAdmins. see the BLCLI help. Logging on using default users and roles The BMC BladeLogic user database comes pre-provisioned with two default SRP users: RBACAdmin and BLAdmin. and GlobalReportAdmins—has at least one registered domain user assigned to that role. respectively. Otherwise. no user will be able to access the built-in roles. which has read access to all reports at all sites in a BMC BladeLogic installation.Implementing Active Directory/Kerberos authentication BMC BladeLogic provides a BLCLI command.COM. Windows Server 2003/2008 implements a Kerberos Key Chapter 4 Administering security 177 . which has built-in authorizations to change permissions for all system objects in BMC BladeLogic. you must use RBAC to add a fully qualified user name to the GlobalReportAdmins role. The same issue applies to the BLAdmins role. If the BMC BladeLogic administrator intends to support AD/Kerberos authentication exclusively and disable SRP user authentication.MYCOMPANY. These default users are assigned to the default roles RBACAdmins and BLAdmins.MYCOMPANY. To allow a user to log into the GlobalReportViewers role. To allow a user to log into the GlobalReportAdmins role. GlobalReportViewers. when SRP authentication is disabled. you can simply assign a fully qualified domain user name (for example. the administrator should log in as a user authorized for the RBACAdmins role and ensure that each of the four built-in roles—RBACAdmins. a Kerberos user’s ticket granting ticket (TGT). In this example.COM) to the RBACAdmins role. and the GlobalReportViewers role.

Upon successful Kerberos authentication of the end user. the Active Directory KDC responds by sending the client a limited-lifetime (typically 10 hours) user credential. Overview of AD/Kerberos configuration tasks This section provides a quick overview of the tasks you must perform to set up a BMC BladeLogic environment that supports user authentication via AD/Kerberos user credentials: 1 On the Active Directory KDC: A Create a user account for the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. The request carries encrypted material that allows the KDC to authenticate the request. the Active Directory domain controller or Kerberos KDC mediates the authentication of the end user to the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. which BMC BladeLogic clients can use to establish secure sessions with the BMC BladeLogic Application Service or Network Shell Proxy Service. the login client sends a request to the Active Directory KDC for a Kerberos Ticket Granting Ticket (TGT). After validating the request. This credential consists of a service ticket to the ticket granting service (the Ticket Granting Ticket) and an associated ticket granting service session key. Configuring BMC BladeLogic authentication user interfaces and the Authentication Service to support AD/Kerberos authentication requires additional configuration beyond the default configuration of clients and servers. relies on the Active Directory registry to store the names and passwords of registered users within its Kerberos realm. BMC BladeLogic end users can use their AD/Kerberos credentials to authenticate themselves to the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. the Kerberos TGT is also referred to as the domain user credential. it employs the end user's AD/Kerberos credentials to conduct a Kerberos protocol exchange with the Authentication Service. In Windows single sign-on.keytab file. In this exchange. When a BMC BladeLogic authentication user interface (either the authentication user interface built into the BMC BladeLogic Console or the blcred utility) selects an AD/Kerberos authentication profile.Overview of AD/Kerberos configuration tasks Distribution Center (KDC) as one of its default domain services. 178 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . the Authentication Service issues the authentication user interface a single sign-on credential. The keying material used to generate and verify the request is derived from the user’s password. a Kerberos realm is an Active Directory domain. In the context of Active Directory. B Export the blauthsvc. The following sections describe those configuration tasks. When a registered domain user logs into a client platform (Windows or UNIX). which the client stores in a local credential cache. This Windows Server KDC. referred to as the Active Directory KDC. Give this file and the SPN to the administrator of the Application Server hosting the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service.

D Create the blappserv_login. B Locate the Active Directory KDC for the service principal’s realm. B Create the blclient_login. These tasks are described in detail in “Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication” on page 184. 3 On the BMC BladeLogic client: A Windows only: Update the Kerberos Registry Settings.conf file. set up a Network Shell Proxy Server. 2 On the BMC BladeLogic Application Server: A Put the blauthsvc.conf file. F UNIX only: Obtain a ticket granting ticket (TGT) for the client. making sure each user name includes the user’s Active Directory domain (user@DOMAIN. C Create the blappserv_krb5. D Create a blclient_krb5. E Define Authentication Service settings to support AD/Kerberos. These tasks are described in detail in “Configuring a BMC BladeLogic Client for AD/Kerberos authentication” on page 194. G If you are using Network Shell to communicate directly with agents. F Add users to the BMC BladeLogic RBAC user database.conf file. G Create an authentication profile using AD/Kerberos authentication. E Update the config.Overview of AD/Kerberos configuration tasks These tasks are described in detail in “Registering an Authentication Service in an Active Directory Domain” on page 180.properties file. Chapter 4 Administering security 179 . C Locate the Active Directory KDC for the client’s realm.keytab file in the correct directory.conf file.COM).

Registering an Authentication Service in an Active Directory Domain

Registering an Authentication Service in an Active Directory Domain
This section provides procedures that an administrator of an Active Directory KDC can use to register the Authentication Service associated with a BMC BladeLogic Application Server in an Active Directory domain. Refer to this section only if you want to employ AD/Kerberos user credentials to authenticate BMC BladeLogic end users to the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. The following is a master procedure. Each of the steps in this procedure references a sub-section that describes another procedure.

NOTE
When you specify a domain name in any of the following steps, you must use UPPER CASE LETTERS. You may want to review the diagram in “Sample domain structure” on page 171 for an overview of the domain names and host names used in the examples in this section.

1 Review the required utilities that must be installed on the Active Directory server.
For more information, see “Requirements for the Active Directory server” on page 180.

2 Create an Active Directory user account for the Authentication Service associated
with an Application Server. For more information, see “Creating a user account in the domain of the Application Server” on page 181.

3 Export the user account and SPN information into a keytab file. After you create
the keytab file, you must give this file and the SPN to the administrator of the Application Server. For more information, see “Exporting the keytab file” on page 181.

Requirements for the Active Directory server
The following utilities must be installed on the Active Directory server:
■ ■

ktpass.exe (BMC BladeLogic recommends using version 5.2.3790.2732) setspn.exe

For Windows 2003, both of these utilities are provided as part of the Support Tools Service Pack 1. For Windows 2008 these utilities are provided as part of the core operating system.

180

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

Registering an Authentication Service in an Active Directory Domain

Creating a user account in the domain of the Application Server
Use this procedure to create a user account for the Authentication Service in the domain (that is, the Kerberos realm) where the BMC BladeLogic Application Server is running.

1 On a Windows 2003 or 2008 Server, from the Start menu, select Programs =>
Administrative Tools => Active Directory Users and Computers. The Active Directory Users and Computers window displays.

2 In the left column, expand the domain name for the BMC BladeLogic Application
Server so that it displays the Users folder.

3 Right click the Users folder and select New => User. The New Object – User wizard
displays.

4 For First name, enter a name, such as blauthsvc. For User logon name, enter the name
again. In this example, you would enter blauthsvc again.

5 Click Next. The second screen of the wizard displays, requesting password
information.

6 For Password, set the password to whatever you want. Be sure to use a password
that conforms to the Active Directory password policy. Then check Password never
expires.

7 Click Next. The final summary page of the wizard displays. 8 Click Finish to dismiss the wizard.

Exporting the keytab file
Use this procedure to export a keytab file from the Active Directory server. You must give the keytab file to the administrator of the BMC BladeLogic Application Server. The Application Server needs a keytab file because it holds keying material used for decrypting and validating the service ticket that the domain controller (that is, the KDC) issues to the client. When requesting a service ticket from the KDC, the client identifies the targeted server (that is, the Application Server) by the SPN. Because Kerberos employs mediated authentication for the mutual authentication of both the client and server, both the client and server must be registered with the KDC. The user is registered under a domain user name. The server is registered under an SPN.

Chapter 4

Administering security

181

Registering an Authentication Service in an Active Directory Domain

The procedure varies depending on what version of Windows and what service pack you are using. If you are using a Windows 2008 without Service Pack 2, you must work around a Microsoft defect by using a different setup. This defect is corrected in Service Pack 2 for Windows 2008, and it does not affect Windows 2003.

Windows 2003 and Windows 2008 with Service Pack 2 1 Use the ktpass command-line utility to export the keytab file using the command
shown below. Run this utility in a directory suitable for writing a file with sensitive data.
ktpass -out blauthsvc.keytab -princ blauthsvc/instance@DOMAIN -mapuser blauthsvc@DOMAIN +rndPass -minPass 33

In this command, instance is the instance of this Application Server (typically a host name) and DOMAIN is the realm where the Application Server is running. (This is the realm/domain that appeared next to the User logon name when you created the blauthsvc user.) For example, if you used the example names shown in “Sample domain structure” on page 171, you would enter:
ktpass -out blauthsvc.keytab -princ blauthsvc/app4@SUB2.DEV.MYCOMPANY.COM -mapuser blauthsvc@SUB2.DEV.MYCOMPANY.COM +rndPass -minPass 33

2 Give the following to the administrator of the Application Server:

The newly created blauthsvc.keytab file. The blauthsvc.keytab file contains key material, so transfer it between systems with care. The Authentication Service needs this keytab to allow users to authenticate. The service principal name used in the keytab file. For example:
blauthsvc/app4

The name of the domain (that is, the Kerberos realm) for the Application Server. For example:
SUB2.DEV.MYCOMPANY.COM

182

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

Registering an Authentication Service in an Active Directory Domain

Windows 2008 without Service Pack 2 1 On the command line, use the setspn utility to create a service principal name for
the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service by entering the following command:
setspn -A blauthsvc/instance blauthsvc

In this command, instance is the instance of this Application Server (typically a host name). For example, you can enter the following command:
setspn -A blauthsvc/app4 blauthsvc

2 Use the ktpass command-line utility to export the keytab file using the command
shown below. Run this utility in a directory suitable for writing a file with sensitive data.
ktpass -out blauthsvc.keytab -princ blauthsvc@DOMAIN -mapuser blauthsvc@DOMAIN +rndPass -minPass 33

For example, if you used the example names shown in “Sample domain structure” on page 171, you would enter:
ktpass -out blauthsvc.keytab -princ blauthsvc@SUB2.DEV.MYCOMPANY.COM -mapuser blauthsvc@SUB2.DEV.MYCOMPANY.COM +rndPass -minPass 33

Note that the -princ parameter identifies a user principal (blauthsvc) rather than a service principal name.

3 Give the following to the administrator of the Application Server:

The newly created blauthsvc.keytab file. The blauthsvc.keytab file contains key material, so transfer it between systems with care. The Authentication Service needs this keytab to allow users to authenticate. The user principal name used in the keytab file. For example:
blauthsvc

NOTE
The remainder of this guide assumes you are using a service principal name when setting up AD/Kerberos authentication. When this guide provides examples of a service principal name, it uses blauthsvc/app4. However, if you are using Windows 2008 without Service Pack 2, you must work around the Microsoft defect by using a user principal name instead of a service principal name. In that case, you should use blauthsvc instead of blauthsvc/app4.

Chapter 4

Administering security

183

Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication

The name of the domain (that is, the Kerberos realm) for the Application Server. For example:
SUB2.DEV.MYCOMPANY.COM

Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication
Use this procedure to configure a BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service so BMC BladeLogic users can authenticate using the AD/Kerberos user credentials. The following is a master procedure. Each of the steps in this procedure references a sub-section that describes another procedure.

NOTE
When you specify a domain name in any of the following steps, you must use UPPER CASE LETTERS. You may want to review the diagram in “Sample domain structure” on page 171 for an overview of the domain names and host names used in the examples in this section.

1 If you have not done so already, perform the following prerequisite procedure:
“Registering an Authentication Service in an Active Directory Domain” on page 180.

2 Review the information that is needed to perform subsequent steps. See “Required
information” on page 185.

3 Copy the keytab file to the Application Server. See “Copying the keytab file” on
page 185.

4 Obtain the host name of an Active Directory KDC for the service principal’s realm.
See “Locating the Active Directory KDC for the service principal’s domain” on page 186.

5 Create the blappserv_krb5.conf file, which provides essential configuration
information. See “Creating the blappserv_krb5.conf file” on page 186.

6 Create the blappserv_login.conf file, which provides the location of the keytab file.
See “Creating the blappserv_login.conf file” on page 188.

7 Configure the Authentication Service to support Kerberos. See “Defining
Authentication Service settings for AD/Kerberos” on page 191.

184

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication

8 Add user names based on Kerberos naming conventions to the RBAC user
database. See “Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database” on page 192.

9 If you are using Network Shell to communicate directly with agents, set up a
Network Shell Proxy Server to manage that traffic. See “Setting up a Network Shell Proxy Server” on page 193.

10 Add users to built-in roles. See “Logging on using default users and roles” on
page 194.

Required information
Before you start configuring an Authentication Service, you must obtain the following from the administrator of the Active Directory KDC:

The blauthsvc.keytab file. The service principal name used for the keytab file. For example:
blauthsvc/app4

The name of the service principal’s domain (Kerberos realm). For example:
SUB2.DEV.MYCOMPANY.COM

For information about creating a user account, service principal name, and keytab file on the Active Directory KDC, see “Registering an Authentication Service in an Active Directory Domain” on page 180.

Copying the keytab file
Use this procedure to copy the blauthsvc.keytab file you obtained from the Active Directory administrator to the correct location on the Application Server hosting the Authentication Service. For the Authentication Service to authenticate users through the AD/Kerberos user credentials, the Authentication Service must be able to accept KDC service tickets. To accept service tickets, the Authentication Service needs the service key in the blauthsvc.keytab file.

1 Locate the blauthsvc.keytab file that was exported from the Active Directory KDC. 2 Do one of the following:

On a UNIX-style system, copy the file to the /NSH/br directory.

Chapter 4

Administering security

185

Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication

For example, if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location, the file should be located here:
/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/blauthsvc.keytab

On Windows, copy the file to the \NSH\br directory. For example, if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location, the file should be located here:
C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\ blauthsvc.keytab

Locating the Active Directory KDC for the service principal’s domain
Use this procedure to obtain the host name for the Active Directory KDC that is running in the realm where the keytab file for the service principal was created. Later in the configuration process, you will need this host name. From a command line, enter the following:
nslookup -type=srv _kerberos._tcp.SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_DOMAIN

In this command, SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_DOMAIN is the domain of the service principal. For example:
nslookup -type=srv _kerberos._tcp.SUB2.DEV.MYCOMPANY.COM

The Active Directory KDC’s host name is reported as the value of service (UNIX) or svr hostname (Windows). For example:
service = 0 100 88 kdc.sub2.dev.mycompany.com

Ignore the numbers before the host name.

Creating the blappserv_krb5.conf file
Use this procedure to create a blappserv_krb5.conf file. This file provides necessary Kerberos configuration information.

NOTE
When identifying servers in the blappserv_krb5.conf file, do not use IP addresses. The Application Server must be able to resolve DNS names of Active Directory servers.

186

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

dev.COM .MYCOMPANY. as described in “Locating the Active Directory KDC for the service principal’s domain” on page 186.com = SUB1.sub2.conf Chapter 4 Administering security 187 .sub1.COM SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_REALM_KDC is the host name for the Active Directory KDC for the realm where the keytab file was created.MYCOMPANY.COM 2 Do one of the following: ■ On a UNIX-style system.com = SUB2. A period before a DNS name indicates you are mapping every system with a DNS name ending with that value to a corresponding Kerberos realm.DEV.MYCOMPANY.COM This is the value you got when you ran the nslookup command.MYCOMPANY.DEV. For example: kdc. save the file to the /NSH/br directory with the name: blappserv_krb5.MYCOMPANY.mycompany.Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication 1 Create a text file like the following: [libdefaults] ticket_lifetime = 6000 default_realm = SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_REALM [realms] SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_REALM = { kdc = SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_REALM_KDC:88 } [domain_realm] .dev. In the “domain_realm” section.mycompany. SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_DOMAIN provides DNS names.mycompany.DEV.com = DEV.COM .SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_DOMAIN = SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_REALM In this text file: SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_REALM is the realm where the keytab file was created. For example: . For example: SUB2.SUB2.dev.DEV.

if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location.module.security. the keyTab line would look like this: keyTab="/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/blauthsvc.conf file You must create a blappserv_login.accept { com.Krb5LoginModule required useKeyTab=true keyTab="keytabFileLocation" storeKey=true principal="blauthsvc/instance@DOMAIN" doNotPrompt=true debug=false. keyTab is the location of the blauthsvc.Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication For example. The Application Server looks in the blappserv_login. 1 Create a text file and add the following content to it: com. save the file to the \NSH\br directory with the name: blappserv_krb5.conf file to find the location of the keytab file. the keyTab line would look like this: keyTab="C:\\Program Files\\BMC Software\\BladeLogic\\version\\NSH\\br\\ blauthsvc. ■ On a UNIX-style system.sun.conf Creating the blappserv_login. if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location.conf ■ On Windows.auth. In this text file.conf file. 188 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . the file should be located as follows: C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\ blappserv_krb5.keytab file on your system.conf For example.security.sun.keytab" ■ On Windows. assuming BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location. the file should be located as follows: /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/blappserv_krb5.jgss. }. assuming BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location.keytab" Be sure to use the double backslash syntax shown above.

you should enter a user principal name rather than a service principal name. See “Using klist to read the keytab file” on page 189. For example: principal="blauthsvc/app4@SUB2. principal is the service principal name for the Authentication Service. if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location. For example: principal="blauthsvc4@SUB2. if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location.DEV.conf.MYCOMPANY.conf. You obtained the service principal name from the Active Directory administrator. followed by the @ sign. use blauthsvc instead of blauthsvc/app4.Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication In the text file.COM" If you do not have the service principal name and the Application Server’s realm. the file should be located as follows: /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/blappserv_login. 2 Do one of the following: ■ On a UNIX-style system.conf ■ On Windows. save the file to the /NSH/br directory with the name: blappserv_login. followed by the Application Server’s domain. In other words. you can use the klist utility to display them. save the file to the \NSH\br directory with the name blappserv_login. For example.COM" If you are using Windows 2008 without Service Pack 2.MYCOMPANY.conf Using klist to read the keytab file You can use the klist utility to read the keytab file and display the name and realm of the service principal. 1 Do one of the following: ■ On a UNIX-style system.DEV. For example. enter the following: Chapter 4 Administering security 189 . the file should be located as follows: C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\ blappserv_login.

DEV.Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication utilityPath/klist -t -k /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/blauthsvc.conf ■ ■ For more information on the blappserv_krb5.keytab In this command.DEV. Verifying a keytab file Use this procedure to verify that the keytab file you have generated can be used to authenticate.keytab" 2 The klist utility displays output similar to the following: Service principal: blauthsvc/app4@SUB2. ■ On Windows. 1 Copy the blappserv_krb5.conf file you set up for the Authentication Server to one of the following locations: ■ Windows: %WINDIR%\krb5. If you do not have klist installed on a UNIX system.COM.ini Solaris: /etc/krb5/krb5. you must first obtain it. This procedure is not essential.conf file” on page 186.COM The service principal name is blauthsvc/app4@SUB2. see “Creating the blappserv_krb5.MYCOMPANY.MYCOMPANY. but BMC BladeLogic recommends performing this step to confirm that you have successfully set up authentication based on AD/Kerberos. assuming that BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location. There are many online sources for Kerberos utilities such as klist.conf file.conf All UNIX platforms except Solaris: /etc/krb5. 2 Identify the service account name from the keytab file by entering one of the following: ■ Windows: installDirectory\jre\bin\klist -k -t keytabFile UNIX: utilityPath/klist -k -t keytabFile ■ 190 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . enter the following: "C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\jre\bin\klist" -t -k "C:\\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\ blauthsvc. utilityPath provides the path to the klist utility.

conf is correct. There are many online sources for Kerberos utilities such as klist.MYCOMPANY. this command might identify a service principal called blauthsvc/ app4@SUB2. if you used the example names shown in “Sample domain structure” on page 171. authenticate to Active Directory by entering one of the following: ■ Windows: installDirectory\jre\bin\kinit -k -t keytabFile servicePrincipal UNIX: utilityPath/kinit -k -t keytabFile servicePrincipal ■ In this command. verify that the default_realm you have set up in blappserv_krb5. 3 Using the results of the previous step. To perform this procedure. If you do not have klist installed on a UNIX system. 1 Start the Application Server Administration console by doing one of the following: ■ On a UNIX-style system.Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication In this command. Defining Authentication Service settings for AD/Kerberos Use this procedure to define settings for the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service so it can use the Kerberos configurations you set up in previous procedures. keytabFile is set to installDirectory/br. if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location. If the command does not succeed. you must first obtain it. If you do not have kinit installed on a UNIX system. For example. For example.keytab Running the klist command generates output that identifies the service principal.COM. Typically.DEV. from the directory where BMC BladeLogic is installed. utilityPath provides the path to the klist utility. the keytab file for Windows would be C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\blauthsvc. The variable keytabFile identifies the location of the keytab file and servicePrincipal is the entity identified in the previous step./bin/blasadmin Chapter 4 Administering security 191 . you must use the Application Server Administration console. you must first obtain it. utilityPath provides the path to the kinit utility. The variable keytabFile identifies the location of the keytab file you are generating. enter the following: . If this command runs successfully. you should be able to authenticate with AD/ Kerberos.

By default AuthSvcKrb5LoginConfig is set to a value of blappserv_login. 4 To enable the blappserv_login. This file is essential for supporting Kerberos. enter the following: \bin\blasadmin.conf.conf. enter the following: set AuthServer AuthSvcKrb5LoginConfig fileName where fileName is the name of the blappserv_login. select Programs => BMC Software => BladeLogic Server Automation Suite => Utilities => Application Server Administration. This file is essential for supporting Kerberos. 3 To enable the blappserv_krb5. enter the following: set AuthServer AuthSvcKrb5Config fileName where fileName is the name of the blappserv_krb5. enter the following: set AuthServer IsADKAuthEnabled true By default Active Directory/Kerberos authentication is not turned on. 192 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Cross-registering users in the BMC BladeLogic database Users must be registered in both Active Directory and BMC BladeLogic’s RBACbased user database.exe Both options run the same command. — From the directory where BMC BladeLogic is installed. do one of the following: — From the Start menu. You can skip this step unless you choose to use a different file name. You can skip this step unless you choose to use a different file name.conf file.conf file.Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication ■ On Windows.conf file. Cross-registration allows users to be authorized for RBAC roles. 2 To enable Active Directory/Kerberos authentication. By default AuthSvcKrb5Config is set to a value of blappserv_krb5. 5 Restart the Application Server (see “Restarting a specific Application Server” on page 111).conf file.

Network Shell user names do not include domain information.Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication Only users authorized to use BMC BladeLogic should be entered into the BMC BladeLogic database.DEV. Network Shell users may not be able to communicate directly with the agent on that server because the agent will expect user names to include domain information (such as mary@SUB1.DEV.COM rather than filling in the name field with a value such as: mary Note that the user name mary@SUB1.MYCOMPANY. Each BMC BladeLogic user name must be in the form: USER@DOMAIN where DOMAIN is the domain the user is registered in. Requirements for User Names When using AD/Kerberos to authenticate end users. see the BLCLI help.COM is a different user name than than mary or mary@SUB3. For more information on this command. BMC BladeLogic documentation assumes you know how to add users to Active Directory. you must ensure that domain user names stored in RBAC are fully qualified and that those names match the user names stored in the Active Directory. RBACRole:syncUsers. BMC BladeLogic provides a BLCLI command.DEV.COM). For information on adding users to RBAC.MYCOMPANY. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. Chapter 4 Administering security 193 . The user’s BMC BladeLogic user name must match the user’s fully qualified Active Directory user name. you would fill in the name field with a value such as: mary@SUB1. that you can use to synchronize group information in Active Directory with role information in RBAC.MYCOMPANY.COM. Use RBAC to add users to the BMC BladeLogic database.DEV. For example.MYCOMPANY. if you are using RBAC or the bladduser utility to add a new BMC BladeLogic user. Setting up a Network Shell Proxy Server If you cross-register users in Active Directory and RBAC and then you run an ACL Push Job on a server.

respectively. you can simply assign a fully qualified domain user name (for example. Otherwise. In a default installation. RBACAdmin_ADK@SUB2.MYCOMPANY.Configuring a BMC BladeLogic Client for AD/Kerberos authentication To avoid this problem and maintain communication with agents via Network Shell. the GlobalReportAdmins role. If the BMC BladeLogic administrator intends to support AD/Kerberos authentication exclusively and disable SRP user authentication. To allow a user to log into the BLAdmins role. you must use RBAC to add a fully qualified user name to the BLAdmins role.MYCOMPANY. see “Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service” on page 142. which has built-in authorizations to change permissions for all system objects in BMC BladeLogic. when SRP authentication is disabled. These default users are assigned to the default roles RBACAdmins and BLAdmins. Logging on using default users and roles The BMC BladeLogic user database comes pre-provisioned with two default SRP users: RBACAdmin and BLAdmin. no user will be able to access the built-in roles. set up a Network Shell Proxy Server. you must use RBAC to add a fully qualified name to the GlobalReportViewers role. and GlobalReportAdmins—has at least one registered domain user assigned to that role. then. you must use RBAC to add a fully qualified user name to the GlobalReportAdmins role.COM.COM) to the RBACAdmins role. GlobalReportViewers. which has read access to all reports at all sites in a BMC BladeLogic installation. The same issue applies to the BLAdmins role. If you are using that default setup. For more information. the RBACAdmins role has the authorizations necessary to manage users and roles. 194 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . prior to disabling SRP. the administrator should log in as a user authorized for the RBACAdmins role and ensure that each of the four built-in roles—RBACAdmins. BLAdmins. To allow a user to log into the GlobalReportViewers role. and the GlobalReportViewers role.DEV. the user would also have to be registered in the Active Directory user registry for the domain SUB2.DEV. which has built-in authorizations to see data for all BMC Service Automation Reporting and Analytics sites. In this example. Configuring a BMC BladeLogic Client for AD/Kerberos authentication This section describes how to configure a BMC BladeLogic client (the BMC BladeLogic Console or the blcred utility) to authenticate with a BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service using AD/Kerberos user credentials. To allow a user to log into the GlobalReportAdmins role.

4 Locate the Active Directory KDC for the client’s realm. See “Authentication profiles” on page 124 and the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. See “Locating the Active Directory KDC for the client’s domain” on page 197.conf file” on page 198. Each of the steps in this procedure references a sub-section that describes another procedure. Chapter 4 Administering security 195 . 7 For UNIX clients.conf file. 6 Update the BMC BladeLogic config. which provides essential configuration data. a user must also define an authentication profile that calls for AD/Kerberos authentication. the equivalent of a “kinit” is performed automatically.conf file” on page 196. The following is a master procedure. See “Performing Windows-only client configuration tasks” on page 196. you must use UPPER CASE LETTERS. 1 If you have not done so already. For UNIX environments. See “Updating the config. 3 Create the blclient_login.conf file. For more information on defining authentication profiles.properties file. NOTE When you specify a domain name in any of the following steps. You may want to review the diagram in “Sample domain structure” on page 171 for an overview of the domain names and host names used in the examples in this section. See “Obtaining a TGT for a BMC BladeLogic client (UNIX only)” on page 201. 8 Set up authentication profiles using AD/Kerberos authentication on the BMC BladeLogic client. See “Creating the blclient_krb5. When a Windows user logs into the Active Directory.Configuring a BMC BladeLogic Client for AD/Kerberos authentication In addition to the procedures described here. This step provides information that is needed for subsequent steps in this procedure. See “Creating the blclient_login. skip this step.properties file” on page 200. perform the following prerequisite procedures: ■ “Registering an Authentication Service in an Active Directory Domain” on page 180 “Configuring an Authentication Service for AD/Kerberos authentication” on page 184 ■ 2 For Windows clients. which provides essential Kerberos configuration information. each user must manually perform a kinit to obtain a ticketgranting ticket (TGT). 5 Create a blclient_krb5. update registry settings and perform other configuration tasks. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide.

4. Windows Vista 1.conf file. It should be named allowtgtsessionkey and it should have a value of 1.Configuring a BMC BladeLogic Client for AD/Kerberos authentication Performing Windows-only client configuration tasks Use this procedure to modify registry settings and perform other configuration tasks on Windows client machines. Open the Windows Registry Editor. 2. Windows XP 1. 196 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 4. Creating the blclient_login. Reboot the server. Open the Windows Registry Editor. 2. Do one of the following: Platform Windows 2003 and 2008 Actions 1. skip this section. Navigate to \HKLM\System\CurrentControlSet\Control\Lsa\Kerberos\ Parameters. This procedure is only necessary in Windows environments. 3. It should be named allowtgtsessionkey and it should have a value of 1. Open the Windows Registry Editor. 3. Create a new registry value of type REG_DWORD. 3. If you are configuring a UNIX-style system. 2. Reboot the workstation. Navigate to \HKLM\System\CurrentControlSet\Control\Lsa\Kerberos\ Parameters.conf file Use this procedure to create the blclient_login. This file provides necessary configuration information. Disable User Account Control (UAC). Create a new registry value of type REG_DWORD. 5. Create a new registry value of type REG_DWORD. Navigate to \HKLM\System\CurrentControlSet\Control\Lsa\Kerberos. It should be named allowtgtsessionkey and it should have a value of 1.

auth. You will need this host name later in the configuration process.conf. For example. the file should be located as follows: /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/blclient_login. save the file to the /NSH/br directory with the name: blclient_login.initiate { com. enter the following: nslookup -type=srv _kerberos.jgss.conf Locating the Active Directory KDC for the client’s domain Use this procedure to obtain the host name for the Active Directory KDC that is running in the domain that includes the client machine.conf ■ On Windows.MYCOMPANY.security. For example. 2 Do one of the following: ■ On a UNIX-style system.Configuring a BMC BladeLogic Client for AD/Kerberos authentication 1 Create a text file and add the following content to it: com.SUB1. save the file to the \NSH\br directory with the name: blclient_login. if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location. if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location.sun.CLIENT_DOMAIN where CLIENT_DOMAIN is the domain containing the user’s workstation where the client is running.DEV._tcp. }.module.security.conf._tcp.COM Chapter 4 Administering security 197 .sun. From a command line. the file should be located as follows: C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\ blclient_login.Krb5LoginModule required doNotPrompt=true Debug=false useTicketCache=true. For example: nslookup -type=srv _kerberos.

This file provides necessary Kerberos configuration information. Creating the blclient_krb5. For example: kdc.PARENT_DOMAIN = PARENT_REALM In this text file: CLIENT_DOMAIN is the realm containing the user’s workstation. For example: SUB1.DEV.dev.SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_DOMAIN = SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_REALM .conf file.mycompany.com Ignore the numbers before the host name.SUB1.conf file Use this procedure to create the blclient_krb5.MYCOMPANY.MYCOMPANY.DEV.Configuring a BMC BladeLogic Client for AD/Kerberos authentication The Active Directory KDC’s host name is reported as the value of svr host name (Windows) or service (UNIX). For example: service = 0 100 88 kdc.COM 198 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . where the BMC BladeLogic client is running.COM CLIENT_DOMAIN_KDC is the host name where the Active Directory server is running in your client’s realm.sub1. 1 Create a text file like the following: [libdefaults] ticket_lifetime = 6000 default_realm = CLIENT_DOMAIN [realms] CLIENT_DOMAIN = { kdc = CLIENT_DOMAIN_KDC:88 } SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_DOMAIN = { kdc = SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_DOMAIN_KDC:88 } PARENT_DOMAIN = { kdc = PARENT_DOMAIN_KDC:88 } [domain_realm] .CLIENT_DOMAIN = CLIENT_REALM .

DEV. as described in “Locating the Active Directory KDC for the service principal’s domain” on page 186.dev. as described in “Locating the Active Directory KDC for the client’s domain” on page 197.DEV.MYCOMPANY.conf.COM This is the value you obtained when you ran the nslookup command. For example: SUB2. SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_DOMAIN is the realm where the keytab file was created.sub2. the file should be located as follows: /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/blclient_krb5.conf ■ On Windows. A period before a DNS name indicates you are mapping every system with a DNS name ending with that value to a corresponding Kerberos realm.DEV.com = DEV.conf. For example: kdc.SUB2.COM SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_DOMAIN_KDC is the host name where the Active Directory server is running in the realm where the keytab file was created.conf Chapter 4 Administering security 199 .MYCOMPANY.MYCOMPANY.com = SUB2. SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_DOMAIN provides DNS names. For example.mycompany.COM . In the “domain_realm” section.COM . save the file to the \NSH\br directory with the name blclient_krb5.DEV.mycompany.sub1. if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location.mycompany. the file should be located as follows: C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\ blclient_krb5. For example: .Configuring a BMC BladeLogic Client for AD/Kerberos authentication This is the value you obtained when you ran the nslookup command.com = SUB1.COM 2 Do one of the following: ■ On a UNIX-style system.MYCOMPANY.dev. For example.MYCOMPANY. save the file to the /NSH/br directory with the name: blclient_krb5.dev. if BMC BladeLogic is installed in the default location.

properties ■ Windows systems: C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\br\ config.DEV.DEV.DEV. a copy of config.COM:88 } SUB2. By default.properties 200 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .SUB2.SUB1. you must add additional DOMAINS to the [realms] section of the blclient_krb5. In this case. this file is initially stored in the following location: ■ UNIX-style systems: /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/config. 1 Open the config.COM = { kdc = kdc.COM = { kdc = kdc.COM.DEV.MYCOMPANY.MYCOMPANY.DEV. These additional DOMAINS specify the explicit path you need to traverse from the first child domain.properties is placed in the following user-specific location: ■ UNIX-style systems: userHomeDirectory /.MYCOMPANY.COM = { kdc = kdc.properties file on the BMC BladeLogic client.MYCOMPANY.MYCOMPANY. up the tree to the root domain and back down to the other child domain.MYCOMPANY. assume that there is no direct trust between the child domains SUB1.COM and SUB2.conf file.properties file Use this procedure to modify the config. using the examples in “Sample domain structure” on page 171.MYCOMPANY. the [realms] section would look something like this: [realms] SUB1.Configuring a BMC BladeLogic Client for AD/Kerberos authentication NOTE If there is no direct trust between the two child domains.DEV.bladelogic/config. For example.properties When a user runs the console for the first time.COM:88 } Updating the config.properties file.DEV.COM:88 } DEV.MYCOMPANY.

Note that in either case you must use a backslash to escape the colon and backslash after the drive letter. 2 Set the following entries to the values shown below.conf). Alternatively. you can use a backslash as a path separator but you must escape it with another backslash (such as. Chapter 4 Administering security 201 .auth.security. This procedure must be performed every time a user needs a TGT on a UNIX client.login.auth. Entry java. use forward slashes as path delimiters (such as.properties in both locations—its initial location and in your own user-specific location.properties If you are setting up an AD/Kerberos environment that many users are sharing (for example.krb5. add it at the end of the file.Configuring a BMC BladeLogic Client for AD/Kerberos authentication ■ Windows systems: userHomeDirectory\Application Data\BladeLogic\config.security. path/blclient_krb5.conf In this entry.conf= javax. Note that in either case you must use a backslash to escape the colon and backslash after the drive letter. C\:\\Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/ version/NSH/br/blclient_login. If an entry does not already exist in the config.useSubjectCredsOnly= false Obtaining a TGT for a BMC BladeLogic client (UNIX only) Users of the BMC BladeLogic Console and the blcred utility running on a UNIX-style host must manually run a kinit to obtain a ticket-gathering ticket (TGT).conf In this entry.conf).conf file. use forward slashes as path delimiters (such as. you should modify config.security.conf). C\:\\Program Files\\BMC Software\\BladeLogic\\version\\NSH\\br\\ blclient_krb5. you can use a backslash as a path separator but you must escape it with another backslash (such as. Although the life span of a TGT is configurable.conf). path is the full path to the blclient_login.properties file. java.conf file. C\:\\Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/ version/NSH/br/blclient_krb5. The TGT is the AD/Kerberos user credential that domain users need to authenticate with the BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service. C\:\\Program Files\\BMC Software\\BladeLogic\\version\\NSH\\br\\ blclient_login. path is the full path to the blclient_krb5. this procedure is not necessary. For Windows paths. For Windows paths. typically a TGT is valid for 10 hours. If a user already has a valid TGT.config= Value path/blclient_login. Alternatively. a terminal server) and you have already run the BMC BladeLogic Console.

If you already use krb5. 1 Copy blclient_krb5. then you must integrate the contents of blclient_krb5. If you are using a Windows client.conf with the contents of krb5. you must first obtain it. Implementing security – Application Server to agents or repeaters This section provides the following procedures to secure access between the BMC BladeLogic Application Server and RSCD agents or repeaters by employing TLS client authentication: ■ ■ TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Windows Application Server TLS with client-side certs – Securing a UNIX-based Application Server TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Windows Application Server Use this procedure to generate a self-signed.conf by renaming the copy of blclient_krb5. If you do not have kinit installed. 2 To obtain a TGT. If you are not already using krb5. skip this procedure. provision all targeted agents or repeaters with an SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed certificate. The name you provide is associated with the client’s realm.conf. you can replace the existing version of krb5. client-side certificate for a Windows Application Server. If your environment includes multiple Application Servers.conf file. and configure those agents or repeaters to authenticate incoming requests using client-side certificates. run the following command: utilityPath/kinit userName In this command. The user name you provide for the kinit command does not have to be fully qualified. identified when you created the client’s blclient_krb5. There are many online sources for Kerberos utilities such as kinit.conf to /etc/krb5.conf.conf. you should repeat this procedure for each Application Server. utilityPath provides the path to the kinit utility.conf. 202 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .conf.Implementing security – Application Server to agents or repeaters This procedure is only necessary in UNIX-style environments.

See “Configuring agents or repeaters to authenticate incoming requests with client-side certificates” on page 206. in BMC BladeLogic documentation a “client” refers to a host running the BMC BladeLogic Console or Network Shell. Then add the passphrase used to encrypt the private key to the securecert file on the Application Server. The following is a master procedure. Generally. Creating a self-signed client-side certificate on the Application Server Use this procedure to create a file called id. 2 Provision all targeted agents or repeaters with an SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed certificate. You can use this procedure to use TLS with client-side certificates to secure communication between a Windows-based Network Shell Proxy Server and agents or repeaters. WINDIR is typically winnt (on a Windows 2000 server) or windows. 2 Create a directory called C:\WINDIR\rsc\certs\SYSTEM. 1 Create a self-signed. See “Creating a self-signed client-side certificate on the Application Server” on page 203. If you want to stop using self-signed.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Windows Application Server Note that in the context of this section.pem. 3 Using a command line. Then add the passphrase for that certificate to the securecert file. In the path shown above. Each of the steps in this procedure references a sub-section that describes another procedure. The procedure for a Network Shell Proxy Server is identical to the procedure for an Application Server. client-side certificate on the Windows Application Server. client-side certificates. 1 Log into a Windows Application Server as Administrator. see “TLS with client-side certs – Discontinuing use of client-side certificates” on page 210. generate a self-signed Application Server certificate by entering the following: Chapter 4 Administering security 203 . See “Provisioning agents and repeaters with a SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed certificate” on page 204. a “client” refers to an Application Server that is attempting to establish contact with the server hosting an agent. which contains the self-signed certificate for the Application Server and the private key associated with the certificate. 3 Configure all targeted agents or repeaters to authenticate incoming requests using client-side certificates.

or update. To accomplish this. the contents of the securecert file are updated to something like the following. [default] SYSTEM=FCUVOMLNGLVRZNOO For the initial installation of BMC BladeLogic. use the command line to enter the following: secadmin -m default -cu SYSTEM -cp passPhrase After issuing this command. you must ensure that the secure file on the agent or repeater is configured correctly. the agent or repeater will refuse the incoming connection because it will not have the SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed cert. you can find the securecert file in the C:\WINDIR\rsc directory. 1 Ensure that the secure file on all managed servers is configured so that tls_mode=encryption_only. 4 Update the securecert file to include an encoded copy of the passphrase. If you prematurely set the rscd entry in a secure file so that tls_mode=encrytion_and_auth. generate this setting by running the following secadmin command on each agent: secadmin -m rscd -p 5 -T encryption_only -e tls Before you can provision a managed server with the fingerprint of the Application Server’s certificate.pem file is created in the C:\WINDIR\rsc\certs\SYSTEM directory. you are prompted to provide and then confirm a passphrase. The encoded passphrase will vary. This file contains the SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed certificate. The id. An agent or repeater uses this fingerprint to validate the selfsigned certificate received from the Application Server in the course of the TLS handshake. If additional instances of BMC BladeLogic are installed. For example. you can find securecert in installDirectoryN\version\NSH\conf\securecert. The secure file (located in the C:\WINDIR\rsc directory on a Windows server and in /usr/lib/rsc on a UNIX-style server) must have the rscd entry set to the following when deploying the certificate fingerprint: 204 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . the default location for the second instance of BMC BladeLogic would be C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic2\version\NSH. Provisioning agents and repeaters with a SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed certificate Use this procedure to create. If necessary. on each managed server and repeater a file named SYSTEM.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Windows Application Server bl_gen_ssl -appcert After you enter the command. This passphrase is used to encrypt the private key in the id.pem file.

. cd to C:\WINDIR\rsc\certs\ SYSTEM. Performing this procedure for each of those Application Servers generates multiple fingerprints in the SYSTEM file. 3 Using a command line on the Application Server. Chapter 4 Administering security 205 ... the fingerprint file for a Windows Application Server is /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/certs/SYSTEM. 2 Set up root or Administrator privileges on each managed server hosting an agent. In environments where multiple Application Servers communicate with agents. the fingerprint file for a Window Application Server is C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\RSCD\certs\ SYSTEM. on a UNIX machine. To provision an agent or repeater with the SHA1 fingerprint of an Application Server’s certificate. all users accessing those agents will be mapped to root or Administrator.agentN where agent1.. On a Windows machine.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Windows Application Server rscd:port=4750:protocol=5:tls_mode=encryption_only:encryption=tls This is the default setting after a fresh installation of an agent. the directory containing the id. To grant this privilege.user=root To be safe. you should replace the host wildcard (“*”) with a more restrictive setting. you should provision each Application Server with its own self-signed certificate. such as the IP address or host name of the Application Server. Otherwise.agentN is a space-delimited list of the host names or IP addresses of the managed servers hosting agents or repeaters. update the exports file by creating the following entry: * rw. 4 Push the SHA1 fingerprint to managed servers by entering the following command: putcert SYSTEM id. update the exports file on a Windows server by creating the following entry: * rw. 5 Revert the setting in the exports file on managed servers back to a more restrictive user mapping.pem agent1.pem file. This command creates or updates a fingerprint file on each targeted agent or repeater.user=Administrator On a UNIX server. so in most situations there is no need to perform this step. you must have root or Administrator privileges on the server hosting the agent.

client-side certificates. provision all targeted agents or repeaters with an SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed certificate. The procedure for a Network Shell Proxy Server is identical to the procedure for an Application Server. use Network Shell to enter the following secadmin command: secadmin -m rscd -p 5 -T encryption_and_auth -e tls This procedure is also necessary if you are configuring a repeater to authenticate incoming requests from an Application Server. the secure files on those agents must be updated so tls_mode=encryption_and_auth. TLS with client-side certs – Securing a UNIX-based Application Server Use this procedure to generate a self-signed.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a UNIX-based Application Server Configuring agents or repeaters to authenticate incoming requests with client-side certificates Use this procedure to update the rscd entry in each agent's secure file so it reads as follows: rscd:port=4750:protocol=5:tls_mode=encryption_and_auth:encryption=tls After agents are provisioned with the SHA1 fingerprint of an Application Server’s self-signed certificate. and configure those agents or repeaters to authenticate incoming requests using client-side certificates. You can use this procedure to use TLS with client-side certificates to secure communication between a UNIX-based Network Shell Proxy Server and agents or repeaters. 206 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . This section is intended for administrators of BMC BladeLogic Application Servers. To modify the rscd entry in the secure file on each targeted agent. client-side certificate for a UNIX-based Application Server. Generally. This setting requires client authentication via clientside certificates. Note that in the context of this section. If you want to stop using self-signed. a “client” refers to an Application Server that is attempting to establish contact with the server hosting an agent. see “TLS with client-side certs – Discontinuing use of client-side certificates” on page 210. The following is a master procedure. in BMC BladeLogic documentation a “client” refers to a host running the BMC BladeLogic Console or Network Shell. Each of the steps in this procedure references a sub-section that describes another procedure.

To accomplish this. This passphrase is used to encrypt the private key in the id. BMC BladeLogic will not load the certificate if group or world permissions are set for the id. 4 Update the securecert file (contained in the /usr/lib/rsc directory) to contain an encoded copy of the passphrase.bladelogic directory. 1 Log into the UNIX system on the Application Server as root. Then add the passphrase used to encrypt the private key to the securecert file on the Application Server. 3 Configure all targeted agents or repeaters to authenticate incoming requests using client-side certificates. 3 Enter exit to revert back to the root user.pem file is created in the bladminUserHome/. See “Provisioning agents and repeaters with a SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed certificate” on page 208. where the id.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a UNIX-based Application Server 1 Create a self-signed client-side certificate on the UNIX Application Server. See “Creating a selfsigned client-side certificate on the Application Server” on page 207. In UNIX the Application Server runs as the bladmin user.pem file.pem. See “Configuring agents or repeaters to authenticate incoming requests with client-side certificates” on page 209. 2 Enter the following command: /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/bin/bl_gen_ssl After entering the command. Creating a self-signed client-side certificate on the Application Server Use this procedure to create a file called id.pem file is generated.pem file or the . Then add the passphrase for that certificate to the securecert file. and then enter the following command: su . which contains the self-signed certificate for the Application Server and the private key associated with the certificate. The id.bladmin This command logs you in as the bladmin user. you are prompted to provide and then confirm a passphrase.bladelogic directory. 2 Provision all targeted agents or repeaters with an SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed certificate. use Network Shell to enter the following: secadmin -m default -cu bladmin -cp passPhrase Chapter 4 Administering security 207 .

so in most situations there is no need to perform this step. the agent or repeater will refuse the incoming connection because it will not have the SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed cert. The encoded passphrase will vary. If you prematurely set the rscd entry in a secure file so that tls_mode=encrytion_and_auth.bladelogic chmod 600 /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/. generate this setting by running the following secadmin command on each agent: secadmin -m rscd -p 5 -T encryption_only -e tls Before you can provision a managed server with the fingerprint of the Application Server’s certificate. you must ensure that the secure file on the agent or repeater is configured correctly.pem file and the . [default] bladmin=FCUVOMLNGLVRZNOO 5 Ensure that access is restricted to the id. An agent or repeater uses this fingerprint to validate the selfsigned certificate received from the Application Server in the course of the TLS handshake.pem Provisioning agents and repeaters with a SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed certificate Use this procedure to create. The secure file (located in the C:\WINDIR\rsc directory on a Windows server and in /usr/lib/rsc on a UNIX-style server) must have the rscd entry set to the following when deploying the certificate fingerprint: rscd:port=4750:protocol=5:tls_mode=encryption_only:encryption=tls This is the default setting after a fresh installation of an agent.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a UNIX-based Application Server After issuing this command. or update.bladelogic/id. 2 Set up root or Administrator privileges on each managed server hosting an agent. 1 Ensure that the secure file on all managed servers is configured so that tls_mode=encryption_only.bladelogic directory by running the following commands: chmod 700 /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/. 208 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . This file contains the SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed certificate. on each managed server or repeater a file named bladmin. the contents of the securecert file are updated to something like the following. If necessary.

agentN is a space-separated list of the host names or IP addresses of the managed servers hosting agents or repeaters... Configuring agents or repeaters to authenticate incoming requests with client-side certificates Use this procedure to update the rscd entry in each agent's secure file so it reads as follows: rscd:port=4750:protocol=5:tls_mode=encryption_and_auth:encryption=tls Chapter 4 Administering security 209 . 4 Push the SHA1 fingerprint to managed servers by entering the following command: /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/sbin/putcert bladmin id. update the exports file by creating the following entry: * rw. all users accessing those agents will be mapped to root or Administrator.pem agent1..bladelogic. the fingerprint file for a Window Application Server is C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\RSCD\certs\ bladmin.user=root To be safe. 5 Revert the setting in the exports file on managed servers back to a more restrictive user mapping. To grant this privilege. On a Windows machine. you must have root or Administrator privileges on the server hosting the agent. the fingerprint file for a Windows Application Server is /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/certs/bladmin.agentN where agent1. Performing this procedure for each of those Application Servers generates multiple fingerprints in the bladmin file. you should provision each Application Server with its own self-signed certificate.pem file. cd to /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/ NSH/br/. the directory containing the id. on a UNIX machine. update the exports file on a Windows server by creating the following entry: * rw. Otherwise. 3 Using a command line on the Application Server.user=Administrator On a UNIX server. such as the IP address or host name of the Application Server.. you should replace the host wildcard (“*”) with a more restrictive setting. This command creates or updates a fingerprint file on each targeted agent or repeater. In environments where multiple Application Servers communicate with agents.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a UNIX-based Application Server To provision an agent or repeater with the SHA1 fingerprint of an Application Server’s certificate.

agentN where SYSTEM|bladmin is SYSTEM for a Windows Application Server or bladmin for a UNIX Application Server and agent1... TLS with client-side certs – Discontinuing use of client-side certificates Use this procedure to stop using client-side certificates that secure access between Application Servers and agents or repeaters. update the exports file by creating the following entry: * rw. 2 Remove the SHA1 fingerprint of the Application Server’s self-signed certificate from managed servers by entering the following command: nukecert SYSTEM|bladmin agent1. To modify the rscd entry in the secure file on each targeted agent. the secure files on those agents must be updated so tls_mode=encryption_and_auth.TLS with client-side certs – Discontinuing use of client-side certificates After agents are provisioned with the SHA1 fingerprint of an Application Server’s self-signed certificate. you may want to replace the host wildcard (“*”) with the IP address or host name of the Network Shell client. This setting requires client authentication via clientside certificates. you must have root or Administrator privileges on any servers hosting agents or repeaters where you want to discontinue use of clientside certificates. 210 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . To perform this procedure. use Network Shell to enter the following secadmin command: secadmin -m rscd -p 5 -T encryption_and_auth -e tls This procedure is also necessary if you are configuring a repeater to authenticate incoming requests from an Application Server.agentN is a space-delimited list of the names or IP addresses of the servers where you want to stop using the Application Server’s self-signed certificate.user=Administrator On a UNIX server.user=root To be safe. 1 Set up root or Administrator privileges on each managed server hosting an agent or repeater. update the exports file on a Windows server by creating the following entry: * rw.. To grant this privilege..

For Windows Application Servers. Typically administrators use the exports file to limit Network Shell client access to agents by restricting access to certain client IP addresses. Otherwise.Implementing security – Network Shell to agent 3 Configure the secure file on all agents or repeaters where you want to stop using certificates by using Network Shell to run the following secadmin command: secadmin -m rscd -p 5 -T encryption_only -e tls Running this command generates an rscd entry in the secure file like the following: rscd:port=4750:protocol=5:tls_mode=encryption_only:encryption=tls 4 Revert the setting in the exports file on managed servers back to a more restrictive user mapping. The following options are available: ■ ■ No authentication – Using a default installation TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Network Shell client No authentication – Using a default installation A standard installation of BMC BladeLogic requires no user authentication between Network Shell clients and servers hosting agents.bladelogic. 5 Remove certificates from Application Servers by deleting the SYSTEM directory for Windows Application Servers or the . For UNIX Application Servers. the bladmin directory can be found at /opt/bmc/ BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/. all users accessing those agents will be mapped to root or Administrator. Implementing security – Network Shell to agent This section provides procedures to secure access between Network Shell clients and servers hosting RSCD agents. the SYSTEM directory can be found at C:\ WINDIR\rsc\certs\SYSTEM. see “Exports file” on page 240. Chapter 4 Administering security 211 .bladelogic directory for UNIX Application Servers. For more information on using the exports file.

the client uses the contents of the id. Then this procedure calculates the SHA1 fingerprint of the client certificate and pushes it to targeted agents using the putcert utility. The installation program also allows you to install a daemon or create a random number seed that BMC BladeLogic uses for generating random numbers.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Network Shell client TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Network Shell client Use this procedure to generate a self-signed. If you want to stop using self-signed. 1 Ensure that the secure file is configured correctly on all agents where you want to set up secure access. so in many situations there is no need to perform this step. This procedure creates a file on the client called id. That file contains the client’s digital certificate and the corresponding private key. which is encrypted using a password supplied when the self-signed certificate is created. client-side certificates. see “Discontinuing use of client-side certificates” on page 216. client-side certificate for a Windows Network Shell client.pem file is generated. The BMC BladeLogic installation program for the Application Server tests whether a machine has the capability to generate random numbers. On UNIX machines running Network Shell clients. Later in this procedure you will change the tls_mode setting. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide.pem.pem file (certificate and corresponding private key) and the agents uses the SHA1 fingerprint. For more information. At this point in the procedure the rscd entry in the secure file should be set to tls_mode=encryption_only. 212 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . generate this setting by running the following secadmin command on each agent: secadmin -m rscd -p 5 -T encryption_only -e tls This is the default setting after a fresh installation of an agent. If necessary.pem file or the . where the id. During the TLS handshake. and configure those agents to authenticate incoming requests using client-side certificates. 2 Set up root or Administrator privileges on each managed server hosting an agent. provision all targeted agents with an SHA1 fingerprint of the self-signed certificate.bladelogic directory. NOTE The machine where you are creating a certificate must have the capability to generate random numbers. BMC BladeLogic will not load the certificate if group or world permissions are set for the id. The SHA1 fingerprint is written into fingerprint files on the agents.

pem 7 Push the SHA1 fingerprint of the self-signed certificate to managed servers by entering the following command: putcert userName id. you should replace the host wildcard (“*”) with the IP address or host name of the Network Shell client. such as /home/userName. The passphrase is used to encrypt the private key in the id.pem. update the exports file by creating the following entry: * rw. To grant this privilege. Then confirm the passphrase by entering it again. Chapter 4 Administering security 213 . you must have root or Administrator privileges on the server hosting the agent..user=root To be safe..bladelogic directory by running the following commands: chmod 700 /home/userName/. id..pem is stored in /userProfileDirectory/Application Data /BladeLogic.pem agent1 .bladelogic. generate a self-signed certificate by entering the following: bl_gen_ssl 4 Enter a passphrase. 3 Using a command line on the Network Shell client.pem is stored. id. agentN is a space-delimited list of the names or IP addresses of the servers to which you want to push the certificate.user=Administrator On a UNIX server. In Windows. agentN where userName is the name of the user who created the certificate and agent1 . where userHomeDirectory is the user’s home directory. where userProfileDirectory specifies a path such as /Documents and Settings/userName. BMC BladeLogic generates a self-signed certificate in a file named id. update the exports file on a Windows server by creating the following entry: * rw.bladelogic chmod 600 /home/userName/. 5 Cd to the directory where id. In UNIX.pem file and the .pem file. 6 For UNIX machines running Network Shell clients. ensure that access is restricted to the id.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Network Shell client To provision an agent with the SHA1 fingerprint of a client’s certificate.pem is stored in /userHomeDirectory /.bladelogic/id..

Network Shell decrypts and caches your private key. 9 Revert the setting in the exports file on managed servers back to a more restrictive user mapping. If the private key in the id. see “TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Windows Application Server” on page 202 or “TLS with client-side certs – Securing a UNIX-based Application Server” on page 206. The procedure for activating the private key cache varies for Windows and UNIX-style systems. On a Windows agent. You can also use these procedures to set up client-side certificates on Network Shell Proxy Servers.pem file is not password-protected. the system prompts you for your private key password. C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\RSCD\certs \userName is the fingerprint file. you should cache your private key for your client-side certificate. 214 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Otherwise.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Network Shell client This command creates or updates a fingerprint file on each targeted agent.pem file is generated. For more information. /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/ NSH/certs/userName is the fingerprint file. This step sets tls_mode=encryption_and_auth on the targeted agents. making it available to any command running under the shell. all users accessing those agents will be mapped to root or Administrator. Caching private keys A client certificate and its associated private key (that is. BMC BladeLogic provides a private key cache so users do not have to retype their passwords every time they start a new Network Shell session. see “Caching private keys” on page 214. BMC BladeLogic provides a password mechanism. To keep private keys safe. The procedure is the same as the procedure for Application Servers. anyone gaining access to the file can assume the identity of the user named in the certificate.pem file) constitute a user credential that the holder of the credential can use to assume the identity of the user named within the credential. When you start Network Shell. For information on setting up client-side certificates on these entities. Because each Network Shell session requires knowledge of the private key password. 8 Modify the rscd entry in the secure file on each targeted agent by entering the following secadmin command: secadmin -m rscd -p 5 -T encryption_and_auth -e tls NOTE Performing this step could have implications for Application Servers or Network Shell Proxy Servers when they communicate with the same targeted agents. Once you provide the password. On a UNIX agent. the private key is encrypted using the password you provide when you run the bl_gen_ssl utility. which means these agents will require Application Servers or Network Shell Proxy Servers to also use client-side certificates. 10 If you plan to use Network Shell to run non-interactive tools such as the BLCLI. When an id. the contents of the id.

Activating the private key cache in UNIX 1 On the Network Shell client. Network Shell prompts you for a password every time you issue a command during that session. The system generates a message like the following: set BL_X509_KEY to xy to reuse this private key where xy is the hexadecimal value of the location of the shared memory segment. 3 To stop sharing the password. bl_ssl_agent --background The system prompts for your private key password. The command will spawn a new process that will remain in the background to cache the password in a shared memory segment. NOTE This command must be run in the foreground because it prompts for a password. and then start Network Shell again. indicating the private key password is shared. enter the following command: bltray -blkey A dialog prompts for your private key password. Activating the private key cache in Windows 1 From a Windows command line. To avoid this. 2 Enter the password and click OK. Network Shell only prompts for the password when you start the new session. create the certificate. The BMC BladeLogic icon displays in the system tray on the task bar. Chapter 4 Administering security 215 . 2 Enter the password. enter the following command.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Network Shell client TIP If you are already running Network Shell and you create a certificate. exit Network Shell. right-click the BMC BladeLogic icon in the system tray and select Exit from the pop-up menu.

To grant this privilege. you may want to replace the host wildcard (“*”) with the IP address or host name of the Network Shell client. update the exports file on a Windows server by creating the following entry: * rw.agentN is a space-delimited list of the names or IP addresses of the servers where you want to stop using certificates. update the exports file by creating the following entry: * rw. 1 Set up root or Administrator privileges on each managed server hosting an agent.user=Administrator On a UNIX server. 2 Remove the SHA1 fingerprint of a client-side. This shared memory segment is only usable by the person who ran bl_ssl_agent. set the BL_X509_KEY environment variable by entering the following command: BL_X509_KEY=xy 4 Export the BL_X509_KEY environment variable by issuing the following command: export BL_X509_KEY The bl_ssl_agent program remains in the background holding the private key password cached in a shared memory segment until you kill it. Discontinuing use of client-side certificates Use this procedure to stop using client-side certificates that secure access between Network Shell clients and agents.user=root To be safe.TLS with client-side certs – Securing a Network Shell client After entering your password.. 3 To reuse this shared memory segment with Network Shell. bl_ssl_agent runs in the background with the password cached in a shared memory segment. you must have root or Administrator privileges on any servers hosting agents where you want to discontinue use of client-side certificates.. self-signed certificate from managed servers by entering the following command: nukecert userName agent1. 3 Configure the secure file on all agents where you want to stop using certificates by using Network Shell to run the following secadmin command: 216 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .. To perform this procedure.agentN where userName is the name of the user who created the certificate and agent1..

client-side certificates.pem file.pem is stored in /userProfileDirectory/Application Data /BladeLogic. Implementing Security – Repeater to agent Use this procedure to generate a self-signed. id. and configure those agents to authenticate incoming requests using clientside certificates.Implementing Security – Repeater to agent secadmin -m rscd -p 5 -T encryption_only -e tls Running this command generates an rscd entry in the secure file like the following: rscd:port=4750:protocol=5:tls_mode=encryption_only:encryption=tls NOTE Performing this step could have implications for Application Servers or Network Shell Proxy Servers when they communicate with the same targeted agents. you must perform this procedure for the BladeLogicRSCD user. which means these agents will not require Application Servers or Network Shell Proxy Servers to also use client-side certificates. provision all targeted agents with an SHA1 fingerprint of the repeater’s self-signed certificate. see “Discontinuing use of client-side certificates” on page 222. Typically. 5 Remove certificates from clients by deleting the id. This step sets tls_mode=encryption_only on the targeted agents. The following is a master procedure. In Windows. Otherwise. users are mapped to root but mapping to other user names is possible. such as /home/userName. In UNIX.bladelogic. client-side certificate for a repeater. where userHomeDirectory> is the user’s home directory. all users accessing those agents will be mapped to root or Administrator. On UNIX repeaters. On Windows. you must perform this procedure for every user to whom connecting users are mapped. where userProfileDirectory specifies a path such as /Documents and Settings/userName. 4 Revert the setting in the exports file on managed servers back to a more restrictive user mapping.pem is stored in /userHomeDirectory /. id. Each of the steps in this procedure references a sub-section that describes another procedure. If you want to stop using self-signed. Chapter 4 Administering security 217 .

On UNIX repeaters. 218 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . where the id. Then. client-side certificate on the repeater. See “Provisioning agents with an SHA1 fingerprint of the repeater’s self-signed certificate” on page 219. do the following: A. See “Creating a self-signed client-side certificate on the repeater” on page 218. In the path shown above. Log into the Application Server as Administrator. See “Configuring agents to authenticate incoming requests with clientside certificates” on page 221. and then add the passphrase for that certificate to the securecert file. log into the repeater as a user to whom connecting users are mapped (typically root). Create a directory called C:\WINDIR\rsc\certs\BladeLogicRSCD. issue the following command for generating a certificate: bl_gen_ssl ■ On Windows.pem file is generated. Enter the following command for generating a certificate: bl_gen_ssl -repeatcert 5 Enter a passphrase for the private key to the certificate.Creating a self-signed client-side certificate on the repeater 1 Create a self-signed. B. 4 Using a command line. 2 Provision all targeted agents with an SHA1 fingerprint of the repeater’s self-signed certificate. Then confirm the passphrase by entering it again. generate a self-signed certificate by doing one of the following: ■ On UNIX-style systems. WINDIR is typically winnt (on a Windows 2000 server) or windows.bladelogic directory. BMC BladeLogic will not load the certificate if group or world permissions are set for the id. C. Creating a self-signed client-side certificate on the repeater Use this procedure to create a self-signed certificate for the repeater and then add the passphrase for that certificate to the securecert file on the repeater.pem file or the . 3 Configure all targeted agents to authenticate incoming requests using client-side certificates.

For example. The secadmin utility encrypts the password.pem Provisioning agents with an SHA1 fingerprint of the repeater’s self-signed certificate Use this procedure to provision managed servers with the SHA1 fingerprint of the repeater’s self-signed certificate.Provisioning agents with an SHA1 fingerprint of the repeater’s self-signed certificate BMC BladeLogic generates a certificate in a file named id.bladelogic directory by running the following commands: chmod 700 /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/.bladelogic/id. id.. enter the following: secadmin -m default -cu user -cp password where user is BladeLogicRSCD for Windows repeaters and the user who created the certificate (such as root) for UNIX-style repeaters. the file is created in userHomeDirectory /.bladelogic/id. An agent uses this fingerprint to validate the selfsigned certificate received from the repeater in the course of the TLS handshake. Chapter 4 Administering security 219 . such as root or BladeLogicRSCD. the file is created in WINDIR\rsc\certs\BladeLogicRSCD. On UNIX. if you are logged in as root. this command might create an entry like the following.pem file and the . Enter the password in clear text. (The encoded passphrase will vary. On Windows. 6 Update the securecert file to contain an encoded copy of the passphrase.) [default] BladeLogicRSCD=FCUVOMLNGLVRZNOO 7 For UNIX repeaters.pem is created in /root/. For example.pem. Using Network Shell. where WINDIR is typically windows or winnt. ensure that access is restricted to the id.pem.bladelogic chmod 600 /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/.bladelogic. the contents of the securecert file are updated to include an entry for your current user name. where userHomeDirectory is the user’s home directory. After issuing this command.

The secure file (located in the C:\WINDIR\rsc directory on a Windows server and in / usr/lib/rsc on a UNIX-style server) must have the rscd entry set to the following when deploying the certificate fingerprint: rscd:port=4750:protocol=5:tls_mode=encryption_only:encryption=tls This is the default setting after a fresh installation of an agent. where WINDIR is typically windows or winnt. To grant this privilege. For example. If necessary.bladelogic/id.pem resides in WINDIR\rsc\certs\BladeLogicRSCD. 2 Set up root or Administrator privileges on each managed server hosting an agent.pem is created at /root/. On UNIX-style servers.bladelogic. so in most situations there is no need to perform this step.user=root To be safe.. update the exports file by creating the following entry: * rw. To provision an agent with the SHA1 fingerprint of an Application Server’s certificate.pem. you may want to replace the host wildcard (“*”) with the IP address or host name of the Application Server.pem resides in userHomeDirectory/. 3 Cd to the directory on the repeater where id. if you are logged in as root. 220 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . where userHomeDirectory is the user’s home directory.user=Administrator On a UNIX server. id. you must have root or Administrator privileges on the server hosting the agent. id. you must ensure the secure file on the agent is configured correctly.Provisioning agents with an SHA1 fingerprint of the repeater’s self-signed certificate 1 Ensure that the secure file on all managed servers is configured so that tls_mode=encryption_only. id.pem is stored. the agent will refuse the incoming connection because it will not have the SHA1 fingerprint of the repeater’s self-signed cert. update the exports file on a Windows server by creating the following entry: * rw. If you prematurely set the rscd entry in an agent's secure file so that tls_mode=encrytion_and_auth. generate this setting by running the following secadmin command on each agent: secadmin -m rscd -p 5 -T encryption_only -e tls Before you can provision an agent with the fingerprint of the repeater’s certificate. On Windows.

pem file for BladeLogicRSCD in a file called BladeLogicRSCD. To modify the rscd entry in the secure file on each targeted agent. This setting requires client authentication via clientside certificates.agentN is a space-separated list of the host names or IP addresses of the managed servers hosting agents. Configuring agents to authenticate incoming requests with client-side certificates Use this procedure to update the rscd entry in each agent's secure file so it reads as follows: rscd:port=4750:protocol=5:tls_mode=encryption_and_auth:encryption=tls After agents are provisioned with the SHA1 fingerprint of an Application Server’s self-signed certificate.Configuring agents to authenticate incoming requests with client-side certificates 4 Push the SHA1 fingerprint for the repeater’s certificate to managed servers that communicate with the repeater. Otherwise. all users accessing those agents will be mapped to root or Administrator. use Network Shell to enter the following secadmin command: secadmin -m rscd -p 5 -T encryption_and_auth -e tls Chapter 4 Administering security 221 .agentN where. use Network Shell to enter the following: putcert user id. user is either the name of the UNIX user you were logged in as when you created the certificate or BladeLogicRSCD if the repeater is on a Windows platform. agent1.pem file for root in a file called root. 5 Revert the setting in the exports file on managed servers back to a more restrictive user mapping. It places the SHA1 fingerprint of the id.. To accomplish this.. The file resides in the /nsh/certs directory on UNIX-style servers and in \rsc\certs on Windows.. BMC BladeLogic places the SHA1 fingerprint of the id.. When you issue the putcert command. the secure files on those agents must be updated so tls_mode=encryption_and_auth.pem agent1.

In the command shown above agent1. 1 Set up root or Administrator privileges on each managed server hosting an agent. To grant this privilege. use Network Shell to enter the following: nukecert user agent1. To accomplish this. 2 Remove the SHA1 fingerprint of the repeater’s self-signed certificate from managed servers. you must remove those user names as well.agentN is a space-delimited list of the names or IP addresses of the servers where you want to stop using the repeater’s self-signed certificate. you should replace the host wildcard (“*”) with a more restrictive setting. This step sets tls_mode=encryption_only on the targeted agents..Discontinuing use of client-side certificates Discontinuing use of client-side certificates Use this procedure to stop using client-side certificates that secure access between repeaters and agents.user=Administrator On a UNIX server. To perform this procedure. such as the IP address or host name of the Network Shell client. 222 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . update the exports file by creating the following entry: * rw.agentN where user is BladeLogicRSCD for a Windows repeater and typically root for a UNIX repeater.user=root To be safe.. update the exports file on a Windows server by creating the following entry: * rw. 3 Configure the secure file on all agents where you want to stop using certificates by using Network Shell to run the following secadmin command: secadmin -m rscd -p 5 -T encryption_only -e tls Running this command generates an rscd entry in the secure file like the following: rscd:port=4750:protocol=5:tls_mode=encryption_only:encryption=tls NOTE Performing this step could have implications for Application Servers or Network Shell Proxy Servers when they communicate with the same targeted agents.. you must have root or Administrator privileges on any servers hosting agents where you want to discontinue use of client-side certificates.. which means these agents will not require Application Servers or Network Shell Proxy Servers to also use client-side certificates. If other UNIX users have fingerprints on the agent.

and it will be stored under the “blade” alias. all users accessing those agents will be mapped to root or Administrator. In some situations. the id.pem resides in /root/. where WINDIR is typically windows or winnt. if you are logged in as root. Chapter 4 Administering security 223 .pem file storing the certificate.pem. For more information on that procedure.pem file resides in userHomeDirectory/. see “Securing communication with CA certificates” on page 224. the id. The certificate will be valid for three years. you may choose to provision Application Servers with a CA-issued certificate or certificate chain..bladelogic.bladelogic/id. On Windows. Generating a self-signed certificate for an Application Server Performing this procedure generates a 2048-bit RSA key and a self-signed certificate for an Application Server.pem file resides in WINDIR\rsc\certs\BladeLogicRSCD. where userHomeDirectory is the user’s home directory. Otherwise. Using certificates to secure communication between clients and Application Servers Typically BMC BladeLogic uses self-signed certificates to secure communication between clients and Application Servers. On UNIX-style servers. you may need to manually generate a self signed certificate for an Application Server.Using certificates to secure communication between clients and Application Servers 4 Revert the setting in the exports file on managed servers back to a more restrictive user mapping. 1 From installDirectory/bin. enter the following command: blmkcert CN=hostname jksFileName password The command shown above has the following parameters: ■ hostname—Typically set to the host name where you are generating the certificate. id. For example. For more information on that procedure. 5 Remove certificates from repeaters by deleting the id. see “Generating a selfsigned certificate for an Application Server” on page 223. However.

After you provision Application Servers with CA-issued certificates.keystore" ******** 2 If you are using a multi-Application Server environment. A trust store only contains certificates. Securing communication with CA certificates When you install an Application Server. 224 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .Securing communication with CA certificates ■ jksFileName—The path to the keystore you are generating. you should import those certificates into client trust stores. If a new password is needed.) If the certificate you are importing includes a URL for an OCSP Responder. the client will attempt to verify the revocation status of the Application Server’s certificate. 1 Obtain a certificate chain from a certificate authority. such as installDirectory/br/deployments/_template. see “Synchronizing keystore files of multiple Application Servers” on page 58. However. For information on this process. the installation procedure provisions the Application Server with a self-signed certificate. see “Importing CA-issued certificates into clients” on page 226. If you do not want clients to verify a certificate’s revocation status. ■ For example. For more information on that procedure. if you are generating a self-signed certificate on a Windows server called winappserver1. 2 Import the certificate and its corresponding private key into a keystore file on the Application Server.keystore created automatically when you install the Application Server. do not provision the Application Server with a certificate that includes an OCSP URL. you might enter a command like the following: blmkcert CN=winappserver1 "C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\ NSH\br\deployments\_template\bladelogic. update the password for each cooperating Application Server. When you perform this procedure. some organizations may choose to use a CA-issued certificate or certificate chain rather than the default selfsigned certificate. This file should be stored in the /deployments directory for the Application Server that is being updated. copy the JKS file you generated in step 1 from this Application Server to all cooperating Application Servers. you set up a keystore that takes the place of the bladelogic. (A keystore contains certificates and a private key. password—A password used to encrypt the generated keystore file.

There are various tools for performing this type of conversion.keystore -srcstoretype pkcs12 -deststoretype jks -srcalias pkcs12Alias -destalias blade In this command bladelogic. 3 If you are using a multi-Application Server environment. you can use Java’s keytool utility. your certificate authority should create a certificates and private keys and output them using the JKS format. which is available on any machine where the Authentication Server is installed. If you are importing a certificate with the Authentication Server’s version of keytool. For example. which is the password originally used to create the PCKS12 file. see “Synchronizing keystore files of multiple Application Servers” on page 58. update the password for each cooperating Application Server. The command shown above also prompts you for the source keystore password. When you use the blasadmin utility to set up keystores for cooperating Application Servers (described in the next step) you must provide this password. copy the JKS file you generated in step 2 from this Application Server to all cooperating Application Servers. When you enter the command shown above. you are prompted for a destination keystore password.p12 -destkeystore bladelogic. This is the password used to encrypt the keystore. NOTE No matter what method you use to import the certificate. you must convert your certificates and private keys into JKS.Securing communication with CA certificates Ideally.p12 is the file being imported. This file should be stored in the /deployments directory for the Application Server that is being updated. If your CA cannot create a JKS file and instead provides you with a PKCS12 file. the alias you use to identify the certificate must be blade and the format of the keystore must be jks.keystore is the name of the keystore file you are creating. you might enter a command like the following: installDirectory/jre/bin/keytool -importkeystore -srckeystore bladelogic. bladelogic. For information on this process. pkcs12Alias is the alias under which the certificate and private key are stored. If a new password is needed. Chapter 4 Administering security 225 . such as installDirectory/br/deployments/_template.

you are prompted to trust the certificate. If you do not perform this procedure. This procedure is not essential. this command imports the certificate to userHomeDirectory/. This functionality is equivalent to the default approach for BMC BladeLogic. and trusted certificates. the certificate that you import into the client’s trust store should be the issuing certificate for the top of the certificate chain. a user must provide an authentication profile.pkcs12. this command imports the certificate to C:\Documents and Settings\ user\Application Data\BladeLogic\client_keystore. To use blcred.pkcs12. If the Application Server is provisioned with a certificate chain. This file must use the PEM or DER format. This file could be the Application Server’s certificate file. Using the blcred utility The blcred utility manages authentication profiles. On Windows. the Authentication Service issues a session credential. when you establish a connection to the Application Server.Using the blcred utility Importing CA-issued certificates into clients If you have provisioned an Application Server to use a certificate or certificate chain obtained from a Certificate Authority (see “Securing communication with CA certificates” on page 224). On UNIX.PEM. Use the blcred utility to import the certificate into the client trust store by entering the following command: blcred cert -import certificateFile In this command certificateFile provides the path to the certificate you are adding to the trust store.PEM. To log into a BMC BladeLogic system. or it could be a CA’s certificate that can be used to verify the validity of the Application Server’s certificate. session credentials. The related certificate should be the issuing certificate for the Application Server’s certificate.bladelogic/ client_keystore. 226 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . The authentication profile specifies a BMC BladeLogic Authentication Service and the mechanism that should be employed to authenticate the user. you must install the BMC BladeLogic Console. This session credential can be stored in a credential cache file. and password. OCSP verification on the client side will only happen if the CA certificate was imported and the Application Server’s certificate contains an OCSP URL. you should import a related certificate into the client’s trust store. but performing it configures the client so it communicates more securely with the Application Server. which uses self-signed certificates. user name. Once the Authentication Service validates a user.

users do not explicitly use the command line interface to provide AD/Kerberos credentials. ■ ■ Test whether a valid session credential already exists and determine the lifetime remaining for that credential.Using the blcred utility BMC BladeLogic client applications use session credentials to establish secure sessions with a middle tier service—either the Application Service or the Network Shell Proxy Service. After a session credential has expired. or Network Shell Proxy Server. BMC BladeLogic users can log on and acquire session credentials using the BMC BladeLogic Console or blcred command line utility. and delete authentication profiles. BMC BladeLogic client applications can use a cached session credential when the owner of the credential cache file invokes the client application.COM) and password. add. Session credentials have a finite lifetime. Application Server. — LDAP—distinguished name and password. — PKI—Insert a smart card into a smart card reader and provide the appropriate PIN for that smart card. — SecurID—user name and passcode (PIN plus token code).509 certificates. import. as described below: — SRP—user name and password. add.509 certificates are used when establishing a TLS connection to an LDAP server. — AD/Kerberos—The blcred utility retrieves the AD/Kerberos user credential from the host system's AD/Kerberos credential store. On clients. the blcred utility lets you: ■ Create an authentication profile Acquire a session credential by providing an authentication profile and the appropriate user credentials for each authentication protocol. and delete trusted X. an established client/ server session can continue even though the session credential used to establish that session has expired. it cannot be used to establish a client/server session. When operating in a command line environment. X. — Domain Authentication—User name (in the form user@KRBDOMAIN.COMPANY. However.509 certificates are used when establishing a TLS connection to an Authentication Service. Review. ■ ■ Chapter 4 Administering security 227 . X. Review. On Application Servers. You must insert the smart card before you can use blcred to run the acquire command to obtain a session credential.

If this command is successful. To determine whether a credential's remaining lifetime exceeds a specified number of minutes. If this command is successful. it generates a return code of 0. refer to the man page for blcred. enter a command like the following: blcred cred -test -profile MyProfile -time 500 where 500 is a remaining lifetime in minutes. Interactively obtaining a session credential If you are interactively running Network Shell (in proxy mode) or the BLCLI and you need to obtain a session credential but cannot use the console. Testing for valid session credentials If you are using a command line (BLCLI or Network Shell in proxy mode) and you want to determine whether you have a valid session credential. Typical scenarios The following sections describe some typical scenarios for using blcred. run the following command: blcred cred -acquire 228 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . run the following command: blcred cred -test -profile MyProfile where MyProfile is the name of the authentication profile for which a session credential has been issued.Options Options For a complete description of all available command line options. it generates a return code of 0. which means a valid session credential does exist for MyProfile. which means the MyProfile session credential is valid for at least 500 minutes.

$ blcred cred -acquire profile name: adkProfile Authentication succeeded: acquired session credential Obtaining a session credential by referencing a keytab file If you are running Network Shell or the BLCLI in batch mode and you need to obtain a session credential non-interactively. Alternatively. (Alternatively. user name and password as command line options. blcred cred -acquire -profile srpProfile -username BLAdmin -password ****** Chapter 4 Administering security 229 . you must enter a profile name that calls for AD/Kerberos authentication. but when prompted for an authentication profile name. Instead. as described in “Obtaining a TGT for a BMC BladeLogic client (UNIX only)” on page 201. Note that UNIX users must first manually run a kinit before attempting to authenticate. it retrieves the user’s Kerberos credential from the host operating system’s AD/Kerberos credential cache.Typical scenarios The blcred utility will prompt for an authentication profile name. The example below shows an authentication session that prompts the user for credential information. you can specify the profile name. $ blcred cred -acquire profile name: srpProfile username: BLAdmin password ****** Authentication succeeded: acquired session credential If you are using AD/Kerberos authentication. blcred does not prompt the user for a name or password. you can enter the same command. you can direct blcred to retrieve an SRP user name and password from an SRP keytab file. you need to obtain a session credential non-interactively.) When employing AD/Kerberos authentication.dat Obtaining a session credential using SRP authentication profile If you are running Network Shell or the BLCLI in batch mode. user name and password if the named profile specifies SRP authentication. you can direct blcred to obtain a session credential. using a command like the following blcred cred -acquire -profile srpProfile -i /home/user/user_info. and you are using SRP authentication. you can specify the profile name as a command line option.

1 Destination URLs: service:appsvc. 230 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . which caches your user ID. you must provide a full distinguished name and a password.dat. Displaying the contents of a session credential Using a blcred command like the following. On UNIX. 1 From installDirectory/bin.Generating a user information file Obtaining a session credential using an LDAP authentication profile If you are running Network Shell or the BLCLI in batch mode.exe. you can direct blcred to obtain a session credential. run the command bl_gen_blcli_user_info.bladelogic:blsess://localhost:9841 service:proxysvc. you need to obtain a session credential non-interactively. do one of the following: ■ On Windows. run the command bl_gen_blcli_user_info. password. blcred cred -acquire -profile ldapProfile -username admin -password ****** If you are not using distinguished name templates. 2 Name the file user_info. and you are using LDAP authentication. and role. you only have to provide a partial distinguished name (in this case admin) and an LDAP password.0.0.bladelogic:blsess://localhost:9842 Generating a user information file Use this procedure to generate a user information file. you can display the contents of your current session credential.bladelogic:blauth://localhost:9840 Fri Aug 17 20:57:29 EDT 2007 Sat Aug 18 06:57:29 EDT 2007 127. Username: Authentication: Issuing Service: Expiration Time: Maximum Lifetime: Client address: Authorized Roles: RBACAdmins RBACAdmin SRP service:authsvc. If you are using a distinguished name template. ■ The utility prompts you to create a file name.

To determine the userHomeDirectory for LocalSystem. run Network Shell on the Application Server and enter the following command: echo $USERPROFILE To determine the userHomeDirectory for bladmin. run the following command as root or a user with root privileges: sudo -u bladmin echo $HOME Chapter 4 Administering security 231 . 4 Move the file created in step 2 to one of the locations shown below: ■ Windows: userHomeDirectory\Application Data\BladeLogic \user\user_info.dat file. NOTE When running a Network Shell Script Job based on a Network Shell script that contains CLI commands.user/user_info. password.dat file must be saved in the userHomeDirectory for the LocalSystem account on Windows or the bladmin user on UNIX. the user_info. enter your user name.bladelogic/. and role.Generating a user information file 3 When prompted.dat ■ UNIX: userHomeDirectory/.dat 5 Make sure that only you have permission to access the directory where you have stored the user_info.

Generating a user information file 232 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .

When a client connects to a server. which clients and users have access to RSCD agents.txt. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 233 .local.Chapter 5 5 Setting up configuration files This chapter describes how to modify BMC BladeLogic configuration files. securecert. and log4crc. secure. and discusses how logging is performed. the client user can be granted permissions on the server using two approaches: through configuration files on the agent (a process called user privilege mapping) or through Windows user mapping.txt files reside on each server (that is. each machine where an RSCD agent is installed). The secure files on both the client and server configure how clients communicate with servers. The exports. The configuration files control how communication occurs between RSCD agents and their clients. users. and log4crc. The chapter also provides an overview of logging in BMC BladeLogic. securecert. Introduction to the configuration files BMC BladeLogic provides the following configuration files: exports users users.txt files are also installed for each client installation. The secure. even if there are multiple client installations on the same machine.local secure securecert log4crc. users.

0 or later can recognize automation principals. 234 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . When a user is using a Network Shell client to connect to servers via a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server. For more information. or exports files.Introduction to the configuration files In BMC BladeLogic. Using this technique. see the man page for the chapw command. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. Consequently. these files define what permissions apply during the connection. see “Setting up a Network Shell Client to run in proxy mode” on page 147. When you are using Windows user mapping to grant permissions to roles. the standard approach to granting user permission on managed servers is user privilege mapping. even if you are using Windows user mapping. Disabling user privilege mapping BMC BladeLogic provides a mechanism for disabling user privilege mapping on Windows servers. When a user is accessing a Windows server and the user’s role is not mapped to a Windows user through an automation principal. The information in these entries defines whether users can access a server. For information on implementing Windows user mapping. users.local configuration files. you should still push agent ACLs to servers when you add or modify user or role information in the BMC BladeLogic Console. The alternative approach to user privilege mapping is to implement Windows user mapping. For more information on configuring clients to use a Network Shell Proxy Server. and users. NOTE Only Windows servers running BMC BladeLogic 8. Together. When a user is running a Network Shell script defined to use the first and second script types and the appserver_protocol setting in the secure file is not set to ssoproxy. When a user runs a Network Shell client to connect directly to a server. This approach should always be used in the following situations: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ When a user is accessing any UNIX server. you can grant permissions to roles that are mapped to local or domain users who are authorized for a Windows server. you must still create entries for the users. It uses a combination of the exports.local. users. Any user mapping information in these entries is ignored for roles that employ Windows user mapping through automation principals.

An Application Server’s secure file specifies how the Application Server communicates with agents and how the file server (typically created on the same host as the Application Server) communicates with clients. With the exports file you can also establish global user permissions.txt—Controls logging in BMC BladeLogic so that all events are logged using consistent formats.509 certificates. BMC BladeLogic recommends that you always use secadmin. Strong security for communication requires X. Although you can edit the secure file by hand.local—Set access permissions for individual users that communicate with a server. RSCD agents. you can also control the rolling of log files. Typically. A server’s secure file specifies how an agent communicates with clients. ■ log4crc. a single machine can have multiple client installations. Application Servers. Storing passphrases lets BMC BladeLogic access private keys without any need for user interaction. ■ secure—Sets communication parameters that define how client and server machines communicate.txt. (For more information on RBAC.) You can use the users. With log4crc. A utility called secadmin allows you to configure the secure file on a particular machine. users and users.) A client’s secure file specifies how the client communicates with agents.local file to override any permissions defined in the users file. and client installations each have their own secure file. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 235 . Permissions set in either the users and users.Configuration file functions Configuration file functions The configuration files function as follows: ■ exports—Sets access permissions for client machines that communicate with a server. so that a single log file cannot get excessively large. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide.509 certificates. the values specified in the users file are ■ automatically generated to implement decisions made in RBAC. The secure file also determines whether a Network Shell client communicates with servers via a Network Shell Proxy Server.local files override any global user permissions defined in the exports file. (On Windows. ■ securecert—Stores passphrases used to encrypt the private keys for X.

0 might look like the following: @192. After the IP address or host name. In the configuration files. A subnet represents a range of IP addresses.0/24 236 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . provide the number of bits in the mask. For example. a subnet designation uses the following format: @<IP address or hostname>/mask The @ symbol indicates that a subnet is being defined.168.10.168.000 @192. or a subnet.255. an IP address.255.255. Subnet designations When designating a host in the configuration files. a subnet with a subnet mask of 255. exports. you can use a resolvable host name.0/24 The following are sample subnet mask definitions: 255.255.Subnet designations The following graphic illustrates how the secure. and users configuration files work together to control access to a server.100.

248 @192.255. Depending on the type of authentication and encryption specified in the secure file.255.255.128 @192.129/25 255.How BMC BladeLogic grants access to RSCD agents 255.225/27 255.100.168.” For more information on using on the secure file.249/29 How BMC BladeLogic grants access to RSCD agents When a client contacts an RSCD agent.240 @192. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 237 . BMC BladeLogic uses the following algorithm to determine whether a user has permissions for accessing the agent: 1 Every client installation (on Windows there can be multiple clients) and the RSCD agent each have their own secure file. the client uses the information in the entry to establish a connection with the server.255.241/28 255. access to the agent is denied.193/26 255.255.168.168.192 @192. the RSCD agent on the server reads its secure file to determine if it has an entry for the incoming client.255. see “Secure file” on page 253. additional measures may be required before a connection can be successfully established between clients and servers.100. Then.168.100.255. If there is no entry for that client in the secure file of the server. If there is an entry and the communication parameters in the secure file on the server match those in the secure file on the client. see Chapter 4.255.224 @192.100. If an entry for that server exists.100. a connection is established.168. For a complete description of how to set up communication security for a BMC BladeLogic system.255. First. “Administering security. the client reads its secure file to determine whether it includes an entry for a particular server.255.

if you are using Windows user mapping.local and users.How BMC BladeLogic grants access to RSCD agents 2 Assuming the conditions described below are satisfied. you can map a user on a client to a user on a server. 3 Once a connection is established between the client and server. entries in the users. with the user= field. For example. all users are domain users. you can map a user to a domain user.local file take precedence. For more on the exports file. the users file is used to implement the permissions that are defined and granted to users on a system-wide basis through RBAC Management. you can map users to root on UNIX-style systems or Administrator on Windows.00 or later. incoming users can only be mapped to local users. On domain controllers. where the user= field can map users connecting from specified machines to a particular user on the server. Typically. On Windows domain controllers.0. however. To take advantage of Windows user mapping. If any of the following conditions are not satisfied. Network Shell cannot contact an agent directly or communicate through a stand-alone Network Shell Proxy Server. Using the map= field. the users. the incoming role is granted the permissions of a local or domain user on the server and the process if complete. The agent being contacted must be running on a server that has already been added to the BMC BladeLogic system. 238 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . A Network Shell client must be communicating through a Network Shell Proxy Server. 4 The system checks the users. Note that on Windows. — The secure file on the Application Server must be defined so the appserver_protocol option is set to ssoproxy. Any job acting on a target server must be running in an Application Server environment that meets the following criteria: — The Application Server must also be running a Network Shell Proxy Service or the ProxyServiceURLs value in the Application Server profile must point to a valid Network Shell Proxy Server. If a role is mapped to a Windows user through an automation principal. the exports file produces no user mapping.local file is used for granting user permissions on a per-agent basis rather than granting system-wide user privileges. If a role is mapped to a Windows user through an automation principal.local and users configuration files to determine if these files include any map= entries that supersede definitions set in the exports file. the algorithm continues to step 3 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ The agent being contacted must be running on a Windows server. The users.local and users files produce no user mapping. The agent must be running BMC BladeLogic 8. If the same users have entries in both users. the system checks the exports configuration file. see “Exports file” on page 240.

local files” on page 247. In UNIX-style systems. If there is no user named WindowsUser.How BMC BladeLogic grants access to RSCD agents For more on the users and users. 5 If there is no user mapping defined in the exports. or users files. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 239 . if the role is not mapped to an automation principal. see “Users and users.local files. be aware that the validusers= option is treated the same as the allowed= option. access to the agent is denied. and the user that is being mapped to does not exist. the user is assigned that user’s permissions. the system attempts to match the user ID of the incoming user to a user ID defined on the server where the RSCD agent is installed.” Note that on UNIX. mapped to Anonymous unless a corresponding entry for the root= field is found. by default. if you are not using Windows user mapping. if an incoming user is not mapped to an automation principal and that user is a member of the Administrators group. by default. then that user is. If a root= field is found.” On Windows systems. users coming in as root are. you can use the anon= field to specify how to deal with anonymous users. mapped to nobody unless a corresponding entry for the root= field is found. On Windows. Note that. Similarly. on Windows. Similarly.local. on Windows. access is denied. a mapping exists in the exports or users file. by default. users. including rejecting them with anon=-1. users are granted the permissions of user “nobody. On UNIX-style systems. If there is a match. users are granted the permissions of user “Anonymous. 6 If none of the previous steps succeed. For example. any client user found to be a member of the Administrators group cannot be mapped by default to an equivalent user on the server. on Windows. Also. then root equivalence is allowed. the system maps the incoming user to a default user. The anon= field is not supported for Windows. user “root” on a UNIX-style client is not allowed to map to its equivalent user “root” on a UNIX-style server. if an entry in the users file says betty map=WindowsUser then any user named betty that tries to make a connection to this machine is mapped to the local user named WindowsUser.

All subsequent client connections have the access permissions defined in the modified version of the exports file. you cannot establish a connection with an agent. it automatically reads the exports file.) The exports file does not grant permissions on Windows servers to roles that are set up for Windows user mapping. Updating the exports file on the host where you are running Network Shell or other BMC BladeLogic applications does not set access permissions for managed servers. as described in the following table.local files to override those permissions for particular users. When changes are made to the exports file. you can use the exports file to limit all clients to readonly permission on the server. the daemon automatically re-reads it. Then you can use the users or users. when necessary. AIX. Linux. 240 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . With the exports file you can set permissions on a per-client basis and.local files to specify individual users who are granted read/write permission on that server. use the users or users. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. If you are using Windows user mapping to grant permissions to roles. When an rscd daemon starts on a server. For example. the exports file may still include entries that apply to Windows servers. Platform Solaris. WINDIR can be \windows or \winnt. You do not have to restart the agent or otherwise instruct it to read the new exports file. For information on Windows user mapping. Existing client connections are not affected by the changes. HP-UX Windows Location /usr/lib/rsc/exports WINDIR\rsc\exports (For example. The exports file resides in different locations in Windows and UNIX-style systems. Often the exports file is used to set global permission that apply to users on all client machines. Only the user mapping information in the exports file is ignored. If the exports file does not exist or it does not contain any configuration information. Access permissions are defined for each individual RSCD agent and must be configured separately on each host where the RSCD agent is running.Exports file Exports file The exports file determines which BMC BladeLogic clients have access to a server.

Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 241 . When defining multiple options.. If a single option sets multiple values. option1. use the validusers option instead of the allowed= option. If possible. Options for exports file For each of the entries in the exports file.Configuring the exports file Configuring the exports file The exports file consists of multiple entries. as in the following: validusers=user1:user2 Lines in the exports file that begin with # are considered to be comments. This option is similar to the validusers option except that the users named here are not required to have an account on the local system.. resolvable host names. Each option defines a type of access permission that applies to the hosts you have named in that entry. Subnet designations are used to define a range of addresses (see “Subnet designations” on page 236). The allowed= option is read before the validusers= option. with each entry identifying client hosts and the access permissions granted to those hosts. The user names entered here should be the login names of the users on the client machines. separate each value with a colon. Using an asterisk (*) instead of a list of host names defines default options that apply to any host not specifically named in the exports file. or subnet designations. For a complete list of available options. enter options in a comma-separated list. create entries that correlate the host names of clients with the permissions that should be granted to those clients.optionN is a list of comma-separated fields. you can apply any of the options listed below. see “Options for exports file” on page 241... Use the following format for each entry: hostNnames option1. Option allowed=username[:username] Description This option can be used to restrict access to specific users who do not have a local account.optionN hostNnames is a list of comma-separated IP addresses. To configure the exports file.

If the user nobody does not exist. See “Restricting commands” on page 244 for more details on how to use this option. Root users (uid 0) are always considered “unknown” by the RSCD agent unless they are included in the root= option. The default value for anon= is the UID of the user nobody. Setting anon=-1 disables anonymous access. the client is denied access. The ro option takes precedence over the rw option if both are defined. the GID is set to the GID for the user nobody. clients are allowed to create files with the setuid or setgid bits enabled and to set setuid and setgid permission via chown(2). If you specify the nosuid option. (UNIX only. the ro and rw options are ignored.Options for exports file Option anon=uid Description (UNIX only. the corresponding UID and GID are determined and set accordingly. If rw is not set or the host is not listed in the rw= option. The ro option takes precedence over the rw option if both are defined. If a request comes from an unknown user. The default is for no hosts to be granted root access. Specifying the nomknod option instructs the RSCD agent to prevent the client from making a mknod(2) call generating an EACCES (Permission denied) error. root=hostname[:hostname] This option gives root access to root users from specified hosts. nomknod nosuid ro rw All clients have read-write access except those listed in the ro= option. the value 65534 is used. commands=cmd1[:cmd2] By default. If both the ro= and rw= options are defined. The value entered can be numeric or a user name. All clients have read-only access except those listed in the rw= option. rw=hostname[:hostname] Hosts listed in this option are granted read/write permissions. the client is denied access.) This option specifies how unknown users should be treated. If a UID is entered. a corresponding GID is searched for. described below. BMC BladeLogic clients are allowed to execute any command against an agent. clients are allowed to create special files (character special and block special).) By default. If ro is not set or the host is not listed in the ro= option. If the GID is not found. ro=hostname[:hostname] Hosts listed in this option are granted read-only permissions. If both the ro= and rw= options are defined. 242 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . the ro and rw options are ignored. The commands= option allows you to limit the commands a client can execute against an agent. (UNIX only.) By default. Hosts not specified have read-only permissions if ro is defined or they are listed in the ro= option. If a user name is entered. the user is treated as an anonymous user and the effective user ID is uid. Hosts not specified have read/write permissions if rw is defined or they are listed in the rw= option. the RSCD agent silently ignores any attempt to enable the setuid or setgid bits when creating a file or changing a file’s permissions.

you can use the native file naming convention rather than a Network Shellstyle path. the rscd server sets the “root” directory to dirname by making a call to or emulating chroot(2). If the user name entered is not known. If an account is associated with a UID. Clients can only see files and directories from dirname on down. If the client tries to use the rsu command with the -p option (that is. Use /etc/groups to define group names. if a user name or user account SID is entered. If the user name that is entered is not known. the RSCD agent looks at the effective GID of the calling user (as reported by the calling host) and only allows it access if the GID is in the specified list. The client command rsu allows a client to get alternate remote permissions on the agent. By default the client is challenged for the user’s password. See “How BMC BladeLogic grants access to RSCD agents” on page 237 for more details. For each group name and/or GID entered. When setting rootdir= on Windows systems. but with the -p option no password is requested. This option forces all incoming client connections to run with the permissions of username. This option takes precedence over the root= and anon= options if they exist. default user mapping applies. access is denied. For Windows systems. then its corresponding GID is also set. The comparison is done as a numeric equivalency and as such group names must be known on the local system to determine their corresponding GID. rsu=user[:user] user=username validgroups=groupname[:groupname] This option allows you to specify user groups that are allowed access. On Windows. Note that on Windows domain controllers. On UNIX. it is validated against a list of local users on the machine. the rscd server allows the client to “see” the complete directory tree from / on down. no password challenge) and then tries to switch to a user not in the list. you can map a user to a domain user. (For more details on user privilege mapping. The user name you enter is validated against the domain users on the domain controller. Numeric GIDs do not have to correspond to a local group name.) If a numeric UID is entered. you can enter Windows user account SIDs rather than user names. Group information can be provided in the form of group names or numeric GIDs. see “How BMC BladeLogic grants access to RSCD agents” on page 237. The single entry you provide for username can be a user name or a numeric UID (UNIX only). If the GID is not in the list. access to the machine is denied. By specifying the rootdir= option. the connection is refused. Enter user groups in a colon (:) separated list. the UID and GID for the user are determined and set accordingly. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 243 . then the corresponding UID on the server is used even if no known user account is associated with that UID.Options for exports file Option rootdir=dirname Description By default. The rsu= entry defines which users the client is allowed to rsu without challenging them for a password. if a user name is entered.

To allow remote commands. and midair. ls. and netstat. and by the commands a user can run. hostname $ mkdir //athens/tmp/foo //rome/tmp/bar Besides launching external applications. These commands do not have distributed capabilities and run remotely on the server host. pwd. true. from the client’s perspective). For each user name and/or UID that is entered. which each have distributed capabilities. that is. The user information you provide for validusers= can be in the form of user names or numeric UIDs. In some circumstances you may want to restrict the commands a user can execute. and more. by user name. you must 244 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . BMC BladeLogic clients can run two types of commands. This can be done using the commands= option in the exports or users files. The other type of command that a client can run is called a remote command (remote. User names and UIDs must correspond to a locally known user account. kill.) For example.Restricting commands Option validusers=username[:username] Description This option allows you to specify users who are allowed access. To prevent individuals from renaming executables to trick the RSCD agent. If no corresponding user account can be found. The RSCD agent then matches the user name/UID combination to each attempted client connection. each distributed utility contains an encrypted string that is used to hard code the name of the utility into the executable. echo. the connection is refused. df. you also inherently authorize the use of all nsh internal commands against the server. the entry is ignored. Access can be limited by host or subnet. Restricting commands The RSCD agent reads entries in the exports file to determine what access permissions a calling client should have. remote commands include ps. Remote commands do not include this safeguard. such as nsh. A distinction exists between distributed commands and remote commands. The order in which commands are entered and the format of the commands= field affect the way permissions are determined. Enter users in a colon (:) separated list. the nsh utility provides access to many internal commands. the RSCD agent looks up the corresponding UID and user name to create a user name/UID combination. The first are Network Shell utilities. (The process is conceptually similar to doing an rsh. Once you use the commands= option to authorize the nsh command to run against a server. If the user name and UID of the client connection does not exactly match one of the user name/UID combinations generated by the daemon. false. You must first define the allowable distributed commands and then define the allowable remote commands. Given that these commands are internal to nsh. set. including cd. For example. you cannot use the commands= option to explicitly restrict their use.

Once the nexec entry is found. For example. if you enter commands=nsh:nexec:/bin/ps the following commands work as expected (executing from /bin/ps): rome $ nexec athens ps -ef rome $ cd //rome/etc athens $ ps -ef Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 245 . No remote commands such as ps or df are allowed. the last of which should be the nexec command. first you define the distributed commands. The decision to allow or disallow execution of a remote command is based on comparison of the effective (basename) of the command. commands=nexec:df:ps:netstat allows the user to execute all distributed commands but only allows the user to execute three remote commands on this host. In order to ensure that only the desired remote commands are executed. This command does allow the user to do things like: rome $ ls //athens/foo/ If you only want to limit the remote commands that can be executed. Then you define the remote commands. The entry commands=ls:nexec:ps:df allows a user to execute the remote commands ps and df but does not allow a user to cd to the host because cd is not a remote command and the nsh command has not been authorized. you can specify the full pathname of the remote executable. For example. In other words.Restricting commands also allow the distributed command nexec. This prevents users from trying to execute a different executable than the intended one. all subsequent commands in the list are assumed to be remote commands. For example. commands=nsh:mkdir:rmdir allows users to execute Network Shell’s internal commands as well as to create and remove directories. you can leave out the list of distributed commands.

user=Administrator NOTE On Windows. When using the exports file to set up user privilege mapping on Domain Controllers.allowed=sysadmin1:sysadmin2. * rw. on Windows Domain Controllers. Because Windows machines have no inherent concept of root. admin1.user=guest The following example grants read/write access to all users but turns off the setting of setuid/setgid bits and denies unknown users access. a configuration entry something like this example is important if administrators working on Windows clients want to modify the configuration of UNIX servers.rootdir=/reports The following example is a configuration that could be assigned when administrators.nosuid. * ro. However.host5 ro.rootdir=/reports.root=host1 host4. This example grants read-only access to all clients and maps all incoming connections so that users have “guest” privileges.admin2 rw.Examples Examples The following example allows customers access to software updates from servers. The root directory for these users is set to /pubs. A configuration like this is typically necessary if you are deploying BLPackages to Windows machines because you need Administrator privileges to deploy packages.anon=-1 The following example maps incoming connections from machines called admin1 and admin2 to the local user called Administrator. The asterisk means permissions apply to all clients unless there are other entries that define different permissions for specific hosts. the user name entered is validated against a list of local users on the machine. need to manage remote UNIX servers. It grants two users (sysadmin1 and sysadmin2) read/write permission for all servers. * rw. The following example allows both read/write and read-only access for selected hosts.host3 rw.rootdir=/pubs. and it also maps their user privileges to root. map users to Administrator or the administrator account for the domain.host2. granting them root access from only one host and changing the root directory to /reports: host1. all users are domain users.user=root 246 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . who typically work on Windows clients. This entry would be added to the exports file on every remote server being managed by the two administrators.

when user betty attempts to connect to a server. Together these entries are called an access control list (ACL).Users and users.local files The following example demonstrates subnets. The users file is primarily used to implement user permissions that are defined through RBAC. you should first define the exception hosts and then define the default value for the remaining subnet. In this scenario.10.255.168. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 247 . but the users.168.168. The permissions in the users and user.com/26 The following is an example where an address range of 192.local files The users and user.com ro @host1.ro=@192.10.local file is scanned before the users file.local file to override RBAC policy on a particular server.10.local files have the same format.129/25 Users and users.root=host1.local files are defined on a per-user basis. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide.1/25. host1. a user cannot connect to a server unless a matching user name has been defined on a server.com has read/write privileges while everybody else in the subnet (subnet mask 255. The permissions granted in the users and user.168. The agent on a server enforces user permissions defined in an ACL by mapping incoming users to users defined on the server. (For more on RBAC. The agent accomplishes this by doing the following: ■ Incoming users are matched to a user name on the server. Typically the users. Administrators may want to modify the users.255.foo. Both the users and users.foo.1-255 is split up so that the range from 1-127 has read/write privileges while the range 128-255 has readonly privileges.local files grant access permissions to specific users connecting to a server. entries in the users. Running an ACL Push Job automatically converts your role definitions and role assignments into entries in the users file on that server.192) has read-only privileges.com rw. If the same users have entries in both users.local and users.local file is used for granting permissions on a per-server basis rather than granting system-wide user privileges. You can apply RBAC decisions to a server by running an ACL Push Job in the BMC BladeLogic Console.foo. she must operate with the privileges already assigned to user betty on that server.local file take precedence.) With RBAC you define the characteristics of a role and assign users to that role.10.local files override any permissions defined on a per-client basis in the exports file. @192. In the example below the host host1. If you want to have different access (ro/rw) permissions for various hosts within a subnet.foo. In other words.1/24 rw=@192.

local (For example. You do not have to restart the agent or otherwise instruct it to read the new users or users. UNIX users are mapped to user nobody and Windows users are mapped to Anonymous. AIX. If command authorizations are specified on the server in BMC BladeLogic Console and command authorizations are specified for the role. as described in the following table. including permissions for commands. while users connecting to a Windows system can be mapped to Administrator. WINDIR can be \windows or \winnt.local files ■ Incoming users are mapped to a specified user name. If command authorizations are specified on the server in BMC BladeLogic Console but no command authorizations are specified for a role. ■ ■ ■ When you make changes to the users or users. incoming users are automatically mapped to a user with downgraded permissions. If neither of the two previous techniques are possible. Linux. This means the role is authorized to perform only those commands on the agent. all users connecting to a UNIX system can be mapped to root. no command authorizations for that role are pushed to the agent. HP-UX Windows Location /usr/lib/rsc/users /usr/lib/rsc/users. This means the role is authorized to perform those commands on the agent.local WINDIR\rsc\users WINDIR\rsc\users. those command authorizations are pushed to the agent. ■ An ACL Push Job generates users file entries that grant a variety of permissions.local files. This means the role has full authorization to use any Network Shell and nexec commands on that server.local files. This means the role has full authorization to use any Network Shell and nexec commands on that server. If no command authorizations are specified on the server in BMC BladeLogic Console but command authorizations are specified for a role. the RSCD agent automatically detects your new settings and uses them for all subsequent client connections. The users and users.) 248 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . the command authorizations common to both are pushed to the agent. no command authorizations for that role are pushed to the agent. The job uses the following algorithm to create users file entries relating to command authorizations: ■ If no command authorizations are specified on the server in the BMC BladeLogic Console and no command authorizations are specified for a role.Users and users. Platform Solaris. For example.local files reside in different locations in Windows and UNIX-style systems.

Configuring the users or users.local files The users and users. Only the user mapping information in the users and users. For example. hosts=host1:host2. The first field provides a role and a user name.local files is ignored for roles that employ Windows user mapping through automation principals. For a complete list of available permissions.local files” on page 251. separate each value with a colon. separated by a colon. The second field is a commaseparated list of permissions that apply to the user defined in the first field. No role is necessary because Network Shell does not recognize roles. separate each value with a colon. the users or users. even if you are using Windows user mapping. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 249 .local files should still include an entry for each role so that role can be granted access to a Windows server.local files” on page 251.local files Both the users and users. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. the first field in a users file entry provides only a user name. Each entry grants permissions to a user. see “Options for users and users. However. For information on Windows user mapping.local files do not grant permissions on Windows servers to roles that are set up for Windows user mapping. For example. such as BLAdmins:BLAdmin. see “Options for users and users. All other settings still apply. For Network Shell users that are not communicating with servers through a Network Shell Proxy Server. The name of a Network Shell user should match the name of the user on the client host who is attempting to make a connection to this server. If an option sets multiple values. For a complete list of available permissions. The second field is a comma-separated list of permissions that apply to the user defined in the first field. The format of each entry consists of two fields. hosts=host1:host2. If an option sets multiple values. Consequently.local files are a list of entries. you should still push agent ACLs to servers when you add or modify user or role information in the BMC BladeLogic Console.Configuring the users or users.

BMC BladeLogic places a nouser entry in the users file if that server has a property called PUSH_ACL_NO_USERS_FLAG set to true.local file The users. For example.map=root rw.map=root nouser If george and betty communicate with the server by means of a Network Shell Proxy Server. the Network Shell entries shown above would not be necessary. In these entries george and betty are not paired with any role # DBAdmins ACLs entries for DBAdmins role DBAdmins:george DBAdmins:betty rw.local file. 250 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . DBAdmins is the role and george and betty are users.local files that begin with # are considered to be comments. In this example. Below these entries.Configuring the users or users. This capability is unique to the users. All users in the role are mapped to root.map=root rw. When you use an ACL Push Job to push a users file to a server. The users file can also include a nouser entry. you could create a users file entry such as: SecOps:* rw.local files Below is a sample users file with entries for DBAdmins:george and DBAdmins:betty.local file allows you to use a wild card in place of user names when defining role:user combinations. Including this entry instructs a server to allow a connection from a user only when that user has been explicitly defined in the users configuration file. The entries for DBAdmins:george and DBAdmins:betty would grant george and betty access to this server. Using wild cards in the users. two more entries grant george and betty access to this server using Network Shell.map=root An entry like this grants read/write access to all users who have assumed the role of SecOpcs.map=root # NSH-only ACLs entries for Network Shell users george betty rw. Lines in the users and user.

. This entry tells the RSCD agent that permissions should only apply if the user named in the first field is connecting from one of the hosts in this list of colon (:) separated host names and/or addresses. You do not have to update entries in the users. If you choose to rename the RBACAdmins or BLAdmins roles. exists hosts=hosts1[:host2 .. you can temporarily allow all users in a role to access a server without first running an ACL Push Job to change the users file on that server. the entry applies to the user named in the first field regardless of what host that user is connecting from. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 251 . the corresponding entry in the exports file determines what commands the user can run. If no hosts field is provided.] This is a list of colon (:) separated commands that the user is allowed to execute on the local host. they provide a way to access a server in case you accidentally revoke everyone else’s permissions for that server.Options for users and users. By performing a modification like this... TIP BMC BladeLogic recommends adding an entry for RBACAdmins:RBACAdmin and BLAdmins:BLAdmin to the users.local files Identifying users with a wild card provides some benefits.local file override entries in the users file.local files The users and users.) This entry tells the RSCD agent that an account with the same user name must exist on this host. Thus an entry like the one shown above overrides any more restrictive settings defined for the role using RBAC.] (Unix only. running an ACL Push Job may first require a lengthy change control process. the entries you make in the users. Options for users and users.local file when users are added to or removed from a group.local file should reflect those naming decisions. Entries in the users. In some organizations. Using wild cards for user names in the users.local file is a capability that should be used sparingly. Using a wild card like this also lets you authorize all members of a role to perform certain types of actions. See “Restricting commands” on page 244 for more details on the use of this field.local file for every server.local files provide the following options that you can use to assign access permissions to users: Option Description commands=cmd1[:cmd2 . Because these roles cannot be deleted. If no commands= option is given.

This is a special user name that denies user access to the server unless the user has an entry specifically configured in the users or users. nomknod nosuid nouser ro rootdir=dirname rsu=user1[:user2 . The rsu= entry defines which users the client is allowed to rsu without challenging them for a password. see “How BMC BladeLogic grants access to RSCD agents” on page 237.. user1 and user2 can access this server from any other server. do not associate those users with a role but do 252 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . who are associated with the role of SrAdmin. the RSCD agent allows the client to “see” the complete directory tree from / on down.local file. no password challenge) and then tries to switch to a user not in the list. If you specify the nosuid option. By default. For more information. clients are allowed to create files with the setuid or setgid bits enabled and to set setuid and setgid permission via chown(2). For Windows systems.local files. server access is limited to users specifically included in the users or users. The third and fourth entries.local files. (Unix only. which are for user1 and user2.) By default. This entry tells the daemon that the user name/UID/GID combination of the remote (incoming) user must match a user name/UID/GID combination on the local host. When the nouser name is included in the users or users. or emulating. Both users are mapped to Administrator on this server. Because no hosts field is provided. you can enter a Windows user account SID rather than a user name. By specifying the rootdir entry.. chroot(2). Specifying the nomknod option instructs the RSCD agent to prevent the client from making an mknod(2) call. By default the client is challenged for the respective user’s password but with the -p option no password is requested. the RSCD agent silently ignores any attempt to enable the setuid or setgid bits when creating a file or changing a file’s permissions.Examples Option map=username Description This entry forces incoming client connections to run with the permissions of username. If the client tries to use the rsu command with the -p option (that is. The named user has read-only access. The client command rsu allows a client to get alternate remote permissions on the agent. (Unix only.] rw validuser Examples In the following example. The named user has read/write access. clients are allowed to create special files (character special and block special). generating an EACCES (Permission denied) error.) By default. Clients can then see files and directories from dirname on down. the first and second entries in the users file grant read/ write access to user1 and user2. access is denied. the RSCD agent sets the “root” directory to dirname by making a call to.

users. user2 is granted read-only permission. The last entry forbids access to all users who are not specified in the users file.local files” on page 247).rw.map=Anonymous nouser The following example in the users.local files control user access to servers (see “Exports file” on page 240 and “Users and users.validuser rw. The secure file for a client application defines parameters that BMC BladeLogic applications use to communicate with the RSCD agent on a server. These entries are used for granting permissions to Network Shell users. then user1 is only given access to the /data directory and granted the permissions of user3. user1 user2 user1 user2 hosts=host1:host2. who is associated with the role of JrAdmin and is mapped to Anonymous on this server.local file grants read/write access to user1 and user2 and forbids access to all other users.validuser hosts=host1:host2. The fifth entry grants read-only access to user3. user1 user2 rw rw nouser Secure file The secure file defines how BMC BladeLogic applications for a client installation and the RSCD agent on a server communicate with each other.map=Administrator user1 rw. The secure file on the server defines parameters that the RSCD agent uses to communicate with BMC BladeLogic applications on clients. or Network Shell Proxy Server that communicates directly with an RSCD agent or repeater. If user2 is not connecting from host1 or host2.map=Administrator JrAdmin:user3 ro. BMC BladeLogic Application Server. SrAdmin:user1 rw. If user1 is not connecting from host1 or host2. and users.local file grants read/write access to user1 and user2 if they are connecting from either host1 or host2 and they have a local account with the same user name and user ID as they do on the host from which they are connecting. In this discussion.rw. The exports.rootdir=/data.map=Administrator user2 rw.Secure file map them to user Administrator.map=Administrator SrAdmin:user2 rw. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 253 . a client application can be a Network Shell client.map=user3 ro The following example in the users.

The following table shows how the location of the secure file on Windows varies between the first instance and all subsequent instances. Always use the secadmin utility to modify the secure file. the application first checks the secure file for a client to see how the connection should be established. If an entry for the remote host is not found. The port number can be set with an entry in the Internet services databases (for example. you can have multiple instances of BMC BladeLogic client applications. Name and location of secure file for first instance of BMC BladeLogic /usr/lib/rsc/secure Platform Solaris Linux AIX HP-UX Windows Name and location of secure file for additional instances Not applicable WINDIR\rsc\secure installDirectoryN\version\NSH\conf\secure For example. See Chapter 4. The secure file resides in different locations in Windows and UNIX-style systems. C:\Program Files\BMC Software\ BladeLogic2\version\NSH. client and server processes communicate via TCP/IP port 4750 with the server process listening on all configured NIC (Network Interface Card) addresses. and the secure file By default. WINDIR can be For example.Clients. Clients. For simpler security installations. or sent as clear text. /etc/services). each with their own secure file. servers. and the secure file When a BMC BladeLogic application on a client attempts to connect to an RSCD daemon on a server. For more information. as described in the following table. Using the secadmin utility ensures that the secure file is formatted correctly. On Windows. the default location for the second instance of BMC BladeLogic would be \windows or \winnt. If an entry for the target server exists in the secure file. the application searches for an entry 254 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . servers. you need only modify the secure file to establish how data is communicated between clients and servers. see “Using the secadmin utility” on page 258. “Administering security” for a full description of all the procedures needed to implement security in a BMC BladeLogic system. Stronger security requires additional modifications to a system. the application checks the secure file to see if and how the connection should be redirected and whether data should be encoded. encrypted.

the daemon listens by default to port 4750 (or as otherwise defined in the Internet services databases). The RSCD daemon cannot listen to a port on a list of specified NICs. see “Configuring the secure file” on page 255. If no entry for the connecting host is found. the successor to SSL. To determine where to listen for connection requests. as described in “Options for secure file” on page 258). the RSCD daemon again refers to the secure file to determine what data encoding/encryption it should expect from the client host. Communication protocol Protocol 5. It looks for an entry for a host named rscd. see “Session layer security” on page 118. the daemon uses the default values from the rscd entry. If such an entry exists.Communication protocol called default to determine how the connection to the remote host should be made. TCP is a bi-directional virtual circuit protocol. If an rscd entry is found. see “Configuring the secure file” on page 255. protocol 5 uses Transport Layer Security (TLS). For a more detailed description of the capabilities of this suite. you can make three types of entries: ■ ■ default rscd Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 255 . By default. (For more on configuring the rscd entry. the agent uses the connection parameters defined in that entry. (For more on configuring entries in the secure file. the BMC BladeLogic default communication protocol.) If the secure file does not include an entry for the remote host or a default entry. As such. The RSCD first checks for an entry for the connecting host.) The RSCD daemon can listen on a specified port on all available NICs or a particular NIC (specified using the host= field. when a client establishes a connection to an RSCD daemon on a server. BMC BladeLogic clients and RSCD agents use the TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA cipher suite. When a client establishes a connection. the RSCD daemon consults the secure file on the server. it can only listen on one NIC or all NICs. that connection is used to both send and receive data. establishes rules for communication between BMC BladeLogic clients and Application Servers and the RSCD agent. If an entry is not found. which automatically negotiates the strongest form of encryption that clients and servers can support. Configuring the secure file When configuring the secure file. The rscd entry can specify which port and address to listen to for connection requests and it can specify default communication parameters. the software treats it as a special entry used by the RSCD daemon. In other words. the attempt to establish a connection is aborted.

see “Using the secadmin utility” on page 258... Each option in the list defines a parameter for communicating with all servers that do not have a host entry specifically defined for them. The default entry specifies that the client use protocol 5 and instructs clients and servers to communicate using the TLS protocol for secure communication. or the RSCD agent. the BMC BladeLogic consoles. 256 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . a default entry is automatically created in the secure file. A default entry in the secure file uses the following format: default:option1:option2:option3.Configuring the secure file ■ host Always use the secadmin utility to configure the secure file. For a complete list of available options. see “Options for secure file” on page 258. An rscd entry in the secure file uses the following format: rscd:option1:option2:option3. The secadmin utility encrypts any keys needed for data encryption and guarantees that the secure file is formatted correctly. The default entry also designates the default port as 4750. It defines connection parameters for servers that otherwise do not have an entry in the secure file. When you initially install Network Shell. where optionN is a list of colon-separated fields. It defines standard connection parameters that are used for an RSCD agent on a server communicating with clients when those clients are not included in the list of host entries on the server’s secure file. Creating a default entry is an easy way to define the same communication parameters for multiple servers without having to configure entries for each of those servers. Default entry The secure file allows for a special host name called default. Creating an rscd entry is an easy way to define the same communication parameters for all of the servers in your system that are not otherwise configured in the secure file. The default entry that is automatically generated in a client’s secure file reads as follows: default:port=4750:protocol=5:tls_mode=encryption_only:encryption=tls rscd entry The secure file allows for another special host name called rscd.. For more information..

Host entries in the secure file on a client set connection parameters that define how that client communicates with individual servers. For a complete list of available options. Each option defines a parameter for communicating with the host (or subnet) named in hostName. Subnet designations are used to define a range of addresses (see “Subnet designations” on page 236). Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 257 ... The rscd entry also designates the default port as 4750. You must make corresponding entries in the secure file on both the client and server to establish a connection between client and server. Each option in the list defines a parameter for communicating with all agents that do not have a host entry specifically defined for them. see “Options for secure file” on page 258.Configuring the secure file where optionN is a list of colon-separated fields. hostName can be a resolvable host name. For a complete list of available options. where. To configure host entries in the secure file. The rscd entry specifies that the RSCD agent use protocol 5 and instructs clients and servers to communicate using the TLS protocol for secure communication. Use the following format for each entry: hostName:option1:option2:option3. IP address. optionN is a list of colon-separated fields. When you initially install an RSCD agent on a server. or subnet designation. create entries that define parameters for a connection with a particular host. you must restart both the Application Server as well as the RSCD agent on the system(s) where you changed the secure file for the change to take effect. see “Options for secure file” on page 258. NOTE If you change the RSCD agent port number in the secure file. hostName is the host with which the client or server is communicating. an rscd entry is automatically created in the secure file. The rscd entry that is automatically generated in the secure file on a server reads as follows: rscd:port=4750:protocol=5:tls_mode=encryption_only:encryption=tls Host entries Host entries in the secure file on a server set connection parameters that define how that server communicates with individual clients.

modify. and host4 by entering the following command on each of those servers: secadmin -m host1 -p 5 -T encryption_only -e tls If you are using secadmin on a server where Network Shell is not installed. host3.Options for secure file Using the secadmin utility With the secadmin utility. By default. you can create. you must use secadmin to modify the secure file on host2. or delete default or rscd entries in the secure file. you can find secadmin in the following locations: ■ UNIX: /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/secadmin Windows: C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\RSCD\secadmin ■ For a complete description of the secadmin utility. Example If you are using protocol 5 and you want to specify TLS-style encryption between a client called host1 and three servers called host2. you would use secadmin to make the following additions to the secure file on host1: secadmin -a host2 -p 5 -T encryption_only -e tls secadmin -a host3 -p 5 -T encryption_only -e tls secadmin -a host4 -p 5 -T encryption_only -e tls Next. host3. or delete entries in a secure file. Options for secure file An entry in the secure file can include the following fields: 258 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . the secadmin utility lets you modify entries in the securecert file. modify. you must include the full path to the secadmin utility when running a secadmin command. You can also create. Additionally. and host4. see the man page for secadmin.

Be aware. In a LAN environment the overhead required for compressing and uncompressing data is usually greater than the time saved transferring compressed data. If a system has a single NIC card. The host= field should only be used for systems with multiple NIC cards (real or virtual) so you can select the NIC (address) to which the RSCD agent should listen. You can set protocol to the following: ssoproxy Use the single sign-on functionality when communicating with the Network Shell Proxy Server. where a higher number calls for better compression.Options for secure file Option Description appserver_protocol=protocol This field specifies the authentication protocol used when communicating with a Network Shell Proxy Server. Typically you should use compression when communicating through a thin pipe. which specifies that BMC BladeLogic should automatically negotiate an encryption method (usually AES). This field specifies whether the agent should send TCP keepalive messages to the other side of a connection. compression=value This field sets a data compression level. see “Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service” on page 142. ■ When applied to a non-rscd entry. set value to a number between 1 and 9. Set this field to tls. This field determines the type of data encryption that should be used. then it will be the responsibility of the of the remote daemon to forward the data to an RSCD daemon and also return any data it may return. that better compression is more CPU intensive. If you want to use data compression. If keep-alive messages are sent. encryption=type host=value keepalive=value Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 259 . the host= field determines the address to which the agent should listen for client connections. is yes. depending on whether a secure file entry defines the special host name rscd: ■ When applied to an rscd entry. The default value. By default. Possible values for this field are yes or no. For more on Network Shell Proxy Servers. This is the default value for appserver_protocol. if unset. If TCP keep-alives are not sent. If the remote daemon to which the data is being sent is not another RSCD daemon. This field is used differently. sessions may hang indefinitely leaving hung processes or threads on the agent. the connecting system will notice the death of a connection or a machine crash. you do not have to set this field because the agent automatically listens on the default system NIC card (address). the host= field can be used to redirect data between hosts. however. data is not compressed.

Options for secure file

Option lock=value

Description When set to a non-zero positive value, this field determines the maximum number of times a bad connection is allowed from a source address before the address is locked. A bad connection can happen if encryption is not set up properly or a particular host is not granted access. The address is locked for a period of time as defined by the unlock= field (see below). This field can be used to redirect data to a port other than the default port of 4750. On most UNIX systems, access to port numbers under 1024 requires root permissions. When selecting an alternate port number, make sure it does not conflict with some other existing service. Also, when using this field, make sure that both the client and server machines are configured to use the same port number. This field determines the transport protocol used for communication between BMC BladeLogic applications and the RSCD agent. Protocol 5, the default protocol, uses the TLS protocol (TLS is the successor to SSL) for communication between client and server. This field identifies the authentication profile that should be used to provide session credentials to Network Shell when communicating with a Network Shell Proxy Server. If you need to use multiple Network Shell Proxy Servers, you can set up a different secure file entry for each profile. Using the BL_AUTH_PROFILE_NAME environment variable, you can override the value defined with this field. For more on Network Shell Proxy Servers, see “Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service” on page 142. This field provides the Network Shell-style path to the file containing authentication profile definitions, which are necessary when Network Shell communicates with a Network Shell Proxy Server. Using the BL_AUTH_PROFILES_FILE, you can override the value defined with this option. For more on Network Shell Proxy Server, see “Configuring the Network Shell Proxy Service” on page 142. When first contacting a remote server, the TCP protocol may continue to contact an offline or unavailable server for several minutes before finally giving up and reporting that a server is unavailable. This option lets you set the maximum number of seconds that a client will wait before giving up. The default value is 30 seconds. This timeout mechanism is implemented within the BMC BladeLogic code and does not in any way alter any system wide TCP parameters. If the operating system has an effective TCP timeout less than the value defined here, the OS value will take precedence.

port=value

protocol=value

auth_profile=profile

auth_profiles_file=filename

timeout=secs

260

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

Examples

Option tls_mode=value

Description When using protocol 5, this field specifies one of the following values: encryption_only Use the TLS protocol to autonegotiate an encryption type (that is, a cipher) and then use that cipher to communicate. Client-side authentication or certificates are not required. Use TLS for encryption and clientside authentication. This option requires a certificate. For more on certificates, see “Implementing security – Application Server to agents or repeaters” on page 202.

encryption_and_auth

unlock=value

This field is used in conjunction with the lock= field, which allows you to lock out IP addresses that repeatedly fail to connect to the (RSCD agent) server. These failures are limited to encryption misconfigurations and host authorization errors. With the unlock= field, you can specify how many minutes the IP address should be locked before allowing connection attempts to resume. If value is a negative number, the IP address is locked until the RSCD agent is restarted. The default value for unlock= is 1 minute. This field turns off X11 forwarding. By default this field is set to on and X11 forwarding is enabled for this agent. This field defines an offset from 6000, and together these values specify the port that the agent binds to for X11 forwarding. By default X11 forwarding starts at port 6010 (6000 plus an offset of 10). Any new connections afterwards increments the offset by one (that is, 6011, 6012, and so forth).

x11_fwd=on |off x11_port_offset=value

Examples
The following examples are meant to serve as sample uses of the fields available in a secure file. To generate entries in a secure file like those shown below, use the secadmin utility. Using the secadmin utility ensures that the secure file is formatted correctly. For more information, see “Using the secadmin utility” on page 258. The following example shows a typical default entry for BMC BladeLogic clients.
default:port=4750:protocol=5:encryption=tls

The following example shows a subnet in an entry:
@192.168.12.13/24:protocol=5:encryption=tls

Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files

261

Securecert file

The following example instructs a Network Shell client to communicate with a Network Shell Proxy Server using an authentication profile called QAProfile. The authentication profile is stored in the default location for the authentication profile file: default:protocol=5:encryption=tls:appserver_protocol=ssoproxy: auth_profile=QAProfile:auth_profiles_file=/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/br/ authenticationProfiles.xml The following example shows how to use a port other than the default port of 4750. If you use host1 as the client host and host2 as the remote host, the following entry should be in the secure file of host1
host2:port=987

while the following entry should be in the secure file of host2:
host1:port=987

The following example shows how to instruct the RSCD agent to listen on a specific address for client connections: rscd:host=192.168.10.20

Securecert file
The securecert file stores passphrases used to encrypt the private keys for X.509 certificates. By storing passphrases in the securecert file, BMC BladeLogic can access those passphrases without any user interaction. Accessing passwords noninteractively is essential for setting up secure, certificate-based communication with an Application Server. It is also necessary when using secure communication to deploy assets via repeaters (that is, with an indirect deployment). When setting up a securecert file for an Application Server, you must provide an entry for the owner of the process that communicates securely with repeaters and servers. The owner of the process is bladmin on UNIX-style systems and SYSTEM on Windows. When setting up a securecert file for a repeater, you must provide an entry for all users that communicate with servers. On UNIX-style systems, you must provide an entry for any users to whom other users are mapped (typically root). On Windows, you must provide an entry for the user named BMC BladeLogicRSCD. For more information on using the securecert file while setting up security for a BMC BladeLogic system, see Chapter 4, “Administering security.”.

262

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

Configuring the securecert file

The securecert file resides in different locations on Windows and UNIX-style systems, as described in the following table. On Windows, you can have multiple instances of BMC BladeLogic client applications, each with their own securecert file. The following table shows how the location of the securecert file on Windows varies between the first instance and all subsequent instances.
Name and location of securecert file for first Name and location of securecert file for instance of BMC BladeLogic additional instances /usr/lib/rsc/securecert Not applicable

Platform Solaris Linux AIX HP-UX Windows

WINDIR\rsc\securecert For example, WINDIR can be \windows or \winnt.

installDirectoryN\version\NSH\conf\ securecert For example, the default location for the second instance of BMC BladeLogic would be C:\Program Files\BMC Software\ BladeLogic2\version\NSH.

Configuring the securecert file
When configuring a securecert file, you can make entries for the Application Server and repeaters. On the Application Server, create an entry like the following for the owner of the process that communicates securely with repeaters and servers:
[Default] processOwner=********

where processOwner is bladmin for UNIX-style systems and SYSTEM for Windows. You must use the secadmin utility to modify a securecert file. (For more on secadmin, see “Using the secadmin utility” on page 258 or the man page for secadmin). To create an entry like the one shown above using the secadmin utility, enter the following command:
secadmin -m default -cu bladmin -cp password

Enter the password in clear text. The secadmin utility encrypts the password. On repeaters, create an entry like the following for the administrative user that communicates with servers:

Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files

263

BMC BladeLogic log file reference

[Default] adminUser=********

where adminUser is typically root for UNIX-style systems and BladeLogicRSCD for Windows. Using the secadmin utility to create the entry like the one shown above, enter the following command:
secadmin -m default -cu root -cp password

BMC BladeLogic log file reference
About logging configuration for BMC BladeLogic
BMC BladeLogic uses log4j to capture log messages from the console and the BMC BladeLogic Application Server. Log4j is an open source logging framework used to control logging output from Java applications. For more information on log4j, see http://jakarta.apache.org/log4j/docs/. Unless instructed otherwise by BladeLogic Support, the default logging configuration is recommended for normal operation. BladeLogic Support may ask the Application Server Administrator to enable DEBUG logging for a single logger when debugging a particular issue. This change will typically be backed out once the requested DEBUG information has been gathered.

Overview of BMC BladeLogic log files
A standard BMC BladeLogic installation provides default logging behavior that satisfies the needs of many organizations. Defaults vary for Windows and UNIX-style systems. The default behavior for Windows is:

The RSCD agent logs to rscdInstallDirectory\rscd.log as a rollfile at the info1 level. The RSCD agent service logs to rscdInstallDirectory\rscdsvc.log as a rollfile at the info level. BLPackage Deploy Jobs log at the debug level to locations based on the name and location of the jobs.

264

BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

Overview of BMC BladeLogic log files

BLPackage Deploy Jobs on the console log to stdout as a stream at the debug level. The priority level can be overridden using Transaction Options when defining the BLPackage Deploy Job. For more information, see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. The Application Server logs to installDirectory\br\appserver.log as a stream at the info level.

The default behavior for UNIX is:

The RSCD agent logs to rscdInstallDirectory/log/rscd.log as a rollfile at the info1 level. BLPackage Deploy Jobs log at the debug level to locations based on the name and location of the jobs. BLPackage Deploy Jobs on the console log to stdout as a stream at the debug level. The priority level can be overridden using Transaction Options when defining the BLPackage Deploy Job. For more information, see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. The Application Server logs to installDirectory/br/appserver.log as a stream at the info level.

Table 1 lists the various log files that are used by BMC BladeLogic which may be of interest to you. Table 1 Overview of BMC BladeLogic log files (part 1 of 3)
Description and default location Application Server appserver.log Application Server log installDirectory/br/appserver.log Infrastructure Management => AppServer Launcher => Edit AppServer LogfileName attribute installDirectory/br/deployments/ deploymentName/log4j.properties AppServerLauncher.log AppServer Launcher log installDirectory/br/ AppServerLauncher.log post_install.log Application Server configuration log installDirectory/br/post_install.log installDirectory/br/deployments/ deploymentName/log4j.properties installDirectory/br/deployments/ _template/log4j.properties Where to configure

Log file name

Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files

265

Overview of BMC BladeLogic log files

Table 1

Overview of BMC BladeLogic log files (part 2 of 3)
Description and default location Application Server Console log installDirectory/br/Console.log Where to configure Infrastructure Management => AppServer Launcher => Edit AppServer ConsoleLogfileName attribute installDirectory/deployments/ deploymentName/log4j.properties RSCD Agent (Windows)

Log file name Console.log

rscd.log*

Windows RSCD Agent log rscdInstallDirectory\rscd.log

rscdInstallDirectory\log4crc.txt

keystroke.log*

nexec session log rscdInstallDirectory\keystroke.log*

rscdInstallDirectory\log4crc.txt

rscdsvc.log*

RSCD agent service rscdInstallDirectory\rscdsvc.log

rscdInstallDirectory\log4crc.txt

*.log

Deploy Job log rscdInstallDirectory\Transactions\log\*.log RSCD Agent (UNIX)

rscdInstallDirectory\log4crc.txt

rscd.log*

UNIX RSCD Agent log rscdInstallDirectory/log/rscd.log

rscdInstallDirectory/log4crc.txt

keystroke.log*

nexec session log rscdInstallDirectory/log/keystroke.log*

rscdInstallDirectory/log4crc.txt

*.log

Deploy Job log rscdInstallDirectory/Transaction/log/*.log RCP Client (Windows)

rscdInstallDirectory/log4crc.txt

.log

BMC BladeLogic Console log WindowsHomeDirectory\BladeLogic\ 1_1_2\Workspacen\.metadata\.log

installDirectory\br\rcp.cf

BLWorkbenchPlugin.log BLWorkbenchPlugin log WindowsHomeDirectory\BladeLogic\ 1_1_2\Workspacen\.metadata\.plugins\ com.bladelogic.client.ui\ BLWorkbenchPlugin.log RCP Client (UNIX) .log BMC BladeLogic Console log /root/.bladelogic/1_1_2/Workspacen/ .metadata/.log 266 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide

installDirectory\br\rcp.cf

installDirectory/br/rcp.cf

client.bladelogic/blcli. which is located in the Application Server installation directory for that deployment. the file is located in installDirectory/br/deployments/deploymentName/log4j.log* BLCLI (Windows) blcli.properties file. By default. Within the configuration files for each specific deployment.plugins/ com.cf Log file name BLWorkbenchPlugin.log BLCLI Windows log C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Application Data\BladeLogic\blcli. logging is controlled by the log4j.log file.metadata/.cf C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Application Data\BladeLogic\blcli-log.log installDirectory/br/deployments/ _pxe/log4j.log* TFTP Server log installDirectory/br/tftpsvr. also located in the Application Server installation directory for the specific deployment.properties configuration file.cf Application Server logging Logging is controlled at the Application Server instance level.log BLCLI (UNIX) blcli.log PXE server pxesrvr.log BLCLI UNIX log /.properties By default.log* PXE Server log installDirectory/br/pxesrvr.cf /.ui/ BLWorkbenchPlugin.properties installDirectory/br/tftpsvr.bladelogic/blcli-log.log* tftpsvr. The following sections provide information on the log4j.bladelogic/1_1_2/Workspacen/ .log BLWorkbenchPlugin log /root/.Application Server logging Table 1 Overview of BMC BladeLogic log files (part 3 of 3) Description and default location Where to configure installDirectory/br/rcp. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 267 . Application Server logging output is written to the appserver.bladelogic.

locate the timing for deploy jobs section in the file and uncomment the lines in that section. When debugging specific issues with the system. the maximum log file size is 5000KB. locate the Content Authoring related debug logs section in the file and uncomment the lines in that section.MaxBackupIndex option.appender. This option instructs the log4j system to use the specified path for logging. you can modify one or more of the specified loggers in the file to set the log level to DEBUG. Modifying basic logging attributes Table 2 on page 268 describes some of the basic log attributes that can be controlled by modifying options in the log4j.properties In addition to controlling the logging information. By default. You can set the maximum file size for the log file using the log4j. To do so. the log4j. You can enable logging of performance-related information pertaining to the Application Server.R.properties file. This section describes how to manipulate some of the basic properties of the configuration file.R. There are comments within the file describing other options not defined here. This value controls how many backup files will be retained.properties file can also control where the logging information is stored and how the log files are managed. locate the BlDeploy appserver performance logging section in the file and uncomment the lines in that section.Application Server logging Modifying logging configuration using log4j.appender.R. These loggers are initially configured with the log level INFO to prevent the log files from containing too much information. By default. You can enable logging of Content Authoring debug information.properties file contains a large list of loggers that can be configured to add useful debug information. the maximum number of roll-over files is 5. specifying the relative or full path of the log file. When a log file reaches its maximum size. 268 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . To do so.File option.appender. You can enable logging of timing information pertaining to the Deploy Jobs. a backup file will be made and a new log file will be created. Maximum file size Number of roll-over files Performance logging Timing for Deploy Jobs Content Authoring Log configuration Additional debug logging The log4j. Table 2 Attribute Log Files Location Modifying basic Application Server logging attributes Description You can set the log file location using the log4j. You can set the number of roll-over files using the log4j. To do so.MaxFileSize option.

logger.DBServiceImpl – This logger controls messages generated by the database service. select Infrastructure Management.demux. the following options in the log4j. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 269 .logger.db.com.rootLogger=INFO. from the Configuration menu.properties file for additional information on these logger options. R. C Once saved.app. To enable basic debug logging 1 Open the log4j. There are many logger options that give you the ability to enable debug logging for very specific tasks.bladelogic.bladelogic. R. 3 Right-click the Application Server you want to edit and select Edit. Modifying log file names from the BMC BladeLogic Console You can also modify basic logging options for the Application Server from the BMC BladeLogic Console.Application Server logging NOTE Debugging issues with the Application Server often require assistance by BMC BladeLogic Customer Support. the application server will automatically detect the logging level modification after a short period of time and being logging data in debug mode. C 3 Modify the line to read: log4j.properties file. 2 Locate the following line: log4j.com. ■ log4j.Demux – This logger controls messages generated by the networking layer. For example.mfw. See the comment lines in the log4j.rootLogger=DEBUG. The Edit Application Server Profile dialog opens.properties file control loggers that are useful for debugging: ■ log4j. 1 In the BMC BladeLogic Console. 2 Expand the hierarchy of the Application Servers node.

Enabling more detailed logging In addition to the appserver. click OK. add or change values for the following attributes. but in addition it also captures any output that does not go through the log4j logging system. As with the Application Server log files. When you create a new Application Server.log file. For example.properties). 6 Click OK on the warning that configuration changes do not take effect until you restart the Application Server. If you edit this attribute. BMC BladeLogic sets the console log file’s name to the Application Server name plus “_console”. 270 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . The console log file contains all information logged to the Application Server log. the console log files are configured to rollover. BMC BladeLogic sets the log file’s name to the Application Server name plus the .log extension.log file. This convention avoids conflicts when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host. an Application Server running on Linux or Solaris can be configured to write all the standard output and standard error information into a file called console. When you create a new Application Server. LogfileName The name of the log file for the Application Server. Console logging is enabled by default. This convention avoids conflicts when there are multiple Application Servers on the same host. Attribute ConsoleLogfileName Description The name of the console log file for the Application Server.properties file accessed from the _template deployment directory (/br/ deployments/_template/log4j.log file contains the same information as the appserver. 7 Start or restart the Application Server to have changes take effect. If you edit this attribute. specify a name that is unique on the host.Application Server logging 4 In the Edit Application Server Profile dialog. set the ConsoleLogfileName to be empty. specify a name that is unique on the host. The console. To disable console logging. You can set the number of roll-over files for the console log file in the log4j. information such as the java thread dump and any messages generated by third party code used by the Application Server that logs messages to standard out/err.log file is useful for debugging when certain output is not captured by the regular log files. The console. 5 When you are finished editing the profile.log. plus any information logged to the console.

and what sort of layout the contents of each log should use.txt file allows you to control Agent logging in BMC BladeLogic so that all Agent events are logged using consistent formats.cf—Configures tftpsvr. you can control which log files BMC BladeLogic generates. ■ For more information on log4j. BMC BladeLogic uses the following configuration files (all found in installDirectory/br) to control logging with log4j: ■ ui. which logs messages from the BMC BladeLogic Console. where each log file is generated. For detailed information. You access the tool from the BMC BladeLogic Console by selecting Configuration => Generate Support Data. Additional log files of interest Additionally. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 271 . see “Generating data for support” on page 19. For specific instructions. Collecting log data You can use the Support Data Generation tool to capture log data that you can then send to BMC Software Customer Support.txt file is XML-based. PXE Server logging The log file for the PXE Server is controlled with the log4j. how much information is included in each file.Agent logging Agent logging The log4crc.log. tftpsvr. how often logs are rotated.properties file located in the PXE server deployment (_pxe directory). see http://jakarta. The log4crc.txt.cf—Configures ui. which logs messages from the TFTP server.org/log4j/docs/.log. see “About the Log4crc.txt file” on page 272. By modifying XML tags in log4crc.apache. This data can be useful for diagnostic purposes when you contact Customer Support. The Generate Support Data tool generates data about the Application Servers and other components in the BMC BladeLogic environment and packages that data into a zip file.

txt file is XML-based.txt file is used to control Agent logging. and logging format for Application Server logs are controlled using the log4j. On Windows. the default location for the second instance of BMC BladeLogic would be C:\Program Files\BMC Software\ BladeLogic2\version\NSH. Name and location of log4crc. The log appender. how often logs are rotated.txt file for first instance of BMC BladeLogic /usr/lib/rsc/log4crc. logging level. For Application Server logging.txt For example. you can have multiple instances of BMC BladeLogic client applications. WINDIR can be \windows or \winnt.txt. and what sort of layout the contents of each log should use. For more information.txt For example. By modifying XML tags in log4crc.properties file.About the Log4crc. Syntax The syntax of the log4crc. you can control which log files BMC BladeLogic generates. The log4crc. each with their own log4crc.txt file consists of three tags: <category> <appender> <layout> 272 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .txt file resides in different locations on Windows and UNIX-style systems.txt file.txt file for additional instances Not applicable WINDIR\rsc\log4crc. The log4crc.txt file About the Log4crc. see “Application Server logging” on page 267. as described in the following table. you control logging attributes using the Infrastructure Management window on the BMC BladeLogic Console and in the Application Server profiles of each default and custom profiles.txt file allows you to control Agent logging in BMC BladeLogic so that all Agent events are logged using consistent formats.txt Platform Solaris Linux AIX HP-UX Windows Name and location of log4crc. NOTE The log4crc. where each log file is generated. how much information is included in each file.txt file The log4crc.txt file on Windows varies between the first instance and all subsequent instances. installDirectoryN\version\NSH\conf \log4crc. The following table shows how the location of the log4crc.

Generates a keystroke log that records nexec sessions. Generates a log for the RSCD agent server. The following table identifies all possible names: Name rscd keystroke Description Generates a log for the RSCD agent.log"/--> <category name="rscdsvc" priority="info" appender="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/ BladeLogic/version/RSCD/rscdsvc. Uncomment it to enable keystroke logging.log" debugappender="stderr"/> <!-category name="keystroke" priority="info1" appender="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/keystroke. which monitors the RSCD agent and restarts the agent if necessary. Agitator managed internally by Deploy Job executables. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 273 . Logs only connection information. Do not modify this <category> tag. The following table identifies the possible priority levels: Priority fatal error warn info Description Logs only fatal errors. Default values vary somewhat for UNIX-style installations. The following list shows the <category> tags included by default in the log4crc. This option only applies to Windows installations. Do not modify this <category> tag. rscdsvc bldeploy bldeployConsole bldeployAppserver The priority= option specifies the amount of information included in a log. Do not modify this <category> tag. <category name="root" priority="info"/> <category name="rscd" priority="info1" appender="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/ BladeLogic/version/RSCD/rscd. A category managed internally by Deploy Job executables. The <category> tag can include three options: name. including fatal errors. this is disabled (commented out).txt file in a Windows installation. and appender.About the Log4crc. By default. Logs all warnings and errors. Logs all errors. see “Enabling keystroke logging” on page 283. priority. For more information. Agitator managed internally by Deploy Job executables.log" debugappender="stderr"/> <category name="bldeploy" priority="debug"/> <category name="bldeployConsole" priority="debug" appender="stdout"/> <categoryname="bldeployAppserver"priority="error"appender="blbasic"/> The name= option identifies the type of log file BMC BladeLogic generates.txt file category The <category> tag identifies the types of logging that BMC BladeLogic generates.

When a log file is rolled. as well as all the system calls that an RSCD agent performs to execute user actions.log is renamed to rscd. For example. rscd. STDERR. You can specify that log files are rolled at specified intervals or when log files reach a particular size. the file is renamed with a number appended to its name.log1.log file. appender The <appender> tag specifies whether logging information is stored as a stream in a file or periodically rolled over into a new file. 274 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . All new information is then recorded in the rscd. Logs connection information and user actions. This priority is only valid for the RSCD agent log (that is. Logs the STDIN and STDERR streams of the command being run by nexec. The appender= tag provides a name and path for a log file. usually to prevent log files from getting excessively large.log1 is renamed to rscd. This priority is only valid for the RSCD agent log (that is. This priority corresponds to logging level 1 in older releases of BMC BladeLogic. Do not use a Network Shell-style path. Logs all messages.log1. info2 debug Note that keystroke logs (where name is set to keystroke) support only the following options: Priority info info1 info2 Description Logs only the STDIN stream of the command being run by nexec.log. Logs the STDIN. the current log file is renamed to rscd. Enter the path using a UNIX or Windows format. the <category> tag named rscd).log2. The <appender> tag also lets you specify secure agent logging and keystroke logging. When the log file is rolled again.txt file Priority info1 Description Logs connection information and user actions. and STDOUT streams of the command being run by nexec.About the Log4crc. This priority corresponds to logging level 2 in older releases of BMC BladeLogic. the <category> tag named rscd). rscd. and all new information is recorded in rscd.

pem"/--> <appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/rscdsvc. <appender name="stdout" type="stream" layout="basic"/> <appender name="stderr" type="stream" layout="basic"/> <appender name="syslog" type="syslog" layout="basic"/> <appender name="/tmp/bllog" type="stream" layout="dated"/> <appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/rscd.pem"/--> <!-appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/ keystroke.log" type="rollfile" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated"/> The name= option must match the name (including its full path) assigned to an appender option in a <category> tag. see “Using secure agent logging” on page 277 and “Using keystroke log files” on page 281. and layout.pem" privatekeyfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate. type.txt file.log" type="digisign" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated" certfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate. For information about secure logging. Type stream syslog Description Logging information is output in a continuous stream to a file. The following list shows the <appender> tags that are included by default in the log4crc. The following table identifies the possible types: NOTE You can only roll log files when one source of logging data is being used to create a log file. you must set type=stream.log" type="rollfile" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated"/> <!-appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/ rscd.log" type="encrypt" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="rawtime" certfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate. If you are using this option for UNIX systems. If multiple sources are output to the same log. In other words. only one category can be output to a single log. Instead.pem" privatekeyfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate. Logging information is output to the UNIX syslog.txt file The <appender> tag can include three options: name. NOTE The two commented out entries (where type is set to digisign or encrypt) are used in secure logging. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 275 . a feature that is disabled by default. you cannot use type=rollfile to roll log files. you must configure the UNIX syslog daemon (see “Configuring the UNIX syslog” on page 284).About the Log4crc. The type= option specifies what type of log file to generate.

the information in file log. Specifies the maximum number of files used for logging. In addition. and rollmaxfiles mean the same as they do for rollfile. the next time the log files roll over. if you have already generated ten log files. log entries and rolled log files are protected using the security mechanisms described in “Using secure agent logging” on page 277. rolltimeinsec rollmaxfiles digisign As with rollfile. rolltimeinsec. In addition to these parameters. you can specify how log files are rotated by including one or more of the following options in the <appender> tag: rollsize Specifies a maximum number of characters for the log file. digisign needs the following additional parameters: certfile privatekeyfile Specifies the file containing the agent’s certificate.10 is lost.1 to log.10. Specifies the file containing the agent’s private key.txt file Type rollfile Description Logging information is output to a file that is periodically rolled over into another file. As with rollfile. rolltimeinsec and rollmaxfiles mean the same as they do for rollfile. In addition. log entries and rolled log files are encrypted and protected using the security mechanisms described in “Using keystroke log files” on page 281. you can store log files named log. In addition to these parameters. The parameters rollsize. When the file reaches that maximum. if you set rollmaxfiles=10. logging information is output to a file that is periodically rolled over into another file.About the Log4crc. logging information is output to a file that is periodically rolled over into another file. log files are rolled. Specifies an interval in seconds for rolling log files. encrypt Used for keystroke log files. For example. Specifies the file containing the agent’s private key. In this case. If you set type=rollfile. 276 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . encrypt needs the following additional parameters: certfile privatekeyfile Specifies the file containing the agent’s certificate. The parameters rollsize.

Except for the time stamp.About the Log4crc. To develop additional logging formats. see: ■ ■ ■ ■ Overview of the security processes Verifying the integrity of log files Enabling secure agent logging Disabling secure agent logging Overview of the security processes Here is an overview of the security processes that take place as an agent writes and rolls a log file. Using secure agent logging Secure agent logging is a rolling log mechanism that protects your RSCD agent log files by: ■ Securing each entry in the current log file with a Message Authentication Code (MAC) and sequence number. Users should not modify the syntax of the <layout> tag. Verifying the integrity of log files. You can later check log file integrity by using the bllogman command. Used only when type is set to encrypt.txt file The layout= option specifies the type of layout used for logging information. This layout outputs minimal information in the log file—just the timestamp and the actual message. contact BMC Software support. It does not output the category name and log level that the basic and dated layouts do. The following table identifies all possible layouts: Type basic dated Description Log entries use the same format of the data that is generated for the log message. Protecting rolled log files with digital signatures. A time stamp precedes all log entries. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 277 . ■ ■ For additional information about secure agent logging. rawtime <layout> The <layout> tag defines the format of logging entries. and recording the status of each verification. log entries use the same format as the data that is generated for the log message.

the agent will generate a new session key.log is rolled to rscd.log1. As it writes each log entry.21. The RSCD agent starts writing its first log file—rscd. It also verifies the sequence number (or in other words. The following events take place at rollover: ■ MAC verification test and sequencing test. — The signature file has a status field.222 23694 99/99 (Administrator): nexec: nexec engrhes40vm10 ifconfig -a 3. It also associates a sequence number with each entry. rscd. against each entry’s MAC. the RSCD agent generates a random session key. Before beginning to write its first log file. The agent will use this key to calculate a Message Authentication Code (MAC) for each entry in the log file. When this log file is rolled and it is time to start a new log file. The agent verifies the integrity of each log entry in the rolled log file.log1. the status field is set to Inconsistent. If the rolled log file passed the MAC test and the sequencing test. In this case. the status field is set to Consistent.log1.log. 2.About the Log4crc.269 INFO rscd . If the rolled log file failed the MAC test or the sequencing test.sig1.log. If either the MAC test or the sequencing test fails. ■ Digital signature file. MAC Sequence number 3d8591f27a805b0edac5 0000000012 07/28/07 02:45:16. The agent creates a corresponding digital signature file for the rolled log file rscd. it uses the session key to calculate a MAC and associate this MAC with each log entry. the agent raises an event (in EventLog on Windows and syslog on UNIX-style systems) indicating that the file has been tampered with. When it is time for a rollover. Note that this session key will be used only for the writing of this one log file. the corresponding signature file would be called rscd.txt file 1.10. rscd. 278 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . the order) of each log entry.20.

— The MAC and sequence number fields are stripped as part of the process of signing the rolled log file. which indicates that it has been tampered with. — At the next roll.log2 () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/rscd.log1 () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/rscd. The cycle begins again. bllogman.log3 () --> Inconsistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/rscd.txt file You can use the information stored in the status field to verify the integrity of a rolled log file. as described in “Verifying the integrity of log files” on page 279. as described the procedure below. engrhes40vm10. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 279 . 4. see the bllogman man page. there are five log files on the agent machine. Enabling secure agent logging You can enable secure agent logs as part of your initial installation (see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide) or later on. with the creation of a new random session key for use in creating MACs for the next version of rscd. the previous log file is automatically rolled and signed at agent startup. For additional information about bllogman.log3) is reported as Inconsistent.About the Log4crc. Example: engw2k3agt1% bllogman list --verify engrhes40vm10 Logfile(s) for host engrhes40vm10 with status: /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/rscd.log4 () --> Consistent engw2k3agt1% In the above example. The agent also does the MAC verification test and sequencing test on the rolled log file. the signature file will be rolled along with its associated log file. Verifying the integrity of log files You can verify the integrity of all agent log files by using the NSH command.log () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/rscd.log. One file (rscd. NOTE If an agent is restarted.

About the Log4crc.log appender entry that has type set to rollfile: <!-appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/ rscd. See the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Installation Guide for more information. 4 Make the following changes to the log4crc.log. 3 Delete all the agent log files.log2.log1. 5 Make the following changes to the log4crc.txt configuration file: 280 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . usual rolling logs will be generated. 3 Stop the RSCD agent. Disabling secure agent logging If you have enabled secure agent logging and you now want to disable it: 1 Back up the certificate. These files have names like rscd.pem" privatekeyfile="C:/ WINDOWS/rsc/certificate.log2.pem file and the signature files.txt file 1 Back up all your existing agent log files (if any). rscd.log1.log" type="digisign" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated" certfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate. rscd. and so on. rscd.txt configuration file: In the <appender> section. secure agent logs are only enabled (even if you have followed these steps) if the server on which the agent is running has either a working random number generator or PRNGD installed. and so on. rscd. Otherwise. 2 Stop the RSCD agent.pem"/> 5 Start the RSCD agent. These files have names like rscd.log" type="rollfile" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated"/--> Uncomment or add the following entry where type is set to digisign: <appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/rscd. 4 Delete all the agent log files. NOTE On UNIX agents. remove or comment out the rscd.log. 2 Back up all your existing agent log files (if any).

which lets you verify the integrity of a keystroke log file. STDOUT. you can verify the integrity of all the keystroke logs on an agent machine. each keystroke log file is accompanied by a digital signature file.About the Log4crc. the keystroke log captures and stores the command’s STDIN.pem"/>--> ■ Start the RSCD agent. keystroke logs are encrypted and so are not readable. Additionally. By using the NSH command blkeylogman.log" type="rollfile" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated" Comment out or delete the following entry where type is set to digisign: <!--<appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/ rscd. and STDERR streams.log appender entry that has type set to rollfile: appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/rscd.log" type="digisign" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated" certfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate. Similar to the secure agent logs. Whenever a remote user uses the NSH command nexec to execute a command on an agent machine.pem" privatekeyfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate. add or uncomment the rscd. Using keystroke log files You can configure the BMC BladeLogic RSCD agent to generate keystroke logs that record nexec sessions. or a particular keystroke log file on an agent machine. Keystroke logs are similar to the secure agent logs described in “Using secure agent logging” on page 277: keystroke logs are rolled periodically and are digitally signed after they are rolled. Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 281 .txt file In the <appender> section.

log8 () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke. These two are then stripped off from the file and a digital signature is computed for it. The blkeylogman utility also lets you: ■ View the decrypted contents of keystroke log files.About the Log4crc.log4 () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke.log7 () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke. see the blkeylogman man page. Copy a (decrypted) keystroke log file from an agent to the client host.log1 () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke. View a list of various nexec sessions that have been recorded in the keystroke logs.log in the above example) is also protected by MAC codes and sequence numbers. there are ten keystroke log files on the agent machine. 282 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .log5) is reported as Inconsistent.log6 () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke. The active keystroke log file (/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke. which indicates that it has been tampered with.log () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke. the agent tests it for consistency using the MACs and the sequence numbers.log9 () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke. ■ ■ For more details. If the log file was detected Inconsistent during this process. an event is raised (In the Eventlog on Windows and syslog on UNIXstyle systems).txt file Example: engw2k3agt1% blkeylogman list --verify engrhes40vm10 Keystroke Logfile(s) for host engrhes40vm10 with status: \ /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke. MAC Sequence number 967ff34b84f754c0774a 0000000011 Zl8abih3bvmLNHwTnE4iK5UqeYXWMk2ZQ4 2xdR3nNo8lE2/xUoVxPOd8CSlg7hAygMQgO7D6VmbB2QZVAG6ucg== When the active keystroke log file is rolled.log3 () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke. One file (keystroke.log5 () --> Inconsistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke.log2 () --> Consistent /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke.log10 () --> Consistent engw2k3agt1% In the above example.

2 Stop the RSCD agent. as described in “Enabling keystroke logging” on page 283.txt configuration file: In the <category> section. Disabling keystroke logging If you have enabled keystroke logging and you now want to disable it: 1 Back up the certificate.About the Log4crc. uncomment or add the following entry.pem" privatekeyfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate. 3 Make the following changes to the log4crc. uncomment or add the following entry. where name is set to keystroke: <categoryname="keystroke"priority="info1"appender="C:/ProgramFiles/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/keystroke. keystroke logging is only enabled (even if you have followed these steps).pem file. Enabling keystroke logging You can enable keystroke logging as part of your initial installation (see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Installation Guide) or later on. 1 Stop the RSCD agent. as described in the procedure below.pem"/> 3 Start the RSCD agent.txt file You can enable keystroke logs as part of your initial installation (see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Installation Guide) or later on. 2 Make the following changes to the log4crc.log"/> In the <appender> section. if the server on which the agent is running has either a working random number generator or PRNGD installed. To disable keystroke logging. see “Disabling keystroke logging” on page 283. NOTE On UNIX agents. where type is set to encrypt: <appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/ keystroke.txt configuration file: Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 283 . See the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Installation Guide for more information.log" type="encrypt" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="rawtime" certfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate.

284 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . where type is set to encrypt: <!--<appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/ keystroke. and a location for the syslog by creating an entry like the following: local6. Configuring the UNIX syslog If you are logging output to the UNIX syslog.log" type="encrypt" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="rawtime" certfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate.About the Log4crc. comment out or delete the following entry. configure a facility.pem"/>--> ■ Start the RSCD agent. you must configure the syslog daemon to accept output from BMC BladeLogic.pem" privatekeyfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate.txt file In the <category> section.debug /var/log/rscd-syslog BMC BladeLogic uses the local6 facility. where name is set to keystroke: <!--<category name="keystroke" priority="info1" appender="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/keystroke.log"/>--> In the <appender> section. a priority level. Within /etc/syslog.conf. comment out or delete the following entry.

pem" privatekeyfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate.pem"/--> <!-appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/keystroke.txt file Default default log4crc.log" debugappender="stderr"/> <!--categoryname="keystroke"priority="info1"appender="C:/ProgramFiles/BMCSoftware/ BladeLogic/version/RSCD/keystroke.pem"/--> <appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/rscdsvc.log" type="rollfile" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated"/> <!-.log" debugappender="stderr"/> <category name="bldeploy" priority="debug"/> <category name="bldeployConsole" priority="debug" appender="stdout"/> <category name="bldeployAppserver" priority="error" appender="blbasic"/> <!-.txt file examples The following is an example of a default log4crc.0"> <!-.log" type="digisign" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated" certfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate. <?xml version="1.root category ========================================= --> <category name="root" priority="info"/> <category name="rscd" priority="info1" appender="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/ version/RSCD/rscd.default layouts ======================================= --> <layout name="basic" type="basic"/> <layout name="dated" type="dated"/> <layout name="rawtime" type="rawtime"/> </log4c> Chapter 5 Setting up configuration files 285 .pem" privatekeyfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate.log" type="encrypt" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="rawtime" certfile="C:/WINDOWS/rsc/certificate.1.log" type="rollfile" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated"/> <!-.About the Log4crc.txt file for a Windows installation.log"/--> <category name="rscdsvc" priority="info" appender="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/ version/RSCD/rscdsvc.appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/rscd.default appenders ===================================== --> <appender name="stdout" type="stream" layout="basic"/> <appender name="stderr" type="stream" layout="basic"/> <appender name="syslog" type="syslog" layout="basic"/> <appender name="/tmp/bllog" type="stream" layout="dated"/> <appender name="C:/Program Files/BMC Software/BladeLogic/version/RSCD/rscd.0" encoding="ISO-8859-1"?> <!DOCTYPE log4c SYSTEM ""> <log4c version="1.

1.pem"/--> <!--appendername="/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/keystroke.log" type="rollfile" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated"/> <!-.default layouts ======================================= --> <layout name="basic" type="basic"/> <layout name="dated" type="dated"/> <layout name="rawtime" type="rawtime"/> </log4c> 286 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .log" debugappender="stderr"/> <category name="bldeploy" priority="debug"/> <category name="bldeployConsole" priority="debug" appender="stdout"/> <category name="bldeployAppserver" priority="error" appender="blbasic"/> <!-.log" type="digisign" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated" certfile="/usr/lib/ rsc/certificate.root category ========================================= --> <category name="root" priority="info"/> <categoryname="rscd"priority="info1"appender="/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/ rscd.txt file The following is an example of a default log4crc.log"type="encrypt" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="rawtime" certfile="/usr/ lib/rsc/certificate.pem" privatekeyfile="/usr/lib/rsc/certificate.About the Log4crc.0"> <!-.txt file for a UNIX-style installation.0" encoding="ISO-8859-1"?> <!DOCTYPE log4c SYSTEM ""> <log4c version="1. <?xml version="1.pem" privatekeyfile="/usr/lib/rsc/certificate.log"/--> <category name="rscdsvc" priority="info" appender="/tmp/rscdsvc.pem"/--> <appender name="/tmp/rscdsvc.log" type="rollfile" rollsize="10000000" rolltimeinsec="2419200" rollmaxfiles="10" layout="dated"/> <!-.appender name="/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/rscd.log" debugappender="stderr"/> <!--categoryname="keystroke"priority="info1"appender="/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/ NSH/log/keystroke.default appenders ===================================== --> <appender name="stdout" type="stream" layout="basic"/> <appender name="stderr" type="stream" layout="basic"/> <appender name="syslog" type="syslog" layout="basic"/> <appender name="/tmp/bllog" type="stream" layout="dated"/> <appender name="/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/version/NSH/log/rscd.

or all accessible Application Servers. The database clean-up utility also deletes old audit trail entries. patch analysis. For information. You can reduce clutter in your workspace from objects created by job runs. Data from Deploy Jobs can also accumulate in the staging directory on repeater servers. and auto-remediation. You can manage data in these areas: ■ The BMC BladeLogic Console.Chapter 6 6 Managing BMC BladeLogic data BMC BladeLogic provides a suite of tools for managing data in the BMC BladeLogic system and controlling its growth where necessary. audit results. Repeater Servers. This utility deletes from the database objects users have deleted in the BMC BladeLogic Console and objects marked for deletion with the retention policy utility. ■ ■ ■ ■ Chapter 6 Managing BMC BladeLogic data 287 . the Application Server to which you are connected. The BMC BladeLogic Database. You can reduce the amount of space taken up by unused data in the database by executing the database clean-up utility. For information. and compliance results. snapshot results. You can delete data that has accumulated on target servers (BMC BladeLogic agents) from Deploy Jobs. You can delete these files by using the repeater clean-up utility. see “Cleaning the Application Server cache” on page 293. For information. Target Servers (Agents). see “Cleaning up repeater servers” on page 294. This data consists of old files that are no longer accessed. see “Cleaning up the BMC BladeLogic database” on page 288. see “Cleaning up target servers (Agents)” on page 293. the objects are deleted from the database the next time the database clean-up utility is run. You can mark these objects for deletion. For information. see “Marking data for deletion” on page 289. You can reduce the number of temporary files in the Application Server cache (directory) by using the Application Server clean-up utility. These tools let you delete unused data or data no longer needed for BMC BladeLogic operations. For information. you can use the target server clean-up utility to delete these files. The Application Server Cache. This utility lets you delete old temporary files from a specific Application Server.

288 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . The result drops to 0 when the cleanup completes. To execute the retention policy utility using the CLI or to run the database clean-up utility. to avoid longrunning clean-up runs. see the BLCLI Help. Cleaning up the BMC BladeLogic database BMC BladeLogic provides a database clean-up utility (cleanupDatabase) to minimize the amount of space taken up by unused data. if you query again. You can delete unused files from the file server. the initial result displays until the cleanup completes. TIP BMC Software recommends that you run the clean-up utility once per week. see “Executing the database clean-up utility” on page 292. For information on the retention policy utility. see “Cleaning up the file server” on page 295. This utility lets you mark for deletion from the BMC BladeLogic database old job runs and objects automatically generated by operations such as auto-remediation and patch analysis. For information. you can run the following database query to determine how many depot objects the database clean-up utility will delete: select count (*) from depot_object where is_deleted = ‘1’. This data includes: ■ Objects users have already deleted in the BMC BladeLogic Console.Cleaning up the BMC BladeLogic database ■ The BMC BladeLogic File Server. This clean-up utility deletes any data from the database that has been previously marked for deletion. For more information on the CLI. you must first start the Network Shell and then start the BMC BladeLogic command line interface (CLI). Objects marked as deleted with the retention policy utility. To run the database clean-up utility. see “Marking data for deletion” on page 289. These objects include old job runs and job and depot objects automatically created during patching and auto-remediation. ■ About the clean-up utility The database clean-up utility works in conjunction with the retention policy utility. Before using the database clean-up utility. While the database clean-up utility is running.

For more information on this command see the BLCLI Help. files associated with the objects are deleted from the File Server the next time the file server clean-up utility is run. Once they are marked for deletion. 2 Set the retention period for objects you want to mark for deletion. Chapter 6 Managing BMC BladeLogic data 289 . Marking data for deletion BMC BladeLogic includes a retention policy utility that allows you to mark objects for deletion from the BMC BladeLogic database. the objects are deleted from the database the next time the database clean-up utility is run. you can use the CLI to run the Delete:cleanupHistoricalData command. (In addition. Once they are marked for deletion.Marking data for deletion If you want to remove historical data. See “Enabling/disabling the retention policy utility” on page 289. see “Setting the retention period for automatically-generated objects” on page 291. see “Setting the retention period for job runs” on page 290.) Using the retention policy utility in this way lets you manage the amount of physical space the database requires and avoid potential performance issues resulting from your database getting too large. such as audit trail information and job run events. See “Executing the retention policy utility” on page 291. the objects are deleted from the database the next time the database clean-up utility is run. These objects include old job runs and job and depot objects automatically created during patching and auto-remediation. By enabling the utility and setting the retention period. the retention policy utility is not enabled to avoid the possibility of deleting data unknowingly. The following master procedure summarizes the steps for marking job runs for deletion: 1 Enable the retention policy utility. ■ For information on setting the retention period for job runs. ■ 3 Execute the retention policy utility. the objects that are candidates for deletion (because they are older than the specified retention period) are marked for deletion when the retention policy is executed. For information on setting the retention period for automatically-generated objects. Enabling/disabling the retention policy utility The following procedure lets you enable or disable the retention policy. By default.

set the RESULTS_RETENTION_TIME property for the specific job property class in the Property Dictionary (for example. 2 To enable or disable the retention policy utility. files associated with the objects are deleted from the file server the next time the file server clean-up utility is run. To set the default retention period for all jobs of a specific type. which lets you mark objects for deletion from the BMC BladeLogic database. To set the default retention period for job runs of a specific job. (See “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45.Marking data for deletion 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. For information on setting property values using the Properties tab for a system object (such as a job). For details on setting a property using the Property Dictionary. You cannot mark objects for deletion during database cleanup. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide.) false — Disables the retention policy utility. (Objects are deleted from the database the next time the database clean-up utility is run. the SnapshotJob property class). see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. For details on setting a property using the Property Dictionary. In addition. set the RESULTS_RETENTION_TIME property using the Properties tab for a specific job. ■ ■ 290 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. set the RESULTS_RETENTION_TIME property for the Job property class in the Property Dictionary.) Setting the retention period for job runs You can set the number of days to retain job runs before marking them for deletion. do any of the following: ■ To set the default retention period for all jobs. enter the following: set Cleanup EnableRetentionPolicy true|false Where: true — Enables the retention policy utility. 3 Restart the Application Server to have this change take effect. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. To set the number of days to retain job runs before marking them for deletion.

For information. as described in “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. 2 Specify the retention period (in days) with the set command: set Cleanup AutoGeneratedRetentionTime #days Where: # days — is the number of days that job and depot objects are retained before being marked for deletion (when you execute the retention policy utility). For example. the CLI prompts you for a user name and password. see the Delete name space of BLCLI Help.Marking data for deletion NOTE The most specific retention value will be used when executing a retention policy. do the following: 1 Start the Network Shell and then issue the CLI command that executes the retention policy utility by entering the following: #nsh Server1% blcli Delete executeRetentionPolicy For more information about this command. Setting the retention period for automatically-generated objects To set the number of days to retain automatically-generated objects before marking them for deletion. Enter a user name and password that you use for accessing BMC BladeLogic. 3 Restart the Application Server to have this change take effect. Chapter 6 Managing BMC BladeLogic data 291 . a specific job value overrides any value defined for the specific job type or for all job types. do the following: 1 Start the Application Server Administration console. 2 If you have not cached your session credentials. see “Starting the Application Server Administration console” on page 45. Executing the retention policy utility To execute the retention policy utility.

Executing the database clean-up utility NOTE If you are authenticating with SRP. you can cache your authentication information for repeated use over a given time period. storing this information in the credentials cache. see “Single sign-on” on page 121. TIP BMC Software recommends that you run the clean-up utility once per week. your role must be granted the BL_Administration.System_Cleanup authorization. see the Delete name space of BLCLI Help. For information on using the retention policy utility. Executing the database clean-up utility Use this procedure to remove superfluous BMC BladeLogic data from Oracle and SQL Server databases. For information. to avoid longrunning clean-up runs. the CLI prompts you for a user name and password. 1 Start the Network Shell and then issue the CLI command that executes the database clean-up utility by entering the following: #nsh Server1% blcli Delete cleanupDatabase For more information about this command. NOTE If you are authenticating with SRP. Enter a user name and password that you use for accessing BMC BladeLogic. 292 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . see “Single sign-on” on page 121. For information. To execute a database clean-up operation. 2 If you have not cached your session credentials. storing this information in the credentials cache. see the Delete name space of BLCLI Help. see “Marking data for deletion” on page 289. you can cache your authentication information for repeated use over a given time period. NOTE BMC BladeLogic also provides the performFullCleanupJob CLI command for database cleanup. For information.

1 Start the Network Shell and then issue the CLI command that executes the Application Server cache clean-up utility by entering the following: #nsh Server1% blcli Delete cleanupAppServerCache <retention time> For more information about this command. To execute a clean-up operation. The utility lets you specify parameters for the cleanup. You can also use the utility to clean up caches of all accessible Application Servers. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. These files are temporary and will probably no longer be accessed. NOTE If you are authenticating with SRP. your role must be granted the BL_Administration. transaction information and log files are created on the target servers and in certain cases are not deleted. such as Application Server name and the minimum elapsed time before files can be considered for deletion. see the Delete name space of BLCLI Help. see “Single sign-on” on page 121. the CLI prompts you for a user name and password.Cleaning the Application Server cache Cleaning the Application Server cache Each Application Server has a file cache (directory) containing files that it uses for operations it performs. For information on configuring this property. Chapter 6 Managing BMC BladeLogic data 293 . These files are temporary files no longer needed after the operation. For information. use the target server clean-up utility To clean up transactions.System_Cleanup authorization. To delete these objects from a target server. storing this information in the credentials cache. Enter a user name and password that you use for accessing BMC BladeLogic. you can use the Application Server cache clean-up utility to delete them from the cache. 2 If you have not cached your session credentials. objects such as BL packages. Cleaning up target servers (Agents) During Deploy Jobs. you can cache your authentication information for repeated use over a given time period. the target server clean-up utility uses the value of the server’s TRANSACTIONS_DIR property to locate the transactions directory.

Cleaning up repeater servers Old temporary files from Deploy Jobs can accumulate in the staging directory on repeater servers. your role must be granted the BL_Administration. the CLI prompts you for a user name and password. You can use the repeater clean-up utility to delete these files. see the Delete name space of BLCLI Help. use the command in a Network Shell Script Job. 2 If you have not cached your session credentials. 1 Start the Network Shell and then issue the CLI command that executes the repeater server clean-up utility by entering the following: #nsh Server1% blcli Delete cleanupRepeater For more information about this command. 1 Start the Network Shell and then issue the CLI command that executes the target server clean-up utility by entering the following: #nsh Server1% blcli Delete cleanupAgent For more information about this command.Cleaning up repeater servers To execute a clean-up operation. To clean up a set of target servers. Enter a user name and password that you use for accessing BMC BladeLogic.System_Cleanup authorization. For information. 294 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . To execute a clean-up operation. such as maximum size for the staging directory and the minimum elapsed time before files can be considered for deletion. see “Single sign-on” on page 121. The utility lets you specify parameters for the cleanup. you can cache your authentication information for repeated use over a given time period.System_Cleanup authorization. your role must be granted the BL_Administration. see the Delete name space of BLCLI Help. NOTE If you are authenticating with SRP. storing this information in the credentials cache. See “Scheduling the target server (Agent) cleanup” on page 300.

Cleaning up the file server 2 If you have not cached your session credentials. For information. 2 If you have not cached your session credentials. it creates a subdirectory under the BLPackage directory for every iteration. you can cache your authentication information for repeated use over a given time period. To clean up the file server 1 Start the Network Shell and then issue the CLI command that executes the file server clean-up utility by entering the following: #nsh Server1% blcli Delete cleanupFileServer For more information about this command. the CLI prompts you for a user name and password. see the Delete name space of BLCLI Help. Enter a user name and password that you use for accessing BMC BladeLogic. You can use the file server clean-up utility to delete these unused files from the file server and from the temporary file storage on the Application Server. Before you begin When a Custom Package Deploy Job runs. Chapter 6 Managing BMC BladeLogic data 295 . NOTE If you are authenticating with SRP. storing this information in the credentials cache. Prior to running the Delete cleanupFileServer command. see “Single sign-on” on page 121. the system marks for deletion from the file server all files associated with the objects. you must run the Delete updateDeleteDependencies to remove these directories. Enter a user name and password that you use for accessing BMC BladeLogic. Even after the job run history is removed by the retention policy. Cleaning up the file server When users delete objects from the BMC BladeLogic Console. these directories still exist. Neither the file server clean-up utility or database clean-up utility removes these directories. the CLI prompts you for a user name and password.

However. enter the command and specify a value for the objectName variable. your role must be granted the BL_Administration. for example. Enter a user name and password that you use for accessing BMC BladeLogic. To clean up one specific type of object. To execute a clean-up operation. snapshot results. 296 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .System_Cleanup authorization. see the Delete name space of BLCLI Help. The utility deletes the following objects: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Old audit trail entries Audit results Job run events Compliance results Snapshot results Job schedules Using this utility. you can cache your authentication information for repeated use over a given time period. 1 Start the Network Shell and then issue the CLI command that executes the historical data clean-up utility by entering the following: #nsh Server1% blcli Delete cleanupHistoricalData This command deletes all historical data. the CLI prompts you for a user name and password. see “Single sign-on” on page 121.Cleaning up historical data NOTE If you are authenticating with SRP. For information. you can delete all historical data or only one specific type of object. Cleaning up historical data As part of its operation. the database clean-up utility (cleanupDatabase) cleans up historical data from the database. 2 If you have not cached your session credentials. you can also clean up historical data by using the historical data clean-up utility. For more information about this command. storing this information in the credentials cache.

) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE BMC BladeLogic recommends that you create all Network Shell Script Jobs for cleanup in a single directory. For information.) File Server cleanup (See “Scheduling the file server cleanup” on page 299. You can set up Network Shell Script Jobs for performing these clean-up tasks: ■ Marking data for deletion (See “Scheduling the retention policy utility to mark data for deletion”. for example: /Jobs/BMC BladeLogic Administration/Cleanup Scheduling the retention policy utility to mark data for deletion Use this procedure to run the retention policy utility as a Network Shell Script Job. 1 In a text editor. Scheduling the cleanup The clean-up utilities can be run as Network Shell Script Jobs. see “Single sign-on” on page 121. storing this information in the credentials cache.) Target server (agent) cleanup (See “Scheduling the target server (Agent) cleanup” on page 300.) Repeater cleanup (See “Scheduling the repeater server cleanup” on page 300. create a Network Shell script to run the retention policy utility. The script should consist of the CLI command that invokes the utility: blcli Delete executeRetentionPolicy Chapter 6 Managing BMC BladeLogic data 297 . you can cache your authentication information for repeated use over a given time period.) Database cleanup (See “Scheduling the database cleanup” on page 298.) Application Server cache cleanup (See “Scheduling the Application Server cache cleanup” on page 299.Scheduling the cleanup NOTE If you are authenticating with SRP. Running a utility as a script job lets you schedule the job so it executes on a regular basis rather than running it interactively.

see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. specify the server functioning as the Application Server. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. For information. choose the first option. create a Network Shell script to run the database clean-up utility. A For the target server. choose the first option. specify the server functioning as the Application Server. A Assign any name to the script. For information. The script should consist of the CLI command that invokes the utility: blcli Delete cleanupDatabase 2 Using BMC BladeLogic Console. B Schedule the job to run at a frequency you prefer.Scheduling the database cleanup 2 Using the BMC BladeLogic Console. TIP BMC Software recommends that you run the clean-up utility once per week. 298 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . B Schedule the job to run at a frequency you prefer. add the Network Shell script to the Depot. to avoid longrunning clean-up runs. A Assign any name to the script. B When you specify the Script Type. A For the target server. B When you specify the Script Type. For information. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. 3 Create a Network Shell Script Job based on the script you added to the Depot in the previous step. 3 Create a Network Shell Script Job based on the script you added to the Depot in the previous step. 1 In a text editor. add the Network Shell script to the Depot. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. For information. Scheduling the database cleanup Use this procedure to run the database clean-up utility as a Network Shell Script Job.

1 In a text editor. Scheduling the Application Server cache cleanup Use this procedure to run the Application Server cache clean-up utility as a Network Shell Script Job. add the Network Shell script to the Depot. A Assign any name to the script. For information.Scheduling the file server cleanup Scheduling the file server cleanup Use this procedure to run the file server clean-up utility as a Network Shell Script Job. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. add the Network Shell script to the Depot. create a Network Shell script to run the file server clean-up utility. For information. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. B When you specify the Script Type. choose the first option. B When you specify the Script Type. The script should consist of the CLI command that invokes the utility: blcli Delete cleanupAppServerCache <retention time> 2 Using the BMC BladeLogic Console. See “Cleaning up the file server” on page 295 for notes on pre-requisites for running the utility. 1 In a text editor. specify the server functioning as the Application Server. For information. choose the first option. Chapter 6 Managing BMC BladeLogic data 299 . The script should consist of the CLI command that invokes the utility: blcli Delete cleanupFileServer 2 Using BMC BladeLogic Console. 3 Create a Network Shell Script Job based on the script you added to the Depot in the previous step. B Schedule the job to run at a frequency you prefer. create a Network Shell script to run the Application Server cache clean-up utility. A For the target server. A Assign any name to the script.

Scheduling the repeater server cleanup 3 Create a Network Shell Script Job based on the script you added to the Depot in the previous step. A For the target server. For information. A Assign any name to the script. A For the target server. 3 Create a Network Shell Script Job based on the script you added to the Depot in the previous step. For information. create a Network Shell script to run the repeater server clean-up utility. specify the server functioning as the Application Server. specify the repeater servers you want to clean up. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. create a Network Shell script to run the target server (agent) cleanup utility. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. B When you specify the Script Type. For information. add the Network Shell script to the Depot. 1 In a text editor. 1 In a text editor. The script should consist of the CLI command that invokes the utility: blcli Delete cleanupRepeater 2 Using the BMC BladeLogic Console. Scheduling the target server (Agent) cleanup Use this procedure to run the target server clean-up utility as a Network Shell Script Job. The script should consist of the CLI command that invokes the utility: blcli Delete cleanupAgent 300 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. B Schedule the job to run at a frequency you prefer. B Schedule the job to run at a frequency you prefer. choose the first option. Scheduling the repeater server cleanup Use this procedure to run the repeater server clean-up utility as a Network Shell Script Job.

A For the target server. Chapter 6 Managing BMC BladeLogic data 301 . 3 Create a Network Shell Script Job based on the script you added to the Depot in the previous step. B When you specify the Script Type.Scheduling the target server (Agent) cleanup 2 Using the BMC BladeLogic Console. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. A Assign any name to the script. add the Network Shell script to the Depot. B Schedule the job to run at a frequency you prefer. specify the target servers (agents) you want to clean up. For information. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. For information. choose the first option.

Scheduling the target server (Agent) cleanup 302 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .

Figure 1 shows a sample configuration. Overview Using advanced file servers and Advanced Repeater servers can help you improve the bandwidth utilization between the central file server and the repeaters. With the standard BMC BladeLogic Server Automation file server and repeater. Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 303 . You can also configure bandwidth throttling on links between the Advanced File Server and the Advanced Repeater. the Depot objects are sent to the repeater in their entirety whenever they are required for a deployment.Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 7 An advanced file server or Advanced Repeater server uses BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater technology with deploy jobs to enable file servers and repeater servers to store and share deploy data more efficiently. Using an Advanced File Server on the existing File Server with one or more Advanced Repeaters uses a more efficient protocol to ensure that only changes to the content are downloaded across the network.

304 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . proprietary format that is well suited to providing bandwidth efficient transfer of data. ■ Advanced File Server .an enhanced Java application server running on an existing File Server. Both the Advanced Repeater and Advanced File Server are built on BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Client Automation technology.Key terms Figure 1 Sample configuration Key terms The BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater is the combination of Advanced File Server and Advanced Repeater server. the Transmitter (used by the Advanced File Server). and the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Client Automation Proxy (used by the Advanced Repeater server). The following list defines some of these key terms. The three key components are the Content Replicator. It uses the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Client Automation master transmitter component to hold a second copy of the depot content in a compressed.

used to publish the content from the existing file server to the Transmitter on the Advanced File Server. Any targets which have been configured to use a standard repeater continue to do so. Ability to manage the use of network resources by the Advanced File Server and Advanced Repeater server. An RSCD agent must be installed on the servers hosting both the Advanced Repeater and Advanced File Server components. If you are using deploy jobs in a large-scale environment. It is also used to pull the content down to the file system on the Advanced Repeater.What is the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater? ■ Advanced Repeater . Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 305 . Using BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater technology enables file servers and repeater servers to store and share deploy data efficiently. Using the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater technology for deploying data offers several key benefits: ■ Improved performance of staging data for deploy jobs. using the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Client Automation proxy. ■ If the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater components have been installed. any targets which have been configured through Routing Rules to use an Advanced Repeater will make use of the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater. Content Replicator . When a Deploy Job is run and is set for indirect staging. See “Best practice information” on page 306. you can configure an Advanced File Server and one or more Advanced Repeaters.a Java application that runs instead of the traditional BMC BladeLogic Server Automation repeater and uses the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Client Automation Proxy component to efficiently download data from the Advanced File Server. NOTE For instructions on installing the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater. Any targets which are not configured to use a repeater stage the data directly on the target. consider setting up Advanced File Servers and using Advanced Repeater servers. which use the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater. ■ ■ What is the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater? The BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater provides scalable transport of data over wide-area networks.the Advanced Repeater and Advanced File Server are both installed from the same installation file. see “Installing the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater” on page 307. and is an alternate option when configuring file servers or repeater servers. Advanced Repeater installer .

it runs in limited disk space mode. An Advanced File Server cannot be disabled if there are existing Advanced Repeater servers. and attempts to maintain at least 10% free disk space. When the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater has enough disk space. The Advanced Repeater transmitter component uses the additional space for optimizations that improve the efficiency of data replication. and starts maintaining free disk space instead. and compressing. the file server must have a minimum of 72 GB of available. Memory utilization The default Java heap size is configured for a maximum of 512MB in the advanced file server. by removing cache files to reduce the amount of storage. This setting means that about 1GB RAM should be allowed to run the advanced file server. In limited disk space mode. using SSL also increases the CPU usage by about 40% due to the encryption and decryption of the content. but efficiency degrades. CPU utilization The advanced file server does not make intensive usage of the CPU. Best practice information Disk space If you are implementing an Advanced File Server. but the CPU usage will spike when new content is published as this needs to be compressed. 306 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . non-redundant.Best practice information NOTE Note the following requirements when configuring Advanced File Servers and repeater servers: ■ ■ An Advanced Repeater server cannot be enabled unless an Advanced File Server is enabled. it maintains three times the size of the data as cache. caching. the transmitter stops maintaining storage size ratio. If the transmitter does not have enough disk space to maintain the optimal storage size ratio. such as diffing. In addition. It is possible to run the transmitter with less than optimal disk space. BMC BladeLogic recommends that the file server have 200 GB or more of available RAID 5 disk space. disk space.

6 Accept the license agreement and click Next. upload the installer bin to the file server or repeater server. 4 On the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater Installation screen. click Next. 5 On the Welcome screen. The download instructions in the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Installation Guide provide a standard method for downloading the product files from the BMC Software Electronic Product Download (EPD) website. In Linux Environments. click OK. The installer files applicable to the Advanced Repeater are labeled BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater for hostPlatform on the EPD site. Installing using the installation program To install the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater 1 Download the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater installation file according to the download instructions in provided in the “Before you begin” chapter of the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Installation Guide. Different installers are provided for 32-bit and 64-bit Windows. Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 307 . 2 Do one of the following: ■ In Microsoft Windows environments. ■ 3 Start the BMC BladeLogic installation program for your platform. copy the installation file to a directory on the server you want to configure as an Advanced File Server or Advanced Repeater Server.Installing the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater Installing the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater You can install the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater using the installation program or by performing an unattended (silent) installation.

Specify this TCP port if you are installing the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater behind a firewall. 8 Specify the workspace directory (where the Advanced Repeater stores its channels). You can use any port. Click Next.port number to be used by the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater. The default port is 5282. or accept the default. The Advanced Repeater Service Port window opens. The default port is 7717. click Finish. A notification panel window appears if the installation program detects an existing installation. The Workspace Directory window opens.Installing using the installation program 7 Specify the destination directory. — Transmitter Listener Port: Specify the TCP port for the Transmitter service listener. enter the port number used to establish a new connection for each RPC client connecting to the RPC server. NOTE The default installation folder (AdvancedRepeater) is the same for both Advanced File Server and Advanced Repeater Server. or accept the default. Specify an integer between 0 and 65535. 10 Specify the following: — Transmitter RPC Port: If the server is using remote procedure calls (RPC). 12 When the installation completes. Click Next to upgrade the installation. NOTE You must use the RPC port number that was set during installation. 11 Review the current settings to confirm that you have specified the correct installation configuration. The Advanced Repeater Credentials window opens. Click Next. as long as the port number is not already in use. 308 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . or accept the default credentials by selecting Use default tuner credential settings. Specify an integer between 0 and 65535. — Click Next. — Proxy Listener Port: Specify the TCP port for the Proxy Service listener. and then click Install. Click Next. 9 Specify the credentials for the Advanced Repeater administrator. The default port is 8081.

On Linux. Performing an unattended (silent) installation Install the Advanced Repeater using silent mode You can perform an unattended (silent) installation of the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater. For example: -A -P -J -J -J -J -J -J featureAdvancedRepeater installLocation=installationDirectory WORKSPACE_DIRECTORY=pathToWorkspace TUNER_ADMINISTRATION_USER_NAME=admin TUNER_ADMINISTRATION_PASSWORD=password TUNER_ADMINISTRATION_PORT_NUMBER=7177 PROXY_PORT_NUMBER=8081 XMITTER_PORT_NUMBER=5282 Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 309 .Performing an unattended (silent) installation To uninstall the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater Do one of the following: ■ On Microsoft Windows. 8./uninstall where version is the version number for BMC BladeLogic Server Automation (for example. to enable running the installation wizard through a Terminal Services connection or a remote desktop session. Before you begin Certain Terminal Server configuration options that pertain to temporary folders must be turned off. To install the Advanced Repeater in silent mode 1 In a text editor. select Start => All Programs => BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Suite => Uninstall Advanced Repeater and follow the prompts on the uninstall wizard. create an options file and add the options for the installation that you want to run.1). enter the following command and follow the prompts on the uninstall wizard: ■ :/opt/adv/rptr/version/AdvancedRepeater/UninstallAdvancedRepeater # .

-J TUNER_ADMINISTRATION_USER_ NAME= -J TUNER_ADMINISTRATION_ PASSWORD= -J The TCP port to be used by the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation TUNER_ADMINISTRATION_PORT_ Advanced Repeater. Specify an integer between 0 and 65535. -J WORKSPACE_DIRECTORY= pathToWorkspace Specifies the workspace directory (where the Advanced Repeater stores its channels). -J XMITTER_PORT_NUMBER= Guidelines ■ Each option must be on a single line. The TCP port for the Transmitter service listener. The default is 8081. on Windows: -J WORKSPACE_DIRECTORY=C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\8. Values for options may contain spaces. on Windows: -P installLocation=C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\8.0\AdvancedRepeater\tuner On UNIX: -J WORKSPACE_DIRECTORY=/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8. ■ 310 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . The NUMBER= default is 7717. Specify this TCP port if you are installing the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater behind a firewall. For example. For example.0/AdvancedR epeater/tuner The user name and password for Advanced Repeater administrator. The default is 5282. You can use any port. -J PROXY_PORT_NUMBER= The TCP port for the Proxy Service listener.Performing an unattended (silent) installation Where: Option -P installLocation= installationDirectory Description Sets the installation directory for the product. as long as the port number is not already in use.0\AdvancedRepeater On UNIX: -P installLocation= opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8. Specify an integer between 0 and 65535.0/AdvancedRepeater -A featureAdvancedRepeater Specifies installation of the Advanced Repeater. Specify an integer between 0 and 65535.

AdvancedRepeaterInstallerName -i silent -DOPTIONS_FILE=silentOptionsFilePath You must use an absolute path to the options file. 3 Run the installation program with the -i silent option. you should specify TUNER_ADMINISTRATION_USER_NAME and PASSWORD.Performing an unattended (silent) installation ■ All Java properties have default values if not specified in the options file.txt UNIX example sh AdvancedRepeater_8_1_win32. create an options file that contains this option: -A featureAdvancedRepeater 2 Change directory to the location where the installer resides. Windows: AdvancedRepeater_8_1_win32. However.0/silent_install.exe -i silent DOPTIONS_FILE=/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8. AdvancedRepeaterInstallerName -i silent DOPTIONS_FILE=silentOptionsFilePath You must use an absolute path to the options file. 1 In a text editor.0/silent_install.bin -i silent DOPTIONS_FILE=/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8.exe -i silent -DOPTIONS_FILE=C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\8.txt Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 311 . Windows example AdvancedRepeater_8_1_win32. 2 Change directory to the location where the installer resides. 3 Run the installation program with the -i silent option.txt Upgrade the Advanced Repeater using silent mode You can perform an unattended (silent) upgrade of the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater.0\silent_upgrade.

bin -i silent DOPTIONS_FILE=/opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8. create an automation principal which contains the user-defined Administrator credential used to configure the Advanced File Server. 312 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers UNIX: sh AdvancedRepeater_8_1_win32.txt Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers To adjust the configuration settings for the an Advanced File Server or Advanced Repeater server. An automation principal defines a user credential that can be used for accessing external systems. see the following: ■ Configuring Advanced File Servers Configuring Advanced Repeater servers Changing the administrator user and password for Advanced Repeater Servers ■ ■ Before you begin NOTE Configuring an Advanced Repeater server behind a SOCKS proxy server is not supported.0/silent_upgrade. See the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide for information on creating automation principals. Set up credentials If you have not already done so.

Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 313 . while the File Server Root Path points to the directory on the file server where data is stored. 5 On the General tab. the Transmitter and Performance tabs are not accessible.Configuring Advanced File Servers Configuring Advanced File Servers Use this procedure to modify a file server to be used as an Advanced File Server. NOTE The Advanced File Server Root Directory path is different than the File Server Root Path. The Advanced File Server Root Directory points to the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater installation directory. If necessary. which uses the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater. 3 On the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Console. 1 Create a file server as described in “Setting up the file server” on page 75. click Enable Advanced File Server. change the Advanced File Server root directory path to point to the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater installation directory. as described in “Installing the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater” on page 307. select Configuration => Infrastructure Management. 2 Install the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater on the file server. 4 Right-click the file server and select Properties to open the Modify File Server dialog. If you do not specify the install directory.

check SSL Enabled.Configuring Advanced File Servers 6 On the Security tab. you can use SSL if your environment requires encryption. The automation principal is used to access and configure the Advanced File Server. However. ■ If you have not changed any credential during the installation or post-installation procedures. This credential is needed by BMC BladeLogic Server Automation to access and configure the Advanced File Server. If you have configured secure communication for the file server. If you specified a custom user/password combination during installation or in the post-install procedure. See “Securing communication between Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers (optional)” on page 319. specify the following: Option SSL Settings Description By default the traffic between the advanced file server and advanced repeater is not encrypted. select "Default". ■ 314 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . Advanced File Server Administrator Select an Automation Principal from the drop-down list. This default automation principal matches the built-in administrator credential. select the automation principal that was created for that user/password combination.

■ Install Copy A on an existing file server host. Install Copy B on a separate transmitter host. ■ In this case. You can use any port as the listener port. Select the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater installation directory. In some cases. as long as the port number is not already in use. The Host field on the General tab will be the same as the Transmitter Host Name field on the Transmitter tab. you must install two copies of the Advanced Repeater. In this case. The value Advanced File Server Root Directory on the General tab reflects the installation directory for Copy A. For example. The RPC port is used to administer the Advanced Repeater components. however. you only need to install one copy of the Advanced Repeater on the file server host.Configuring Advanced File Servers 7 On the Transmitter tab. Transmitter Listener Port RPC Port Enter the port on which the Advanced Repeater listens for requests. you may want the transmitter to be on a different host than file server. In this case. Enter the RPC port number that was set during installation. the value for the Transmitter Root Directory field reflects the installation directory for Copy B. the transmitter (in the Advanced File Server) is located on the same host as the existing file server. the transmitter is located on the same host as the File Server. Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 315 . By default. specify the following: Option Transmitter Host Name Transmitter Root Directory Description By default. if there is not sufficient disk space on the file server host. The Advanced File Server Root Directory field on the General tab will be the same as the value specified here.

This setting limits the total traffic leaving the transmitter.Configuring Advanced File Servers 8 On the Performance tab. but for large files the process can take a long time and can use many CPU resources. Instead of transferring entire files when updating payloads.specify the number of kilobits per second that the Advanced File Server can use as throughput. which allows the transmitter to send faster payload updates and to use less bandwidth. such as files in the index cache. 316 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .specifies the level of compression the transmitter should use for the files it sends.enter the maximum amount of available bandwidth (as a percentage) that the transmitter can use. — high . Set the amount of memory to allocate for differencing.balances time and size. Specify the following: ■ ■ File transfer efficiency ■ Compression enabled .specifies whether the Advanced File Server should compress the files it sends.specifies whether the transmitter should use byte-level differencing.the file is compressed as much as possible. you can specify options that help you control the amount of network resources used during deployment. To keep the specified amount of disk space free. — low . across all parallel connections. — medium . specify the following: ■ ■ Percentage of bandwidth .the compression is fast but the file size isn't reduced as much as on high (however the byte-savings difference is minimal). specify the following: Option Disk resources Description Enter the minimum amount of disk space (as a percentage) that the transmitter should keep free. 9 On the Network tab. A bandwidth setting of “0” (zero) sets specifies maximum bandwidth speed (unlimited). the transmitter automatically deletes optional files. Specify the following: Option Network connections Network bandwidth Description Enter the number of clients (Advanced Repeaters) allowed to connect to the Advanced File Server at one time. Maximum throughput . 10 Click OK. Compression level . Differencing enabled . the transmitter uses byte-level differencing to send only the changed bytes. If you select the Enable bandwidth management option.

For more information. 3 Do one of the following: — Right-click Repeater Servers and select New Repeater Server to start the New Repeater Wizard. NOTE The Advanced Repeater server must be able to access the Advanced File Server directly using the user name defined in the exports file on the file server. as described in “Installing the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater” on page 307. — Right-click an existing repeater server select Properties to open the Modify Repeater Server dialog. If necessary. NOTE You must have first configured an Advanced File Server before you can configure an Advanced Repeater server. 4 On the General panel. which uses the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater. click Enable Advanced Repeater. see the Exports File section in the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide.Configuring Advanced Repeater servers Configuring Advanced Repeater servers Use this procedure to create or modify a server to be used as an Advanced Repeater server. 1 Install the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater on the system that you will use as an Advanced Repeater server. See “Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers” on page 312. Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 317 . 2 On the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Console. change the Advanced Repeater root directory path. select Configuration => Infrastructure Management.

See “Securing communication between Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers (optional)” on page 319. Once the cache reaches the maximum cache size. Advanced Repeater Server Administrator Select an Automation Principal from the drop-down list. specify the following: Option SSL Settings Description By default the traffic between the advanced file server and advanced repeater is not encrypted. check SSL Enabled. This default automation principal matches the built-in administrator credential. ■ 6 On the Cache and Port panel. specify the following: Option Cache maximum size Description Cache management options Enter the total size (in MB) for the Advanced Repeater cache. The cache does not exceed this disk-space limit. the Advanced Repeater starts garbage collection to delete older channel files from the cache. Enter a percentage that represents the lower limit (cache low watermark) for the Advanced Repeater cache size. This credential is needed by BMC BladeLogic Server Automation to access and configure the Advanced Repeater. BMC Software recommends that you set the cache low watermark to a value between 75 and 80 (indicating that it is 75% to 80% of the maximum cache size). select the automation principal that was created for that user/password combination. If you have configured secure communication. it takes a snapshot of the cache and then determines the number of files it must delete to reach the low watermark.Configuring Advanced Repeater servers 5 On the Security tab. select "Default". ■ If you have not changed any credential during the installation or post-installation procedures. Cache low watermark 318 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . However. If you specified a custom user/password combination during installation or in the post-install procedure. The automation principal is used to access and configure the Advanced File Server. you can use SSL if your environment requires encryption. When the Advanced Repeater starts cache garbage collection.

you can specify options that help you control the amount of network resources used during deployment. You can use any port as the listener port. execute the following command: ■ Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 319 . you can change it using a Runchannel command. 8 Click OK.specify the number of kilobits per second that the Advanced Repeater can use as throughput. RPC port 7 On the Network panel. Changing the administrator user and password for Advanced Repeater Servers You can change the administrator user and password for Advanced Repeater Servers in any of the following ways: ■ In the installation wizard. the default directory is C:\Program Files\BMC Software\Bladelogic\8. Enter the RPC port number that was set during installation.enter the maximum amount of available bandwidth (as a percentage) that the Advanced Repeater can use. The RPC port is used to administer the Advanced Repeater components. — Navigate to the Advanced Repeater Server installation directory. If enabled.0\AdvancedRepeater\tuner\). If you know the administrator user/password combination. This setting applies for each repeater to file server connection. — From a command prompt. as long as the port number is not already in use. (On Windows. specify the following: ■ ■ Percentage of bandwidth . when running the installation program. Maximum throughput .Changing the administrator user and password for Advanced Repeater Servers Option Listener port Description Port management options Enter the port on which the Advanced Repeater listens for requests. A bandwidth setting of “0” (zero) sets specifies maximum bandwidth speed (unlimited). Specify the following: Option Network connections Network bandwidth Description Enter the number of concurrent connections to the Advanced Repeater.

All other traffic is all local and does not require encryption.plain:newAdminPwd" Securing communication between Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers (optional) Optionally.exe -admin "newAdminUser.admin" -value "newAdminUser.) — Navigate to the Advanced Repeater Server installation directory. You can secure the link between the Advanced Repeater server and the transmitter located on the Advanced File Server. execute the following command: tuner. if you are using the built-in default user/password). (Note that the Tuner program can only be run locally. the default directory is C:\Program Files\BMC Software\Bladelogic\8. use the following command: /etc/init. (On Windows.0\AdvancedRepeater\tuner\). using one of the following methods: ■ On UNIX and Linux. all communication between the Advanced File Server and Advanced Repeater servers using the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater can be encrypted using SSL. NOTE The following instructions assume you have a valid certificate authority (using OpenSSL. for example) that is able to issue credentials used for PKI authentication. — From a command prompt.d/advancedrepeater start 320 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .Securing communication between Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers (optional) runchannel http://localhost:5282/Marimba/Current/TunerAdministrator -tuner localhost:7717 -username oldAdminUser -password oldAdminPwd set -property "marimba. Set up the Advanced File Server for secure communication 1 Start the Advanced Repeater. you can use the Tuner program to override the current user/password combination.tuner.plain:newAdminPwd" ■ If you do not know the administrator user/password combination (for example.

from the Start menu. 2 Click Request. complete the fields and click Next.Generate the SSL certificate ■ On Windows. 4 On the Class 3 Digital ID Information panel. 5 Browse to the location of the root certificate and select it. Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 321 . select Channel => Show internal channels to populate the list. TIP If you do not see any channels listed in the Channels list. 7 On the Root Certificates dialog. 5 Specify a password. Generate the SSL certificate 1 In the Certificate Manager dialog. select SSL in the left pane. 3 Click Next. select the root certificate you just imported and select SSL from the Trust Type group box. click Programs => BMC Software => BladeLogic Server Automation Suite => Advanced Repeater. The SSL Certificate Request dialog is displayed. leave the entry field blank. The root certificate is now configured on the Advanced File Server. 2 Right-click the Certificate Manager option and select Start. and click Next. use the actual name of the Advanced File Server host system. TIP When specifying Host name. 6 When prompted for a password or nickname. The Certificate Manager dialog is displayed. 3 In the left pane. 4 Click Import to display the Import Certificate dialog. select Root. Do not enter localhost.

complete the following steps on the Advanced File Server.savepw true hostname property -setProperty transmitter.secure true where ■ uniqueID is the ID you obtained in step 3. Enable SSL on Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters To configure the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater for secure communication.certID uniqueID hostname property -setProperty transmitter.pw hostname property -setProperty transmitter. 12 On the Install SSL Certificate dialog. The Unique ID is displayed on the Certificate Information dialog. 11 On the SSL Certificates dialog. 10 Once you have received the signed certificate. select SSL in the left pane. 9 Forward the file to your Certificate Authority. click Install. 13 Click Done to complete the SSL certificate.http.Enable SSL on Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 6 Click inside the text box and enter characters until the counter reaches zero. 2 Select the certificate you just created. 3 Click View. copy the contents of the file. paste the contents of the signed certificate and click Next. 7 Click Copy CSR to paste buffer. enter the following commands to configure the transmitter to use the certificate and only accept https traffic: runchannel transmitterURL runchannel transmitterURL runchannel transmitterURL plain:password runchannel transmitterURL hostname property -setProperty transmitter.http.http. 322 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 1 In the Certificate Manager dialog. 8 Copy the certificate request and paste it into a text file. The certificate request is generated.http. 4 Using the Unique ID displayed in the certificate.

5 Browse to the location of the root certificate and select it. For example. from the Start menu. start the Advanced Repeater using one of the following methods: ■ On UNIX and Linux. 3 In the left pane. The browser should display the status information for the Advanced Repeater. http://localhost:5282/Marimba/Current/TransmitterAdministrator. 6 Restart the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater on the Advanced File Server. Configure the Advanced Repeater server for secure communication 1 Copy the root certificate you created to the Advanced Repeater server. use the following command: /etc/init. The Certificate Manager dialog is displayed.d/advancedrepeater start ■ On Windows. by entering the following string in any browser address field: https://transmitterURL/?status transmitterURL is the URL to the Transmitter Administrator of the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater. 5 Validate that the communication type is enabled. 1 On the Advanced Repeater server. Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 323 . click Programs => BMC Software => BladeLogic Server Automation Suite => Advanced Repeater. select Root. 4 Click Import to display the Import Certificate dialog. For example.Configure the Advanced Repeater server for secure communication ■ transmitterURL is the URL to the Transmitter Administrator of the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater installed on the Advanced File Server. https://localhost:5282/Marimba/Current/TransmitterAdministrator. 2 Right-click the Certificate Manager option and select Start.

Configure the Advanced File Server to use secure communication 6 Click OK to bypass the Enter Password and Enter Nickname dialogs.secure false 2 Restart the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Advanced Repeater. 2 Right-click the Advanced File Server and choose Properties. Configure the Advanced File Server to use secure communication You must configure the Advanced File Server to use SSL when communicating with the Advanced Repeater. 3 Select Enable SSL. select the root certificate you just imported and select SSL from the Trust Type group box. NOTE To disable SSL communication. Do not enter a password or a nickname.http. 4 Click OK. 7 On the Root Certificates dialog. by entering the following string in any browser address field: 324 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . see BMC Configuration Automation CMS and Tuner Guide. 1 Select Configuration => Infrastructure Management. 3 Validate that the secure communication type has been disabled. For more information on using the Certificate Manager. Disabling SSL communication 1 Enter the following command to disable secure communication between the Advanced File Server and the Advanced Repeater server: runchannel transmitterURL hostName property –setProperty transmitter. clear the Enable SSL check box.

The options are particularly useful in large scale environments. Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 325 . Troubleshooting advanced file servers and advanced repeaters The following topics may be useful if you are experiencing issues with advanced file servers and advanced repeaters. http://localhost:5282/Marimba/Current/TransmitterAdministrator. For example.Troubleshooting advanced file servers and advanced repeaters http://transmitterURL:portNumber/?status transmitterURL is the URL to the Transmitter Administrator of the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater. The Network tab on the Advanced File Server or Advanced Repeater server Properties include options for controlling the number of network connections and the amount of network bandwidth. The browser displays the status information for the Advanced Repeater. where data is being pushed out to a large number of servers. ■ Configuring bandwidth throttling between Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers Location of log files Location of configuration files Starting and stopping the Advanced Repeater ■ ■ ■ Configuring bandwidth throttling between Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers Both the Advanced File Server and Advanced Repeater server include options that you can use to control the use of network resources during file staging and deployment. The options are ■ ■ Network connections Network bandwidth (Percentage of bandwidth and Maximum throughput) These options enable you to enter a maximum amount of available bandwidth that the Advanced File Server or repeater can use. as well as the number of kilobits per second that the Advanced File Server or repeater can use as throughput.

while the bandwidth setting in Advanced Repeater server is a per connection setting (for each repeater to file server link). The bandwidth setting on Advanced File Server limits the total traffic leaving the transmitter.0/AdvancedRepeater/tuner/.log Log files for Advanced Repeater Default location Tuner log files The tuner log file is located in: Windows C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\8.Location of log files NOTE The bandwidth setting on an Advanced File Server is different from the bandwidth setting on an Advanced Repeater server.0/AdvancedRepeater/tuner/.marimba/proxyroot/logs/ 326 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . across all parallel connections.marimba\proxyroot\lo gs\ UNIX /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8. Location of log files Log files specific to the Advanced Repeater are listed in Table 3 on page 325. These options are described in detail in the procedures for Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeater servers and Configuring Advanced Repeater servers.0\AdvancedRepeater\tuner\.log The proxy access log is located in: Windows C:\Program Files\BMC Software\Bladelogic\8.marimba\BCAC\ UNIX /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8.marimba/ws3/ Proxy log files access-y<yyyy>-w<w>. Table 3 Log file history-<n>.0\AdvancedRepeater\tuner\.

tuner.log The proxy admin log is located in: Windows C:\Program Files\BMC Software\Bladelogic\8. Table 4 Configuration files for Advanced Repeater Default location Properties file properties.0/AdvancedRepeater/tuner/.txt UNIX /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8.marimba/proxyroot/logs/ Location of configuration files Configuration files specific to the Advanced Repeater are listed in Table 4. However.display. perform the following steps: 1 Add the following property to the properties.nodisplay=true 2 Restart the advanced file server.0\AdvancedRepeater\tuner\.txt The main configuration file for the tuner is located in: Windows C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\8. if you are experiencing problems on Linux or UNIX systems that are not running X-Windows.marimba\proxyroot\lo gs\ UNIX /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8.txt file (see Table 4 for location of file): marimba.0\AdvancedRepeater\tuner\lib\tuner\properties.txt Configuration file Chapter 7 Configuring Advanced File Servers and Advanced Repeaters 327 . In general these configuration files should not be modified.0/AdvancedRepeater/tuner/lib/tuner/properties.Location of configuration files Table 3 Log file Log files for Advanced Repeater Default location admin-y<yyyy>-w<w>.

txt Starting and stopping the Advanced Repeater Use the following procedures to start and stop the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater: ■ On UNIX.Starting and stopping the Advanced Repeater Table 4 Configuration files for Advanced Repeater Default location Preferences file The preferences file is located in: Windows C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\8.0/AdvancedRepeater/tuner/. 328 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .txt UNIX /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8.0\AdvancedRepeater\tuner\. use the following command: /etc/init. use one of the following procedures: — From the Start menu. start or stop the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater Service. click Programs => BMC Software => BladeLogic Server Automation Suite => Advanced Repeater.txt Configuration file prefs.marimba/ws3/prefs.marimba\BCAC\prefs. — From the Services dialog.d/advancedrepeater {start|stop} ■ On Windows.

■ The BMC Continuous Compliance for Servers solution Requirements for integration ■ Chapter 8 Integrating BMC BladeLogic and Change Management 329 . Levels of integration The following sections provide an overview of the integration points. enabling you to track infrastructure change actions. The following topics provide an overview of integrating BMC BladeLogic with the BMC Remedy ITSM change management solution. NOTE BMC BladeLogic supports integration with BMC Remedy ITSM Change Management. Once configured and enabled. you can track infrastructure changes when a change is initiated by the BMC BladeLogic operator or when a remediation job is required due to the results of audit and compliance jobs. and describe how to enable that integration within BMC BladeLogic. and describe the configuration tasks in BMC BladeLogic that are required to communicate with BMC Remedy ITSM.Chapter 8 Integrating BMC BladeLogic and Change Management 8 You can integrate BMC BladeLogic with your Change Management processes.

See “Ensuring continuous compliance for servers” on page 331. The integration of BMC BladeLogic with BMC Remedy ITSM is accomplished through standard application interfaces (APIs). There are several configuration tasks you need to perform to enable the integration of BMC BladeLogic and BMC Remedy ITSM. See “Facilitating BMC BladeLogic operator-initiated change” on page 331.The BMC Continuous Compliance for Servers solution The BMC Continuous Compliance for Servers solution The BMC Continuous Compliance for Servers solution increases the value of BMC BladeLogic by providing an out-of-the-box integration with BMC Remedy ITSM applications. auditing. and remediation processes with IT management systems such as BMC Remedy ITSM. you can ■ ■ ■ facilitate the tracking of infrastructure change actions initiated by a BMC BladeLogic operator. For more information on the BMC Continuous Compliance for Servers solution. such as incident management and change management. Benefits of the integration Implementing the BMC Continuous Compliance for Servers solution enables compliance to the change process without requiring IT personnel to manually create change tickets. The BMC Continuous Compliance for Servers solution automates the integration of BMC BladeLogic monitoring. enrich BMC Remedy ITSM incidents with server configuration information. See “Enriching BMC Remedy ITSM incidents with server configuration information” on page 331. If you implement the solution. This automation not only saves organizations time. see BMC Continuous Compliance for Server Automation Solution Getting Started Guide. compliance. 330 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . These tasks are described in “Enabling BMC Remedy ITSM integration for job approval” on page 333. enabling an automated coordination of configuration management processes with other ITIL® processes. For complete details on installing and configuring BMC Atrium Orchestrator and setting up the BMC Remedy ITSM templates and filters. see “Requirements for integration” on page 332. There are also a number of installation and configuration tasks for other BMC Software tasks to enable the solution. but also reduces errors commonly associated with the manual coordination of change and configuration management. For an overview of these tasks. The solution reduces the risk of unauthorized and unplanned changes through enforced change tracking and automated documentation of all changes. ensure continuous compliance for servers. contact your BMC Software sales representative.

The BMC Continuous Compliance for Servers solution Facilitating BMC BladeLogic operator-initiated change When operations changes are implemented. Ensuring continuous compliance for servers This integration involves automatically creating incidents and change requests if noncompliant servers are detected. the BMC Remedy ITSM change task is closed with an associated completion status and any changed configuration items (CIs). To automate this change tracking process. a change request is automatically created in BMC Remedy ITSM when a BMC BladeLogic operator submits a job that requires BMC Remedy ITSM tracking and approval. After the job has run. These details added to the workinfo note of incident include things such as: ■ ■ ■ ■ audit trails basic server configuration information historical deployments in the past 24 hours links to BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation reports Chapter 8 Integrating BMC BladeLogic and Change Management 331 . security. Enriching BMC Remedy ITSM incidents with server configuration information This integration involves automating the addition of information from various relevant sources (such as BMC Atrium Configuration Management Database (CMDB) and BMC BladeLogic servers) to the incident ticket when a server-related incident is detected in BMC Remedy ITSM. Once the change is approved in BMC Remedy ITSM. The main benefit of this integration is to enforce continuous compliance to the change process without introducing labor intensive activities. or if deviations from a master server configuration are detected. The integration reduces the risk of unauthorized and unplanned changes through enforced change tracking. the job is scheduled for execution in BMC BladeLogic. The server auditing and server compliance capabilities in BMC BladeLogic involve: ■ detecting discrepancies between specific servers or component configurations against a baseline server or configuration monitoring and detecting compliance violations between specific servers or component configurations against specific rules related to operations. operators need to document these changes in BMC Remedy ITSM Change Management. The BMC Remedy ITSM user can launch the job details report from the task to verify the change actions. and governance ■ BMC BladeLogic integrates the remediation of discrepancies and compliance violations in BMC BladeLogic to the change management processes facilitated by BMC Remedy ITSM management system.

change tickets.The BMC Atrium Orchestrator workflows create incidents. you must have several BMC Software products installed and configured: ■ ■ ■ ■ BMC Atrium Orchestrator BMC Remedy ITSM BMC BladeLogic Server Automation BMC BladeLogic Integration for Atrium The BMC BladeLogic solution integrates the BMC Remedy ITSM and the BMC BladeLogic systems.Requirements for integration Requirements for integration To integrate BMC BladeLogic with BMC Remedy ITSM. ■ Tasks for integration with BMC Atrium Orchestrator — Configure and deploy the required Operations Actions (OA) management modules — Configure BMC Atrium Orchestrator Run Book modules For details on installing and configuring BMC Atrium Orchestrator and setting up the BMC Remedy ITSM templates and filters. 332 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . see “Enabling BMC Remedy ITSM integration for job approval”. see BMC Continuous Compliance for Server Automation Solution Getting Started Guide. — Review default BMC Remedy templates . you must complete the following configuration tasks in BMC Atrium Orchestrator and BMC Remedy ITSM: ■ Tasks for integration with BMC Remedy IT Service Management — Create the user ID which is used for monitoring the BMC Remedy alerts. using BMC Atrium Orchestrator as the enabling technology. To complete the integration tasks associated with BMC BladeLogic. To implement the solution. and tasks using BMC Remedy ITSM templates.

complete the following configuration tasks in BMC BladeLogic: ■ Configuring job approval for job types Assigning job approval permissions Setting up the connection to BMC Atrium Orchestrator Enabling HTTPS support for the BMC Atrium Orchestrator connection ■ ■ ■ NOTE Two of these tasks—setting up the connection to BMC Atrium Orchestrator and (optionally) enabling HTTPS support—are necessary also for integrating with BMC Atrium Orchestrator for the creation of Workflow Jobs through the BMC BladeLogic Console. set the Approval Required option for each available job type. Chapter 8 Integrating BMC BladeLogic and Change Management 333 . see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide. you can track these infrastructure changes when the change is initiated by the BMC BladeLogic operator. 3 Click OK. select Configuration => Approval Configuration. To fully enable the integration. Configuring job approval for job types The Approval Configuration option enables you to configure whether or not jobs of a given type require BMC Remedy ITSM approval. Use this procedure to enable or disable the BMC Remedy ITSM job approval capability at the job type level. By default. the approval for each supported job type is turned off. 2 On the Job Approval Required Configuration dialog. To configure job approval for job types 1 From the BMC BladeLogic Console.Enabling BMC Remedy ITSM integration for job approval Enabling BMC Remedy ITSM integration for job approval If your environment has been configured to integrate BMC BladeLogic with BMC Remedy ITSM Change Management (as described in BMC Continuous Compliance for Server Automation Solution Getting Started Guide). For more information about Workflow Jobs. if integration with BMC Remedy ITSM for job approval is desired.

select Roles. Assign the appropriate approval type to each user role. 6 Click OK to exit the Update Permissions panel. 4 Add any of the following RBAC controls to enable specific BMC Remedy ITSM job approval permissions ■ ■ ■ ■ Automatic Manual Emergency NoApproval For example. 3 Click the Systems tab. Assigning job approval permissions Use this procedure to assign permissions to different BMC BladeLogic users for integrating job execution with BMC Remedy ITSM. you may create a role for junior operators that has only Manual permission. NOTE By default. only the job approval type assigned for the user role is listed when running the job wizard.Assigning job approval permissions All job types with Yes specified for the Approval Required option will require the completion of the Approval tab information in the job wizard. 2 Right-click a role and select Open. ensuring that any jobs they initiate would be reviewed and approved by a BMC Remedy ITSM prior to execution. 5 Click OK to save the updates. When that user logs on. the BLAdmins Role has permissions to all approval permissions. 334 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . To assign job approval permissions 1 In the RBAC Manager workspace of the BMC BladeLogic Console.

User Name The name of the BMC Atrium Orchestrator user used to log on to the CDP. as all defined connections must be on the same grid. click Add. you must add the configuration information required to connect to BMC Atrium Orchestrator.Setting up the connection to BMC Atrium Orchestrator Setting up the connection to BMC Atrium Orchestrator Through the BMC BladeLogic Console. in seconds. For any additional CDP connection (see step 4). To configure the connection with BMC Atrium Orchestrator 1 Select Configuration => AO Configuration.* authorizations. The default is 300 seconds (five minutes). Before you begin From the BMC BladeLogic Console. Password Time-out Chapter 8 Integrating BMC BladeLogic and Change Management 335 . enter the configuration information required to connect to BMC Atrium Orchestrator. Specify the name of a grid only if this is the first defined CDP connection. The amount of time. Parameter Host Port Grid Name Description The IP address or fully-qualified host name of the BMC Atrium Orchestrator CDP server. 2 On the AO Configuration dialog box.* and the AutomationPrincipal. The name defined for the BMC Atrium Orchestrator grid. Other types of peers are not supported. The port number used to connect to the BMC Atrium Orchestrator CDP. The connection with BMC Atrium Orchestrator is established through the CDP or through a high availability CDP (HACDP). 3 On the Add new AO configuration dialog box. and then click OK. ensure that your role is granted the AOConfig. NOTE The integration between BMC BladeLogic Server Automation and BMC Atrium Orchestrator supports connections to a single grid only. The BMC Atrium Orchestrator password for the specified user. this field is read-only. before a BMC BladeLogic job that connects to BMC Atrium Orchestrator times out. This user must be associated with the ADMIN role in BMC Atrium Orchestrator.

you must enable an HTTPS connection on both products. to ensure high availability. ensure that you select the correct CDP. 336 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 4 If you want to add additional CDP connections to BMC Atrium Orchestrator. In this example. SSL enabled? Whether the connection to the CDP is SSL enabled and based on an HTTPS connection (as described in “Enabling HTTPS support for the BMC Atrium Orchestrator connection”). as defined in BMC Atrium Orchestrator. click Check Connection. and password details that you specified. create the keystore file by entering a command such as the following example: keytool -genkey -alias w2k3-sp-vm5 -dname "cn=w2k3-sp-vm5" -keyalg RSA -keystore C:\. If you want to test whether or not you can connect to the CDP with the host. user name. To enable HTTPS support on BMC Atrium Orchestrator 1 On the system where the BMC Atrium Orchestrator CDP is installed.keystore -storepass changeit The value entered for the -dname option must match the host name where the BMC Atrium Orchestrator CDP is installed. the value is w2k3-sp-vm5. Multiple CDPs installed on a grid form a High Availability (HACDP) environment and allow communication to continue even when the connection with one CDP fails. Enabling HTTPS support for the BMC Atrium Orchestrator connection If you want to secure the communication of data between BMC BladeLogic Server Automation and BMC Atrium Orchestrator. 5 Click Close on the AO Configuration dialog box. grid name. repeat step 2 and step 3 for every additional CDP instance of the same grid. If you define multiple BMC Atrium Orchestrator CDP instances.Enabling HTTPS support for the BMC Atrium Orchestrator connection Parameter Primary AO Description Whether to specify this CDP as the primary instance. port. ensure that only one of your CDPs is set as the primary instance (using the Primary AO check box). In a high-availability environment with multiple CDP instances.

csr -keystore C:\.5.xml file. <Connector port="8443" protocol="HTTP/1. copy the C:\.1" SSLEnabled="true" maxThreads="150" scheme="https" secure="true" clientAuth="false" sslProtocol="TLS" keystoreFile="C:\.keystore" truststoreFile="C:\Program Files\Java\jdk1.0_13\jre\lib\security\cacerts" /> The keystoreFile attribute points to the location where the keystore file resides and the truststoreFile attribute points to the CA issued certs in the JDK installation location. To enable HTTPS support for BMC Atrium Orchestrator on BMC BladeLogic 1 If BMC Atrium Orchestrator is installed on a different machine. 3 Restart the BMC Atrium Orchestrator CDP. 2 On the system where the BMC BladeLogic application server is installed. ■ ■ 3 Add the public certificate from the temporary file to the trusted certificate file by entering a command such as the following example: Chapter 8 Integrating BMC BladeLogic and Change Management 337 . alias is the name used to distinguish certificates.keystore file from the BMC Atrium Orchestrator CDP system to the system where the BMC BladeLogic application server is installed.keystore storepass changeit In the command shown above. keystore is the keystore file name and location that you created for BMC Atrium Orchestrator. export the public certificate from the keystore file which was generated for BMC Atrium Orchestrator to a temporary file by entering a command such as the following example: keytool -export -alias w2k3-sp-vm5 -file C:\cert.Enabling HTTPS support for the BMC Atrium Orchestrator connection 2 Enable HTTPS on Tomcat by completing the following steps: A Open the server. note the following: ■ file is the name and location of the certificate file that is going to be created from this command. B Uncomment the following block of configuration information and add two attributes.

Enabling HTTPS support for the BMC Atrium Orchestrator connection keytool -import -alias w2k3-sp-vm5 -file C:\cert.csr -keystore "C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\jre\lib\security\cacerts" -keypass changeit where C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version is the default installation path of BMC BladeLogic. 338 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 4 Enter the following command to check whether the certificate was added to the cacerts file: keytool -list -keystore C:\Program Files\BMC Software\BladeLogic\version\NSH\jre\lib\security\cacerts 5 Restart the BMC BladeLogic application server. Change the path if BMC BladeLogic was installed in a different location.

is used to encrypt data. Authentication Service A service implemented within the BMC BladeLogic Application Server that is responsible for authenticating a user and issuing a session credential. A Active Directory Microsoft's directory service.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Security Glossary This chapter provides definitions of terms commonly encountered when discussing network security. C certificate authority (CA) Security Glossary 339 . printers. The public key. which provides a centralized system for automating management of networked entities. files. or the BLCLI) uses to specify the Authentication Service from which a session credential should be obtained and the authentication mechanism that should be USED to acquire that session credential. AES The Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) is an encryption algorithm that has become the encryption standard used in most commercial transactions. such as applications. known to everyone. known only to the recipient of the data. but for BMC BladeLogic Decision Support for Server Automation. authentication profile A collection of information that a BMC BladeLogic client (BMC BladeLogic Console. which integrates BMC BladeLogic with a key distribution center (KDC) to utilize the Kerberos v5 protocol for authenticating client-tier users. an authentication service is implemented within the BMC BladeLogic Application Server. Network Shell. and the private key. AD/Kerberos authentication The Active Directory/Kerberos (AD/Kerberos) approach to authentication. the authentication service stands alone. is used to decrypt the data. Typically. and users. asymmetric encryption A method of encryption that uses public and private keys.

certification request A request for a certificate. A certificate is signed with the private key of the entity. CN=Users. D Data Encryption Standard (DES) A common method of data encryption using a secret key that is shared by the sender and receiver. Those objects are listed from bottom to top. For example.509 public-key certificates) to an identified end entity and vouching for the binding between the data items in a certificate. distinguished name An PKCS entry that identifies a user for an LDAP server. a certificate can be issued based on the request. A distinguished name consists of the name of an entry as well as the names of the objects above that entry in the LDAP directory. certificate management protocol (CMP) A definition of the online interactions between end entities. The highest trusted CA in the tree is called a root CA. DC=sub1. and the certificate authority (CA) in a public key infrastructure (PKI). DC=bladelogic. DC=com. DN 340 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . A certificate authority can be managed by an external certification service provider or the CA can belong to the same organization as the end entities in a public key infrastructure (PKI). DC=kerbtest. Certificates can be thought of as analogous to passports that guarantee the identity of their bearers. certification service provider (CSP) An organization that acts as a trusted third party or a certificate authority (CA) host providing public key infrastructure (PKI) services to other organizations and individuals. registration authority (RA). A certificate binds identity information about an entity to the entity's public key for a certain validity period. A certificate is digitally signed by a trusted third party who has verified that the key pair actually belongs to the entity. CAs can also issue certificates to other sub-CAs.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z The trusted party issuing digital certificates (especially X. certificate revocation list (CRL) A signed list containing the serial numbers of the certificates that have been revoked or suspended by the certificate issuer (the certificate authority (CA)) before their expiration date. generated by end entities or registration authority (RA) and sent to the certificate authority (CA). This leads to a tree-like certification hierarchy. If allowed by the certificate policy of the CA. A certification request contains at least the public key and some identity information about the entity making the request. a distinguished name might be CN=admin. certificates Digital documents used for secure authentication of communicating parties. The CA usually issues new CRLs at frequent intervals.

In Windows NT. Kerberos A cross-platform mechanism for mutual authentication between a client and server or between two servers before a network connection is opened between the two. Additional servers can function as backup domain controllers. Domain Authentication An approach to authentication that is based on AD/Kerberos authentication. Domain Authentication only requires a user to provide a name. F failover A mode of operating in which a secondary component takes over the functions of a primary component when the primary component cannot function. A user can access network resources by logging into the domain.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z An LDAP distinguished name. they can encrypt all of their communications to assure privacy and data integrity. defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). After a client and server have used Kerberos to prove their identity. J JKS Java keystore. IPSec can be used for protecting the data transmitted by any service or application that is based on IP. The protocol uses strong cryptography so a client can prove its identity to a server (and vice versa) across an insecure network connection. which delegates user authentication to the Active Directory domain controller. One server on the network functions as the primary domain controller by managing a master database of users for the domain. for protecting IP traffic at the packet level. domains are used to manage access to network resources. The primary domain controller periodically sends copies of its database to the backup domain controllers. The BMC BladeLogic implementation of Kerberos is based on MIT’s Kerberos v5. I Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) A protocol suite. A type of keystore file used for holding certificates. K keystore A file used to store a list of certificates along with their private keys. domain. The IPSec protocols are defined in RFC 2401. domain controller A role assigned to a server in a network of computers running the Windows NT operating system. This information is passed to the Authentication Service. Security Glossary 341 . and password when logging in.

proxy mode A method of using Network Shell to connect to a remote server via a Network Shell Proxy Server rather than connecting directly to the remote server. P PKCS A group of public key cryptography standards devised and published by RSA Security. public key infrastructure (PKI) A collection of mechanisms that together allow network users to exchange data securely over a network.500 models. the encryption and decryption of messages is done with different keys. tree-like structure. In public key cryptography. certificate repositories (directories). R RC4 An encryption algorithm. PKI See public key infrastructure (PKI). Public key infrastructure consists of a certificate authority (CA).A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z L LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP). and other mechanisms needed to authenticate. BMC BladeLogic provides an approach to user authentication based on PKI. N nonce A random number used for cryptographic processes. 342 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . public key cryptography A method for authenticating a sender or encrypting a message sent over a network. and decrypt communication using public key cryptography. The protocol for querying and modifying directory entries that are arranged in a hierarchical. a public key and a private key. Many companies are using LDAP-based solutions as directories and user management systems. The number is used only once to ensure that any communication used for authentication cannot be reused. encrypt. This means that each participating entity (person or device) of the public key infrastructure (PKI) has two keys. which requires a secure exchange of a shared key. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) A directory access protocol for accessing directories supporting the X.

single sign-on Security Glossary 343 . SHA1 The most commonly used function in the Secure Hash Algorithm (SHA) family of cryptographic hash functions. Because symmetric encryption is very fast and asymmetric encryption is very slow. including TLS. The RBAC Manager workspace in the BMC BladeLogic Console lets you define roles. see the BMC BladeLogic Server Automation User Guide.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z RBAC The BMC BladeLogic system of role-based access control (RBAC). After the session key is decrypted. it is used for symmetric encryption of all subsequent communication during a session. service URL The identity and address of a BMC BladeLogic Application Service or Network Shell Proxy Service that can be accessed using a session credential. role-based access control (RBAC) A system of granting permissions to perform certain types of actions to a role and then assigning users who need those permissions to the role. For more information on RBAC. BMC BladeLogic clients use session credentials to establish secure sessions with BMC BladeLogic Application Servers and Network Shell Proxy Servers. SecurID RSA’s authentication protocol based on two-factor authentication. Session keys are symmetric. meaning the same key is used to encrypt and decrypt data. A hash function like SHA1 takes a long string as input and produces a fixed-length string as output. such as expert administrators or help desk personnel. session credential A credential issued to a BMC BladeLogic client application after a successful user login. S secure remote password (SRP) A protocol for integrating secure password authentication into networked applications. SHA1 is used for many security application and protocols. asymmetric encryption is used only to encrypt a session key. In this way you can define a set of permissions that might be used by an entire class of users. RSA SecurID See SecurID. This output is sometimes called a digital fingerprint. session key A key used for encrypting and decrypting traffic during a communication session. SRP is the default approach to user authentication in BMC BladeLogic.

509 certificates and the X. The ITU-T X. 344 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .509 A standard for defining digital certificates. X X. the user does not have to authenticate again. TLS is typically used to secure HTTP connections.509 recommendation defines the formats for X. TLS is the successor to the Secure Socket Layer (SSL) protocol. authentication. and integrity for stream-like connections. T Transport Layer Security (TLS) A protocol providing confidentiality. trust store A file used to store a list of trusted certificates. As long as the session credential is valid.509 certificate revocation list (CRL).A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z The capability for users to cache session credentials so they can be used to secure subsequent sessions between client-tier applications and the Application Server or Network Shell Proxy Server.

185.conf file 198 creating blclient_login.local file 247 anonymous user on Windows 17 Application Server information about 106 reporting information about 108 Application Server Administration console 44 binding to an IP address 67 canceling jobs 60 configuring Application Server 52 configuring database server 78 configuring file server 74 configuring mail server 76 configuring Network Shell Proxy Server 68 configuring Perl 77 configuring process spawner 79 configuring remote execution objects 68 configuring SNMP server 77 configuring the PXE Server 89 A access to RSCD agents 233.txt file 277 network throttling options 315 advanced repeater configuring 316 disk space recommendations 306 installing 307 network throttling options 318 overview 305 securing communication 319 using network throttling 324 AES defined 339 agent logs disabling secure logging 280 enabling secure logging 279 security overview 277 verifying integrity of 279 agents and configuration files 233. 237 provisioning with SHA1 fingerprints 204. 209 exports file 240 granting access 233.txt file 273 <layout> tag for log4crc.conf file 188 creating blclient_krb5.conf file 196 creating user accounts 181 default users and roles 194 defined 339 exporting keytab file 181 implementing 177 locating KDC for client’s domain 197 locating KDC for service principal 186 overview 178 registering Authentication Service 180 requirements for Active Directory server 180 running kinit to get a TGT 201 sample domain structure 171 updating config.conf file 186 creating blappserv_login. 191 console to Application Server 194 copying keytab file to Application Server 185 creating blappserv_krb5. 208 scheduling cleanup of 300 secure file 253 users file 247 users.txt file 274 <category> tag for log4crc.properties file for clients 200 updating Kerberos registry settings 196 verifying a keytab file 190 advanced file server configuring 312 Index 345 . 235 cleanup of 293 configuring to authenticate using client-side certs 206. 237 accounts locking out 88 Active Directory defined 339 Active Directory/Kerberos 123 AD/Kerberos setting up Network Shell Proxy Servers 193 user names 192 AD/Kerberos authentication configuring Authentication Service 184.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Index Symbols <appender> tag for log4crc.

158 managing profiles with blcred 226 PKI 123 profile files 150. 128. 206 security for 133 setting up to cooperate 58 shutting down gracefully 43 starting 41. 109 stopping 42. 96 past due job behavior 63 pausing 43 profiles 93 profiles for 96. 111 terminating process for 111 tier 13 time-out behavior 61 types of 96 undeploying 110 understanding 30 work item threads 31 Application Service 135 configuring 140 architecture of BMC BladeLogic system 13 asymmetric encryption defined 339 asynchronous execution enabling 92 audience intended 11 authentication AD/Kerberos 123 Application Server framework 33 described 117 domain 124 for BMC Service Automation Reporting and Analytics 132 LDAP 122. 152 profiles 124. 93 creating client-side certs 203. 125 SecurID 123. 135 SRP 122 Authentication Service 135 configuring 137 configuring for AD/Kerberos 184. 166 single sign-on 121. 70 configuration wizard 34 configuring 29. 42. 191 configuring for Domain Authentication 171 registering in Active Directory domain 180 authorization described 120 automatically-generated objects setting retention time for 291 346 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 163. 70 setting connection types 65 setting database connections 64 setting login requirements 88 setting past due job behavior 63 setting retention time for automatically-generated objects 291 setting time-out behavior 61 showing no access nodes 84 specifying update group location 87 starting 45 Application Server cache scheduling cleanup of 299 Application Server Launchers editing access list for 113 Application Servers attributes for 100 attributes of 96 authentication framework 33 canceling jobs 60 changing access to 113 changing configuration of 100 cleanup of caches for 293 communication ports 65 compliance results maximum 62. 100 provisioning agents with SHA1 fingerprints 204. 151. 207 creating multiple 97 database connections 33. 129.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z controlling user interface settings 84 crossing mount points 82 default permissions 86 deleting group 84 enabling asynchronous execution 92 enabling import/export of property classes 87 enabling import/export of Property Dictionary 87 enabling/disabling the retention policy utility 289 evaluating SOCKS Proxy Server rules 73 job distribution 55 limiting smart live browse results 85 preparing HTTP proxy server support 66 restricting size of configuration objects 83 restricting size of extended objects 83 scaling Application Server 52 setting client idle time 60 setting communication ports 65 setting compliance results maximum 62. 64 deleting the deployment of 110 deployment directories for 95 deployments 94 discontinuing client-side certs 210 introduced 15 job distribution 32 job execution thread 31 managing 44 maximum client idle time 60 multiple 93. 208 restarting 111 restricting size of configuration objects 83 restricting size of extended objects 83 scaling 52 securing with certificates 223 securing with client-side certs 202. 109. 126.

174. 210 BLCLI to Application Server 130 console to Application Server 130. 194 illustrated 116 Network Shell to agent 133.conf file 173 creating for Application Server 186 blappserv_login. 173. 226 bltray 215 BMC Atrium Orchestrator integration 333 BMC BladeLogic architecture 13. 222 used by agents to authenticate 206. 11–12 overview 13. 206. 211. 175 configuration files exports file 240 Index 347 .A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z B BladeLogic integration configure job approval for job types 333 blappserv_krb5. 219. 13–19 Perl support 17 security 115. 212 Network Shell to Network Shell Proxy Server 131 repeater to agent 134. 203.properties file for clients 200 configuration for Domain Authentication 172. contacting 2 browsing limiting number of results 85 C caching user information 230 certificate authority 339 management protocol 340 revocation list 340 certificate trust store for LDAP 159 certificates defined 340 for BMC Service Automation Reporting and Analytics 132 for secure communication 258 importing to clients 226 managing with blcred 226 setting up 223. 221.conf file creating for consoles 198 blclient_login. 224 verifying with OCSP 153 certification request 340 service provider 340 chrole command 128 cleanup of agents on servers 293 of BMC BladeLogic database 288 of repeater servers 294 of the Application Server cache 293 of the file server 295 scheduling of 297 cleanupDatabase command 292 client connections maximum idle time 60 client tier 13 of BMC BladeLogic 14 clients connections to database 64 secure file 253 use of term 11 client-side certs 119 discontinuing use 210.conf file 174 creating for Application Server 188 blasadmin utility 44 starting 45 BLCLI security 130 settings for 84 blclient_krb5. 14. 15 configuration files 233. 271 configuring Application Server 29 default permissions 16 default security configuration 16 introduced 11. 216 for repeaters 218. 233–264. 202. 221. 209 commands restricting access with exports file 244 communication legs Application Server to agent or repeater 133. 70 config. 219. 207 for Network Shell client 212. 218. 115–231 security glossary 339 BMC BladeLogic Console and secure file 253 job parts 31 jobs and Application Server 31 security 130 BMC Service Automation Reporting and Analytics authentication 132 security for 132 server-side certificates 132 BMC Software.conf file creating for consoles 196 blcred configuring for AD/Kerberos 194 utility 125. 206. 222 reports client to reports server 132 security for 130 communication ports setting 65 Compliance Job results setting maximum number displayed 62. 217. 216. 222 for Application Server 202.

txt 272–285 logging 272. 64 databases configuring 78 connecting to Application Server 15 connections to 64 default entry in secure file 256 deployments 95 deleting for an Application Server 110 of Application Servers 94 DES defined 340 distinguished names for LDAP 160 documentation conventions 12 for Network Shell 12 Domain Authentication 124 configuring 171.local file 247. 272–285 overview 233. 235 secure file 253. 175 default users and roles 177 implementing 170 G groups deleting in console 84 H high availability 159 host entries in secure file 257 HTTP proxy server 66 I impersonation 119 described 119 import and update process specifying temporary group location 87 indirect deployments and certificates 262 Infrastructure Management window Application Server information 106 installing the BMC BladeLogic Advanced Repeater 307 integration and configuration checklist 332 Internet Protocol Security defined 341 348 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 253–262 securecert file 262 setting up 233. 233–264. 173. 172. 192 customer support 3 user names 176 domain controller defined 341 E encryption described 118 for secure communication 258 environment variables 129 exports file 240. 247–253 users. 169. 247–253 configuration objects restricting size 83 configuration wizard for Application Server 34 connection types for Application Server 65 console settings for 84 conventions used in documentation 12 copying objects default permissions 86 cross-registering users in RBAC database 160. 174.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z log4crc. 271 subnet designations 236 users file 247. 240–247 configuring 241 examples 246 introduced 233. 166. 74 configuring advanced file servers 312 scheduling cleanup of 299 D Data Encryption Standard defined 340 database cleanup 288. 289 scheduling 298 utility for 292 database configuration for Application Server 36 database connections for Application Server 33. 176. 235 options for configuring 241 restricting access to commands 244 extended objects restricting size 83 F file servers cleanup of 295 configuring 37.

conf file 186 creating blappserv_login. 191 configuring blcred 194 copying keytab file to Application Server 185 creating blappserv_krb5.conf file 198 creating blclient_login. 178 client to Application Server 194 configuring Application Server 185 configuring Authentication Service 184. 55 past due 63 setting maximum for Application Server 52 L LDAP defined 342 user names 160 LDAP authentication 122 certificate trust store 159 configuring 161 distinguished names 160 high availability 159 implementing 158 overview 158 listening ports on Application Server 65 log4crc. 11–12 IP address binding Application Server to 67 IPSec defined 341 disabling 283 enabling 283 keytab files 128 copying to Application Server 185 exporting 181 verifying 190 klist displaying SPN for Application Server 189 J job execution thread for Application Server 31 job parts for BMC BladeLogic Console jobs 31 job runs setting retention time for 290 jobs canceling 60 defining time-outs 60 distributing between Application Servers 32.properties file for clients 200 updating Kerberos registry settings 196 verifying a keytab file 190 keystore file for cooperating Application Servers 58 keystroke logs 281 M mail server configuring 76 man pages 12 middle tier communication 118 of BladeLogic 13 of BMC BladeLogic 15 mount points setting up in Application Server 82 N Network Shell and secure file 253 caching private keys 214 discontinuing use of client-side certs 216 Index 349 .conf file 196 creating user accounts 181 default users and roles 194 exporting keytab file 181 implementing 177 locating KDC for client’s domain 197 locating KDC for service principal 186 registering Authentication Service 180 requirements for Active Directory server 180 running kinit to get a TGT 201 sample domain structure 171 updating config.txt file 272.conf file 188 creating blclient_krb5. 272–285 <appender> tag 274 <category> tag 273 <layout> tag 277 configuring syslog 284 default values 285 syntax 272 logging configuration file 272 configuring syslog 284 default values 285 login setting requirements 88 K KDC locating for client’s domain 197 locating for service principal’s domain 186 Kerberos defined 341 Kerberos authentication 123.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z introduction to BMC BladeLogic administration 11.

208 securing with client-side certs 218. 192 defined 343 RC4 defined 342 remote execution objects configuring ports 68 repeater servers cleanup of 294 scheduling cleanup of 300 repeaters and certificates 262 configuring advanced repeaters 316 discontinuing use of client-side certs 222 provisioning with SHA1 fingerprints 204. 176. 149 Network Shell Script Jobs for Application Server cache cleanup 299 for cleanup 297 for database cleanup 298 for file server cleanup 299 for repeater server cleanup 300 for retention policy utility 297 for target server (agent) cleanup 300 network throttling for advanced file servers 315 for advanced repeater 318 overview 324 no access nodes showing in console 84 nobody user on UNIX 17 notifications setting through configuration wizard 38 defined 342 PKI authentication 123 ports Application Server 65 for remote execution objects 68 Post-Install Configuration wizard 34 database configuration 36 file server configuration 37 notification configuration 38 password configuration 38 private keys caching in UNIX 215 caching in Windows 215 managing 214 privilege mapping described 119 process spawner configuring 79 product support 3 profiles 100 property classes enabling import/export 87 Property Dictionary enabling import/export 87 protocol levels defined in secure file 255 for secure communication 258 public key cryptography defined 342 public key infrastructure defined 342 PXE Server configuring 89 O OCSP 153 overview BMC BladeLogic 13. 235 R RBAC 128 cross-registering users 160. 13–19 of Application Server 30 of configuration files 233. 221 security for 134 using advanced repeater servers 305 RESULTS_RETENTION_TIME property 290 retention policy utility P passwords requiring periodic changes 88 setting minimum length 88 setting through configuration wizard 38 past due jobs 63 Perl 17 configuring 77 permissions default 16 for copied objects 86 PKCS# 12 defined 342 PKI 350 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide .A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z documentation 12 man pages 12 managing private keys 214 securing with client-side certs 212 security 131. 219. 133 Network Shell Proxy Servers 68 configuring 142 configuring clients for 147 configuring stand-alone 145 setting up for AD/Kerberos 193 user information for scripts 147 Network Shell Proxy Service 135 configuring 142. 166. 169.

235 options for configuring 258 protocol levels 258 rscd entry 256 setting defaults for clients 256 setting defaults for servers 256 setting parameters for a client 257 setting up for NSH clients 212. 123. 237 secure file 253 users file 247 users. 126 managing with blcred 226 session key defined 343 session layer security described 118 single sign-on 117 AD/Kerberos authentication 123 authentication profiles 124.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z description of 289 enabling/disabling 289 executing 291 scheduling for execution 297 retention time for automatically-generated objects 291 for job runs 290 roles selecting 128 RSA SecurID 123 RSCD agents and configuration files 233. 137. 142 importing CA certs to clients 226 keytab files 128 LDAP authentication 122 S scripts user information for 147 secadmin utility 258 introduced 233. 235 exports file 240 granting access 233. 151 described 121 Domain Authentication 124 environment variables 129 implementing 135. 152 session credentials 121. 166 security administering 115. 235 secure agent logging 277 disabling 280 enabling 279 secure agent logs security overview 277 secure file 253. 140. 125 certificate verification using OCSP 153 client file locations 152 client files 150. 167. 122. 216 secure remote password defined 343 securecert file 262 configuring 263 SecurID user names 166. 168 configuring RSA Authentication Manager 163 implementing 163.local file 247 rscd entry in secure file 256 SecurID authentication 123 configuring 163. 124. 151. 135 using blcred 226 self-signed certificates 119 server tier communication 119 of BladeLogic 13 of BMC BladeLogic 15 servers use of term 11 server-side certificates for BMC Service Automation Reporting and Analytics 132 service principal name displaying with klist 189 service URLs 117 session credential cache file 150. 222 configuring for Network Shell Proxy Servers 147 default entry 256 encryption method 258 examples 261 host entries 257 introduced 233. 202 authentication using client-side certs 117 authorization 120 BLCLI to Application Server 130 console to Application Server 130 default configuration 16 for different communication legs 130 fundamentals 117 glossary 339 impersonation 119 Network Shell to agent 133. 169 Index 351 . 217 reports client to reports server 132 session layer 118 single sign-on 121. 211 Network Shell to Network Shell Proxy Server 131 privilege mapping 119 repeater to agent 134. 115–231 Application Server to agent or repeater 133. 253–262 certificates 258 client and server interaction 254 communication protocols 255 configuring 255 configuring for agents 210.

176.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z overrides for client SSO files 150 PKI authentication 123 SecurID authentication 123 selecting roles 128 session credentials 126 SRP authentication 122 smart card authentication 123 SNMP server configuring 77 SOCKS Proxy Servers 73 SPN displaying with klist 189 SRP defined 343 SRP authentication 122 standard terminology 11 subnet designations 236 support. 250 examples 252 introduced 233. 210 Network Shell to agent 212 repeater to agent 218.509 certificates 118 U update process 352 BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Administration Guide . 152 W wild cards using in users. 166.txt file 272 syslog configuring for logging 284 system architecture overview 13 specifying temporary group location 87 user accounts adding default for AD/Kerberos 194 adding default for Domain Authentication 177 creating in Application Server’s domain 181 locking out 88 user information for Network Shell scripts 147 generating 230 user interfaces settings for 84 user privilege mapping 17. customer 3 syntax for log4crc. 222 trusted keystore 150. 119 user_info.dat 128 users cross-registering 160. 221. 176.local 250 Windows client configuration for Kerberos 196 Windows user mapping 149 work item threads for Application Server 31. 219.local file 247. 151. 192 requirements for names 160. 52. 247–253 configuring 249. 247–253 configuring 249 examples 252 introduced 233. 166. 169. 235 options for configuring 251 T target server scheduling cleanup of 300 target servers cleanup of 293 technical support 3 terminology BMC BladeLogic 11 TGT running kinit to get 201 three-tier architecture 13 ticket-gathering ticket running kinit to get 201 time-outs defining for job parts 60 defining for jobs 60 TLS communication protocol 118 middle tier communication 118 server tier communication 119 TLS with client-side certs Application Server to agent or repeater 202. 192 users file 247. 235 options for configuring 251 users. 169. 206. 61 Workflow Jobs 333 X X.

.

*363391* *363391* *363391* *363391* *193363* .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful